040D0031-03 ADVIA AUTOMATION SOLUTIONS OPERATORS GUIDE ENGLISH, Rev. A, 2011-09 DXDCM 09008b8380601b61-1363356238429 PDF

ADVIA® LabCell®
ADVIA WorkCell™CDX
Automation Solutions
ADVIA® Automation Solutions
Operator’s Guide
040D0031-03 Rev. A, 2011-09

© 2011 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics. All rights reserved.
No part of this manual or the products it describes may be reproduced by any means or in any form without
prior consent in writing from Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics.
ADVIA, ADVIA Centaur, ADVIA CentraLink, LabCell, ADVIA WorkCell, CLINITEK Atlas,
Dimension, and IMMULITE are trademarks of Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics.
pcAnywhere is a trademark of Symantec Corporation.
Stago STA-R is a trademark of Diagnostica Stago Inc.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Plexiglas is a trademark of Evonik Industries.
Hemoguard is a trademark of Kabe Becton, Dickinson and Company.
Vacutainer is a trademark of Becton, Dickinson and Company.
The information in this manual was correct at the time of printing. However,
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics continues to improve products and reserves the right to change
specifications, equipment, and maintenance procedures at any time without notice.
If the ADVIA Automation Solutions system is used in a manner differently than specified by
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Observe all
warning and hazard statements.
Contents
1 Introduction
System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
How the System Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tracks and Pucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Light Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Utilities Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
ADVIA Automation Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
LineMaster Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Router Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ADVIA CentraLink System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Computer Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Communications Pathways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SampleTrakker Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2 System Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Types of Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Logging On to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Resetting the Routing and Puck Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Automation Systems Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Loading Samples on Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Monitoring the Sample Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Loading Samples on Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Load Tray Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Defining Tray Types and Loading Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Defining Tray Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Loading Trays into Drawers of Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Bringing Stations Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Starting the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3
Starting the Sample Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Introducing Samples to the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Loading Samples at the Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
The sample tube starts its path around the track. . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Loading Samples at an SIQ Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Loading STAT Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Introducing a Sample to the Track at an SIQ or
Manual Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Manual Check-in on an Automation System with
a Decapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Unloading Trays from the Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reusing an Unexpired Unload Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using the Sample Query and Pick List (F3) Screen . . . . . . 116
Sample Query Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pick List Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Additional Test Requests and Sample Management . . . . . . . . . 121
Using the SIQ (F5) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Accessing Event and Workorder Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Workorders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Viewing the Sample in Route Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using the Cold Storage (F4) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using Sample Tray Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Assigning a Location to a Tray in Cold Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Purging Cold Storage Tray Information from the System. . . . . . 133
Printing the Tray Inventory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
End-of-Shift Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3 Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Daily Maintenance Procedures — Hardware . . . . . . . . . . 137
Monitoring the Oil-Less Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Monitoring the Oil Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Monitoring the Air Prep Unit Waste Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Monitoring the DI Water Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Monitoring the City Water Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Inspecting the Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Inspecting the Robot Gripper Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Inspecting the Main Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Inspecting the Side Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4
Cleaning the Sample Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning the Sample Tray Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Daily Maintenance Procedures – Software . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Weekly Maintenance Procedures – Hardware . . . . . . . . . 149
Cleaning the Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Weekly Maintenance Procedures — Software . . . . . . . . 156
Archiving the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Shutting Down and Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Monthly Maintenance Procedures — Hardware . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning and Inspecting the Pucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Monthly Maintenance Procedures — Software . . . . . . . 170
Managing the Total Puck Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Performing a Manual System Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
As-Needed Maintenance Procedures — Hardware . . . . . 173
Emptying the Oil-Less Air Compressor Waste Bottle. . . . . . . . . . 173
Emptying the Oil Compressor Waste Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Adding Oil to the Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Emptying the Air Prep Unit Waste Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cleaning the Main Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cleaning the Side Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Replacing the Robot Gripper Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
As-Needed Software Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . 180
Restoring System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4 Troubleshooting
Identifying Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Managing Events Using the Events Screens . . . . . . . . . . 186
Acknowledging an Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Identifying and Resolving SIQ Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Accessing Event Messages through the SIQ (F5) Screen . . . . . . 190
Common SIQ Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Duplicate Sample ID Event Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Accessing Workorders through the SIQ (F5) Screen . . . . 198
Recovering from a Conveyor E-stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Recovering after Pulling Conveyor E-stop Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Recovering after Pushing Conveyor E-stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Restarting a Side Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5
Recovering from a Station E-stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
General Recovery Requirements for Any Station E-stop . . . . . . . 206
Specific Recovery Steps after a Sample Manager E-stop
or Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Recovering from an Unresponsive Interface Error . . . . . 209
Restarting an Interface Computer and Reestablishing
Communication with LineMaster Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Reintroducing Sample Tubes from Destination Trays
of the Sample Manager to the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Sample Tube in Robot Grippers after Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Routing Samples from a Disabled Sample Manager. . . . 221
Recovering from a LineMaster Power Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Empty Puck Percentage Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Resolving Workorder Transmission Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Resetting the Order Server on the Router Computer . . . . . . . . . 224
Resolving Inlabbing Transmission Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Resetting the Comm Server on the Router Computer . . . . . . . . . 227
Observed Problems: Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Observed Problems: Robot and Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Observed Problems: Compressor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Observed Problems: Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Observed Problems: Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5 System Configuration
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Defining User Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Maintaining Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Maintaining the Global Test List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Test Types Defined on the Global Test List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adding a Test to the Global Test List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Deleting a Test from the Global Test List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Assigning Global Test List Tests to an Instrument. . . . . . 257
Adding a Test to an Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Deleting a Test from an Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Assigning Pre, Post, and EOL Test Activities to Tests . . . 259
Assigning Pre, Post, EOL Test Activities by LIS Code . . . . . . . . . . 259
Assigning Pre, Post, EOL Test Activities by Sample Type . . . . . . 261
Assigning EOL Test Activities By Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6
Overriding Test Activities by Location Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Viewing the Summary of Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Defining Sort Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Creating a Sort Group and Adding a Test to the Sort Group . . . 266
Assigning a Sort Group to a Sample Manager Tray . . . . . . . . . . 268
Deleting a Sort Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Renaming a Sort Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Managing Load Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Configuring Scheduled Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Configuring Automatic System Data Backups. . . . . . . . . . 275
Configuring Automatic LineMaster Database
Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Enabling the Centrifuge Override Feature Globally . . . . 280
Activating the Automated Retrieval Feature . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automated Retrieval From Partial Processed Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automated Retrieval From SIQ Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Enabling the Centrifuge Override Feature
by Sample ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Enabling the Cap Status Confirmation Feature . . . . . . . . 284
Using Excess Sample Tube Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Enabling a Preferred STAT Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Enabling the ADVIA CentraLink Test Status Feature . . . . 287
Using STAT Sample Processing Delay Notification . . . . . . 287
Using Direct Sample Return and Duplicate SID
Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Direct Sample Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Duplicate SID Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6 Sample Management
Sample Tube Check-in Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Test Priority Determines Routing Priority on the Track . . . . . . . . 301
Routing Priority with Pre-Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Routing Priority with Post Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Changes to Sort Groups Affect Sample Processing . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Automated Retrieval from the Partial Processed Tray . . . . . . . . 304
Automated Retrieval from the SIQ Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Numerical Priority Value Changes to Global Test List Tests . . . . 306
Routing Priorities for Reruns and Reruns with Dilutions . . . . . . 306
7
Processing Samples with the ADVIA CentraLink System
Advanced Rerun Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Appendix A: Safety Information

Protecting Yourself from Biohazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Protective Covers, Doors, and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Appendix B: Warranty and Support Information

Limited System Warranty and Service Delivery Policy . . . . . . . . 323
Appendix C: Orderable Supplies
Appendix D: Specifications
ADVIA LabCell System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
ADVIA WorkCell CDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Sample Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Sample Tray and Cover Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Sample Tray Cover Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Barcode Reader Assemblies in the Divert and
Interface Gates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Barcode Reader Assemblies Above the Sample Manager
Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Barcode Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Barcode Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Barcode Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Barcode Label Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Label Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Barcode Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Appendix E: Symbols
Appendix F: Glossary
8
9
10
1 Introduction
System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
How the System Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tracks and Pucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Track Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Light Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Utilities Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
ADVIA Automation Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ADVIA Hematology Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ADVIA Chemistry Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ADVIA Centaur Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SIQ Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Centrifuge Module Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Decapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CLINITEK Atlas Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Stago STA-R System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Dimension® RxL System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Dimension Vista® Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
IMMULITE® Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
LineMaster Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
LineMaster Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Router Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ADVIA CentraLink System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Computer Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Communications Pathways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SampleTrakker Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Scheduled Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sample Query and Pick List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Cold Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
SIQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11
12 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide
Introduction
1 Introduction
This Operator’s Guide applies to System Software 4.9 and higher.
System Overview
ADVIA® Automation Solutions systems provide an innovative approach to
laboratory automation. The systems consist of modular components that
can be variably configured to create custom, open laboratory automation
solutions for sample tube management.
The basic building block of the ADVIA Automation Solutions system is a
2-meter section of dual-lane track. ADVIA Automation Solutions systems
contain a main track, which enables samples to route to the various
instruments and modules, and side tracks, 2 per each 2-meter conveyor
section, which provide access to the instrument or module interfaces. This
dual track design, which enables the system to control and manage the
routing of samples, eliminates the problem of sample backups that can
occur on single-track systems.
Instruments and modules are connected to the track to process samples.
An instrument is a connected system, such as the ADVIA 2400 system or
ADVIA Centaur® XP system, that analyzes samples.
A module is a connected system, such as the Sample Manager or
Centrifuge module, that does not analyze samples, but performs sample
management functions.
For ADVIA LabCell® systems, the utilities system, which contains air, water,
waste, and power, is located beneath the track. Each 2-meter section of
track provides 2 sets of lanes moving counter clockwise. When all the
2-meter sections are put together, the resulting system contains a
continuous loop of track. This design allows you to connect instruments or
modules on both sides of the track and minimize the amount of floor space
required for the automation system. An ADVIA LabCell system
accommodates up to 16 instruments or modules including the Sample
Manager.
ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 13

Introduction
The Sample Manager is a robotic module that moves sample tubes on and
off the track automatically.
Figure 1-1: Automation Track
1. Light tower
2. Utilities Cabinet (for ADVIA LabCell systems only)
3. Dual-lane track
4. Conveyor
5. 2-meter section

Introduction
The dual-lane track consists of the main track and side tracks. The main
track moves samples in a circular route. The side tracks move samples from
the main track to an instrument or module and then back to the main track
or Sample Manager.
Figure 1-2: Automation Track (Top View)
1. Main track
2. Side track
3. Instrument or module
4. Utilities Cabinet and drive unit (for ADVIA LabCell systems only)
For ADVIA WorkCell ™ CDX systems, utilities are accommodated as per

laboratory requirements. The ADVIA Workcell CDX system provides power
for interface computers and robot modules. Water, power, and waste
accommodations must be provided by the lab for each individual analyzer.
An ADVIA WorkCell CDX system supports up to 8 stations including the
Sample Manager.
ADVIA Automation Solutions systems use a single sample tube carrier,
called a puck, to transport sample tubes on the track.
Processing sample tubes individually allows the laboratory to balance 3
aspects of laboratory testing:
• capabilities of the instruments and modules
• need to prioritize and process the samples as quickly as possible
• ability to report patient results in the shortest time possible

Introduction
Features
Feature Description
Continuous loop system The nonlinear (loop) design saves space in
the lab, enables the routing of sample tubes
to the appropriate stations of the track based
on the tests of their workorders, and
facilitates repeat or reflex testing.
Load Balancing Load balancing is the process by which
sample routes are determined from all
instruments capable of processing tests in a
workorder. The Router logic determines the
instrument to which the sample tube routes
based on the number of sample tubes in
route to the instrument, the online status of
the instrument, and test availability at the
instrument.
Sample management Samples are tracked both during processing
and after they are removed from the system.
After manual or automatic review through
the ADVIA CentraLink® software, add-ons,
repeat, or reflex tests are automatically
retrieved by the Sample Manager robot and
placed back on the track for additional
processing.
Utilities system One connection exists for water supply,
ADVIA LabCell systems power supply, and air supply between the
only instruments and the ADVIA LabCell system.
Utility System The ADVIA Workcell CDX stem provides
ADVIA Workcell CDX power for interface computers and robot
system only modules. Water, power, and waste
accommodations must be provided by the
laboratory for each individual analyzer.

Introduction
User configurable The system does not require software

software updates to accommodate changes in
configuration.
Adding additional instruments or rearranging
instruments on the automation system can
be done by your technical support provider.
Combined manual and Instruments, except the CLINITEK Atlas®
automated sample interface module, can be operated both as
processing stand-alone systems and as part of the
automation system. Running STAT or micro
samples can be accommodated at any time
during automation operations without
interruption of sample tube delivery to the
instrument.

Introduction
How the System Works

ADVIA Automation Solutions systems are designed to minimize the
amount of manual work required by the operator. A Sample Manager is a
robotic module that moves sample tubes on and off the track
automatically. An operator loads input trays, such as a Load tray, into the
Sample Manager and after sample processing is complete, removes
destination trays, such as an Unload tray, from the Sample Manager.
Figure 1-3: Sample Manager
1. Sample tray
2. Drawer

Introduction
The Sample Manager robot moves samples from the output trays to the
track for analysis by the instruments and removes samples from the track
to the input trays after analysis is complete.
Figure 1-4: Sample Manager Robot
1. Sample Manager robot

2. Sample tray
3. Side track
Sample Manager robot picks up the sample tube from a sample tray and
places it in an empty puck at the Sample Manager interface gate. The
sample tube barcode is read at the interface gate and the sample tube is
checked into the system. The sample tube is released to the track for
processing.
If DIrect Sample Return is enabled, a sample tube is only released after the
barcode is successfully read and the workorder contains an available test
on an online instrument. If the sample tube is not released, the sample is
returned to the appropriate tray within that Sample Manager. For more
information about Direct Sample Return, see Using Direct Sample Return
and Duplicate SID Management‚ page 288.
The automation system communicates with the ADVIA CentraLink system,
which is the data management software solution and communication link
between the automation system, the Laboratory Information System (LIS),
and the instruments, to determine which tests must be run for a sample.

Introduction
The Router software is a component of the LineMaster software that

determines the route in which a sample tube takes to complete the tests of
its workorder at the instruments and that controls the divert gates and the
interface gates.
When a sample tube is checked into the system, a database query is
initiated to determine the instruments capable of processing the tests of a
sample workorder. The system’s logic determines the instrument to which
the sample tube routes based on the following instrument information:
• number of sample tubes in route to the instrument
• online status of the instrument
• test availability
A pair of gates is located at each instrument or module station.
The divert gate reads the sample barcode again and diverts the sample
tube only if that gate has the selected instrument or module.
An interface gate positions the sample tube within reach of the instrument
or module and reads the sample tube barcode again before processing. It
then moves the sample tube back to the main track.
Figure 1-5: Gates
1. Divert gate
2. Main track
3. Side track
5. Interface gate
Depending on the type of instrument, the pick position is the place in front
of an instrument from which a sample tube is directly aspirated or from
which the sample tube is moved by a robotic interface into the instrument.

Introduction
If the instrument was not designed to aspirate directly from the sample
tube at the interface gate, a robotic arm at the instrument interface moves
the sample tube to the sample handling area of the instrument or to the
sample rack.
Figure 1-6: Robot Arm and Sample Tube
1. Robot
2. Interface gate
3. Pick position
When aspiration of the sample is complete, the robotic arm at the

instrument interface moves the sample tube back to the interface gate.
The interface gate rotates, reads the barcode, and moves the sample to the
side track, which leads directly to the main track. The instrument sends the
test results to the ADVIA CentraLink system.

Introduction
When all the tests are completed for a sample, the sample moves to a
Sample Manager. The Sample Manager robot removes the sample from the
puck at the interface gate and places the sample into a sample tray. The
LineMaster software, which allows for monitoring the status of stations
and the location of samples on the track, records the tray number, row,
and column of the sample.
As long as a sample remains anywhere within the automation system, the
sample can be automatically retrieved for add-on, repeat, and reflex
testing. If the sample tube is on the track when the order is received, the
sample tube is routed directly to the appropriate instrument or module. If
the sample tube is in the Sample Manager, the Sample Manager robot
retrieves the sample tube and moves it to the interface gate.
When a sample tray is full and all repeat, reflex, and add-on tests have
been completed, the operator removes the tray, uses the LineMaster
software to assign the tray to a cold storage location, and then moves the
tray to that location. If a sample needs to be retrieved for follow-up testing,
the operator can use the LineMaster software to determine the cold
storage location of the sample.
Hardware Overview
ADVIA Automation Solutions systems consist of the following major
hardware components:
• conveyor
• Sample Manager
• gates
• stations
The hardware and software components that connect the instruments to
the conveyor, in terms of communications and sample transport, are called
stations. ADVIA Automation Solutions systems have 2 types of stations:
robot stations and non-robot stations.

Introduction
A robot station interfaces an instrument or module that cannot aspirate

directly from the interface gate. A robot moves the sample between the
interface gate and the sample handling area of the instrument or module.
An example of this type of station is the ADVIA Hematology system.
Figure 1-7: Robot Arm and ADVIA Hematology Tube Rack
1. Robot
2. ADVIA Hematology tube rack
3. Pick position
4. Side track

Introduction
A non-robot station interfaces an automation-ready instrument or module

to the conveyor:
• An instrument that is automation-ready aspirates directly from the
sample in the interface gate. An example of this type of station is the
ADVIA Chemistry station.
Figure 1-8: Aspiration Probe
1. Aspiration probe of the ADVIA Chemistry system

2. Interface gate
3. Side track
4. Main track

Introduction
• A module, such as the Sample Manager, has an integrated robot that

moves the samples between the interface gate and the trays in the
module.
Figure 1-9: Sample Manager Robot

2. Sample tray
3. Side track
ADVIA Automation Solutions stations have the following components:
Component Description
Gates Each station has a pair of gates. The
divert gate directs the sample from
the main track to the side track. The
interface gate positions the sample
within reach of the instrument or
module for processing, and then
moves the sample back to the side
track.
Programmable Logic Controller The PLC provides the
(PLC) communications connection between
the Router software and the gates.
Each gate pair has a PLC.

Introduction
Component Description
Side track The side track moves samples from
the main track to an instrument or
module for processing and then back
to the main track.
Interface computer or Robot The interface computer or RCC runs
Control Cabinet (RCC) and the software that establishes the
communications software communications connection between
the instrument or module and the
LineMaster system.
Robot A robot moves samples between the
(robot stations only) interface gate and the sample
handling area of the instrument or
module.
An ADVIA LabCell system supports up to 16 stations: at least 1 station for

the Sample Manager and a combination of up to 15 other stations, which
can include instruments, modules, additional Sample Managers, manual
gates, and 1 SIQ gate. ADVIA LabCell systems have a Utilities Cabinet that is
the control center for plumbing, electrical, and waste systems.
An ADVIA WorkCell CDX system supports up to 8 stations: at least 1 station
for the Sample Manager and a combination of up to 7 other stations, which
can include instruments, modules, additional Sample Managers, manual
gates, and 1 SIQ gate. Utilities such as electrical power to the instruments,
waste, and water are provided by the laboratory.

Introduction
Conveyor
The upper portion of the conveyor is called the track, which transports the
sample tubes throughout the system. For ADVIA LabCell systems only, the
lower portion of the conveyor is divided into the electrical side and the
plumbing side. The electrical side contains the cables and wiring that
connect the instruments to electrical power and communications. The
plumbing side contains the pipes that connect the instruments to city
water, deionized water, compressed air, and a waste pipe.
Figure 1-10: Conveyor
1. Upper portion of conveyor

2. Lower portion of conveyor
3. City water for ADVIA LabCell systems only
4. Deionized water for ADVIA LabCell systems only
5. Compressed air for ADVIA LabCell systems only
6. Waste pipe for ADVIA LabCell systems only

Introduction
Tracks and Pucks

The main track consists of a continuous track that travels around the
system in a circular counterclockwise direction. The side tracks move
samples from the main track to an instrument or module for processing
and then back to the main track.
Figure 1-11: Automation Track
1. Main track
2. Side track
4. Utilities Cabinet
Sample tubes are transported on the track in a single sample tube carrier
called a puck.

Introduction
Figure 1-12: Sample Tube in Puck
1. Sample Tube
2. Puck
Pucks are weighted to provide stability as the puck and sample tube move
along the conveyor. Pucks allow samples to be processed individually,
which provides greater efficiency and faster turnaround times. Pucks can
accommodate many sizes and types of sample tubes and containers. For
more information about the sizes of sample tubes and type of containers,
see Sample Tubes‚ page 331.

Introduction
Track Emergency Stop

In case of emergency, the track can be immediately stopped by pulling the
orange E-stop cord on either side of the conveyor.
Figure 1-13: Track Emergency Stop
1. Conveyor
2. E-stop cord
On the ADVIA WorkCell CDX, you can also stop the track by pushing the
track’s E-stop buttons which are located on either side of the conveyor at
the drive end of the system.
On the ADVIA LabCell, you can also stop the track by pushing the track’s E-
stop button located on the Utilities Cabinet.

Introduction
• ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems have an E-stop button on both sides of

the conveyor at the end of the orange E-stop cord.
Figure 1-14: ADVIA WorkCell CDX E-stop Button
1. E-stop button
• ADVIA LabCell systems only have 1 E-stop button on the Utilities

Cabinet.
Figure 1-15: ADVIA LabCell E-stop Button
1. E-stop button

Introduction
Light Tower
The light tower is the visual indicator of system status and consists of 4
colored lights. Typically, the light tower is installed so it is visible from as
many viewpoints as possible around the conveyor.
Figure 1-16: Light Tower
1. Light tower
2. Utilities Cabinet (for ADVIA LabCell systems only)
3. Conveyor
The colored lights in the light tower, when lit, indicate the system
conditions:
• Green indicates the conveyor is running.
• White indicates a warning condition, for example, low reagent level.
• Yellow indicates that operator attention is required, for example,
empty reagent level or minor hardware problem.
• Red indicates that a fatal occurred. The station transitioned to the
shutdown, offline, or red offline state.

Introduction
Utilities Cabinet
For ADVIA LabCell systems only, the Utilities Cabinet is the control center
for plumbing, electrical, and waste systems. The Utilities Cabinet provides
easy and complete installation of instruments at each interface gate
without extensive wiring and air piping in the lab.
Figure 1-17: Utilities Cabinet
1. Conveyor
2. Utilities Cabinet
3. E-stop button

Introduction
The Utilities Cabinet also contains the drive motor for the track, safety stop
switches, safety relays, pressure switch monitor, air shut-off switch, and
the start controller.
Figure 1-18: Utilities Cabinet (Open Doors)
1. Motor start box

2. Air and water plumbing

Introduction
On ADVIA LabCell systems, you can press the E-stop button on the Utilities
Cabinet to immediately stop the track in case of emergency. When a
conveyor E-stop is initiated, the main track and the side tracks stop
immediately. Use the E-stop button or cords only in case of emergency.
The Utilities Operator Interface box enables you to stop and restart the
track in case of an emergency and to view the status of the track.
Figure 1-19: Utilities Operator Interface Box

Introduction
Sample Manager
The Sample Manager provides an automated way to move sample tubes of
various sizes on and off the track.
Figure 1-20: Sample Manager

2. Sample Manager
3. Drawer; the Sample Manager has 5 drawers for samples

Introduction
You load sample tubes into a sample tray, which can hold up to 100
sample tubes. Load sample tubes starting in position A1 and continue from
left to right. Various types and sizes of sample tubes can be loaded on the
same tray.
Figure 1-21: Sample Tray
1. Sample tube A1 position

2. Sample tray
3. Sample tray barcode

Introduction
You then load the tray into a drawer of the Sample Manager.
Figure 1-22: Sample Manager Drawer
1. Sample tray
2. Drawer
The Sample Manager has 5 drawers each of which holds 2 trays.

When the drawer is opened the operator can define the type of tray from
the Sample Manager workspace.
Each drawer has a barcode reader that scans the barcode on the tray. The
system uses the tray barcode number to identify the tray and to establish
the storage expiration date for the samples on that tray.
The Sample Manager does the following:
• moves sample tubes from the trays to the track for processing
• moves samples from the track to the trays after processing is complete
• sorts samples according to pre-defined dispositions (for example, cold
storage or offline testing)

Introduction
High-volume laboratories may have multiple Sample Managers.

Each station with a robot on the automation system has an E-stop button
to stop the robot motion in case of an emergency.
Figure 1-23: E-stop Button on Stations with Robots
1. E-stop button
2. Operator interface box
To initiate an E-stop, push in the E-stop button. The robot immediately

stops its motion.
Use the E-stop button only in case of an emergency.

Introduction
The Sample Manager Operator Interface box enables the operator to

perform manual operations and to view the status of the Sample Manager.
Use the Stop button on the Sample Manager to stop the Sample Manager
robot so you can load or unload trays. Use the Start button on the Sample
Manager to initiate Sample Manager operation after loading or unloading
trays. The Start and Stop buttons are on the operator interface box.
Figure 1-24: Sample Manager Operator Interface Box
Gates
After the sample tube is placed in a puck at the interface gate place
position by the Sample Manager, the barcode is read and the sample is
checked into the system. The place position is the location into which a
sample tube is placed after it is aspirated at an instrument.
The Router software determines the most efficient route for the sample to
be processed by the instruments. The sample moves along the track to the
next station. Each station has a pair of gates: divert gate and interface
gate. After the sample is moved to the main track, it arrives at the divert
gate.

Introduction
The divert gate moves the sample tubes off the main track to the side track
of an instrument or module. As samples move around the track, the divert
gate stops each sample and reads the sample barcode. If the system
determines that the sample requires testing at that station, the divert gate
moves the sample to the side track. If the sample does not require testing
at that station, the divert gate lets the sample proceed to the next divert
gate.
The gate control button on the divert gate turns the power on and off to
the divert gate, the interface gate, and the side track.
Figure 1-25: Gate Control
1. Gate control button

2. Divert gate barcode reader
3. Main track
4. Side track
After the sample is diverted to the side track, it arrives at the interface gate.
When the sample arrives at the instrument or robotic module, the interface
gate rotates to move the sample tube to the interface gate pick position of
the instrument or module, and then reads the sample barcode again.

Introduction
When aspiration is complete, the interface gate rotates and moves the
sample tube back to the side track.
Figure 1-26: Interface Gates
1. The ADVIA Chemistry system aspirates directly from the sample

tube at the interface gate.
2. Interface gate
3. Pick position
4. Main track
5. Side track
The side track returns the sample to the main track.

For robotic stations, a robotic arm moves the sample tube from the
interface gate to the sample handling area of the instrument.

Introduction
When processing of the sample is complete, the robot moves the sample
back to the interface gate, which then rotates and moves the sample tube
back to the side track. The side track returns the sample to the main track.
Figure 1-27: Placing Sample at the Interface Gate
1. Robot
2. Interface gate
3. Place position

Introduction
The following flowchart shows the path of a sample tube from the Sample
Manager through a divert gate and an interface gate:

Introduction
This path repeats at each pair of gates on the track until the sample is
removed by the Sample Manager and placed in an Unload tray.
ADVIA Automation Stations

The hardware and software components that connect the instruments to
the conveyor, in terms of communications and sample transport, are called
stations. This section describes the specific details of stations that connect
instruments or modules to the conveyor.

Introduction
ADVIA Hematology Station

You can have 2 ADVIA Hematology systems at 1 ADVIA Hematology
station. The sample tube robot moves sample tubes between the interface
gate, the sample tube buffer, and the sample tube racks in the rack buffers.
The ADVIA Hematology station includes a rack corral that provides a
“parking space” for empty racks. This improves the operation of the
instruments by allowing them to go into the standby mode when samples
are not actively being processed.
Figure 1-28: Rack Corral and Buffer Area
1. Sample tube robot

2. Sample tube rack
3. ADVIA Hematology rack buffer

Introduction
The rack robot moves the sample tube from the rack corral, to the rack
clamps, and on to the input queues of the ADVIA Hematology system for
processing.
Figure 1-29: ADVIA Hematology Rack Area
1. Input queue of the ADVIA Hematology system

2. Rack robot
3. Rack corral
4. Rack clamp
5. Pick position
6. Sample tube buffer

Introduction
When processing is complete, the rack robot moves the rack from the
output queue of the ADVIA Hematology systems to 1 of the rack clamps.
Figure 1-30: ADVIA Hematology System Output queue
1. Output queue of the ADVIA Hematology system

2. Rack corral
3. Rack clamp
4. Place position
5. Sample tube buffer
6. Rack robot
The sample tube robot then moves the first 2 sample tubes from the
sample tube racks to the sample tube buffer, and the remaining sample
tubes directly into the interface gate place position. Then, the robot moves
the sample tubes from the buffers to the interface gate. The interface gate
indexes and the sample tube is moved to the side track and then to the
main track.

Introduction
Note The optional ADVIA Autoslide Slide Maker Stainer is connected to the
ADVIA 2120/2120i Hematology System and controlled by the
ADVIA 2120/2120i Hematology system software. The Hematology module
has no control over the ADVIA Autoslide Slide Maker Stainer. It can
automatically prepare and stain a high-quality blood smear on a
microscope slide for white blood cell (WBC) differential analysis and
microscope examination. The system makes and stains slides based upon
criteria that you can customize in the system software. You can also
choose to have slide making occur on all slides or no slides and you have
the option of preparing slides, but not staining them.
For more information about operating the ADVIA Hematology interface
and the optional ADVIA Autoslide Slide Maker Stainer, see the
ADVIA 2120/2120i Hematology System Operator’s Guide.
ADVIA Chemistry Station

The ADVIA 1650, ADVIA 1800, and ADVIA 2400 Chemistry systems are
collectively called the ADVIA Chemistry system when connected to the
ADVIA Automation system. The ADVIAChemistry system is a clinical
chemistry analyzer for in vitro diagnostic use that runs tests on human
serum, plasma, or urine in random access, batch, and STAT (interrupt)
modes. The ADVIA Chemistry Interface Kit enables you to include the
ADVIA Chemistry system on your ADVIA LabCell or ADVIA WorkCell CDX
system.
The operator uses the LineMaster software to perform the following
operations for the ADVIA Chemistry interface:
• select the ADVIA Chemistry interface
• change the state of the ADVIA Chemistry interface
• view events
• view and change the Test List screen (if applicable)
• view the Diagnostics screen

Introduction
The instrument aspirates directly from the sample tube at the interface
gate pick position.
Figure 1-31: ADVIA Chemistry System
1.1 Aspiration probe of the ADVIA Chemistry system

2.2 Interface gate
3.3 Pick position
4.4 Main track
5.5 Side track
For more information about operating the ADVIA Chemistry system, see
the ADVIA Chemistry Interface Operating Instructions.

Introduction
ADVIA Centaur Station

The ADVIA Centaur system is an automated, immunoassay instrument that
aspirates directly from sample tubes at the interface gate. Comprehensive
assay groups include fertility, thyroid function, oncology, cardiovascular,
anemia, therapeutic drug monitoring, infectious disease, allergy, adrenal
function, and metabolic. All assays use direct chemiluminescent
technology. Tests performed using the ADVIA Centaur system are intended
for in vitro diagnostic use.
Note All information in these instructions applies to ADVIA Centaur and
ADVIA Centaur XP systems using ADVIA Centaur system software 3.2 or
higher.
Using the LineMaster software you can perform the following operations
with the ADVIA Centaur interface:
• selecting the ADVIA Centaur interface
• changing the state of the ADVIA Centaur interface
• view events
The instrument aspirates directly from the sample tube at the interface
gate pick position.
Figure 1-32: ADVIA Centaur Station
1. Aspiration probe of the ADVIA Centaur system

2. Pick position
3. Interface gate

Introduction
For more information about operating the ADVIA Centaur interface, see
the ADVIA Centaur Interface Operating Instructions.
SIQ Station
The term Sample in Question (SIQ) station references a sample tray in the
Sample Manager or a gate pair on the conveyor. The SIQ station collects
duplicate sample tubes, sample tubes that have damaged or improperly
placed barcode labels, or sample tubes with no workorder.
The SIQ station does not have an instrument at the interface gate. You can
remove and check in sample tubes at the SIQ gate. Samples route to the
SIQ gate when there are problems with the workorder or the sample
quality.

Introduction
Centrifuge Module Station

The Centrifuge module is an optional module that automatically
centrifuges capped sample tubes for chemistry, immunoassay, and
coagulation tests.
Figure 1-33: Centrifuge Module
1. Robot 7. Interface computer

2. Cassette buffer area 8. Hettich centrifuge unit
3. Hettich access 9. Scale (weigh pan)
4. Drive unit 10. Interface gate

Introduction
5. Robot Computer 11. Status beacon

6. UPS
For more information about operating the Centrifuge Interface Module,

see the Centrifuge Module Operating Instructions.
Decapper
The Decapper automatically removes caps from sample tubes for
processing at instruments requiring uncapped tubes. The Decapper can be
placed next to the Centrifuge module or the Sample Manager. The Sample
Manager or Centrifuge module next to the Decapper is referred to as the
Decapper’s station pair.
Figure 1-34: Decapper Module
1. Power switch 3. Light tower

2. Decapper control cabinet 4. Decapper module

Introduction
Automation systems can accommodate multiple Decappers. Each

Decapper processes sample tubes independently of the paired module. For
automation systems with 1 or more Decappers, STAT, Load Mixed, and
AutoSwitch trays accommodate a mixture of capped and uncapped sample
tubes in separate pre-defined sections. Centrifuge Override trays
accommodate only 100% capped or uncapped sample tubes. Tray labels
mark capped and uncapped sections.
After decapping, the Decapper verifies that the cap is successfully and
completely removed. If the Decapper cannot determine the Cap Off status,
the sample tube moves to a cap status confirmation gate. If the
confirmation gate cannot verify the Cap Off status, the sample tube routes
to SIQ. If the confirmation gate determines that the cap status is Cap On,
the sample tube routes back to the Decapper for mandatory decapping.
You cannot use a Decapper without the confirmation gate enabled.
The Decapper accommodates pre-defined types of sample tubes and caps
in various sizes and materials
For more information about operating the Decapper, see the Decapper
Interface Operating Instructions.
CLINITEK Atlas Station

The CLINITEK Atlas instrument is a fully automated reflectance
spectrophotometer that performs in vitro urinalysis testing. It uses Reagent
Paks made specifically for the instrument. Each Reagent Pak contains a roll
of reagent strips, each containing reagent areas for testing glucose,
bilirubin, ketone (acetoacetic acid), occult blood, pH, protein,
urobilinogen, nitrite, and leukocytes. The reagent roll also includes a pad
for determining the color of the sample. The instrument determines the
specific gravity (SG) of the sample using the refractive index method. It
also determines the clarity by measuring the transmission and scattering of
light that passes through the sample.
The operator uses the LineMaster software to perform the following
operations for the CLINITEK Atlas interface:
• select the CLINITEK Atlas interface
• change the state of the CLINITEK Atlas interface
• view events
• view and change the Test List screen
• access the Teach screen
• specify system options

Introduction
The CLINITEK Atlas interface module uses a special section of side track
called a spur section. The divert gate reads the barcode and moves samples
to the spur section.
Note The CLINITEK Atlas interface module does not query the
ADVIA CentraLink system as it can only produce one set of test results for
each sample.
Figure 1-35: CLINITEK Atlas and Spur
1. Spur section of side track

2. Main track
3. CLINITEK Atlas interface module
The sample tube moves to the interface module gate pick position. The
barcode is read and is transmitted to the CLINITEK Atlas instrument. The
instrument aspirates from the sample tube at the interface gate pick
position.
Figure 1-36: CLINITEK Atlas System
1. CLINITEK Atlas system 3. Interface gate

2. Operator control panel 4. Interface gate pick position

Introduction
The operator control panel is part of the CLINITEK Atlas interface module.
The operator control panel allows you to operate the CLINITEK Atlas
interface module and stand next to the instrument rather than at the
LineMaster workstation. This makes it more convenient for you to perform
CLINITEK Atlas calibrations, analyze QC materials, and perform SG well
cleaning. The In-gate solenoid engages so that calibration, QC, and Specific
Graphic (SG) well cleaning materials can be loaded.
For more information about operating the CLINITEK Atlas interface
module, see the CLINITEK Atlas Interface Operating Instructions.
Stago STA-R System

The Stago STA-R system automatically performs in vitro tests to diagnose
coagulation abnormalities and monitor anticoagulant therapy. The
Stago STA-R system performs clotting tests (clotting time) as well as
colorimetric and immunological tests using plasma samples.

Introduction
The Stago STA-R interface module consists of an Universal Robotic

Interface (URI) and a Stago STA-R system. The URI serves as an interface
between the ADVIA Automation Solutions system and the Stago STA-R
system.
Figure 1-37: Stage STA-R System
1. Stago STA-R rack NLP

2. Interface gate
3. URI robot
When a sample arrives at the Stago STA-R station divert gate, the sample
tube barcode is read by a barcode reader and the sample tube is then
diverted to the Stago STA-R station interface gate.

Introduction
The Stago STA-R instrument moves a rack to the normal loading position
(NLP) in the rack tray. The URI robot moves to the interface gate and picks
the sample tube from the pick position at the interface gate and then
moves it to the rack in the Stago STA-R rack tray. When 5 tubes have been
loaded into the rack or the rack timeout has expired, the rack moves into
the Stago STA-R instrument.
The rack barcode and the sample tube barcodes are read by the
Stago STA-R instrument, which queries the ADVIA CentraLink system for a
workorder. The workorder is downloaded to the Stago STA-R instrument.
The rack is moved into position for the samples to be aspirated. When
testing on all the samples in the rack is completed, the rack is moved out of
the Stago STA-R instrument. The rack is moved back into the NLP in the
rack tray.
The URI picks the sample from position 1 of the rack and places the sample
tube into 1 of the 2 buffers inside the URI module. If a tube is in the pick
position of the interface gate, the URI robot picks the tube and places it
into position 1 of the rack in the NLP. Processed sample tubes are removed
from the rack and replaced with unprocessed tubes until the rack is full or
the rack timeout has expired.
For more information about operating the Stago STA-R interface module,
refer to Stago STA-R Interface Operating Instructions.

Introduction
Dimension® RxL System

The Dimension® RxL interface is comprised of 2 components: the
Dimension RxL system and the Sample Transfer Module (STM), which
aspirates directly from the pick position at the automation system interface
gate.
The Dimension RxL clinical chemistry system is a discrete, random-access,
microprocessor-controlled, integrated chemistry system that measures a
variety of analytes, including enzyme activities in body fluids.
Figure 1-38: Dimension RxL Clinical Chemistry System
1. Tip feeder
2. Pipette tips
3. STM transfer arm
4. STM segments
5. STM keypad
6. STM control board in the card cage area
7. Tip waste container
The sample tube barcode is read at the pick position of the interface gate
and is transmitted to the Dimension RxL instrument. The Dimension RxL
instrument queries the ADVIA CentraLink system for a workorder.

Introduction
The STM module transfers samples from sample tubes at the pick position
of the interface gate to the Dimension RxL sample wheel for processing.
The STM module transfers an aliquot of the sample in a disposable pipette
from the sample tube to a well position of an aliquot segment on the
sample wheel for processing. The Dimension RxL begins processing the
sample and communicates to the LAS that the sample tube can be
unlocked and the next sample can be moved into the pick position. When
the Dimension RxL finishes processing the sample, it transmits the results
via the interface to the ADVIA CentraLink system.
For more information about operating the Dimension RxL system, see the
Dimension RxL Interface Operating Instructions.
Dimension Vista® Systems

The Dimension Vista 500 system and the Dimension 1500 system are
collectively called the Dimension Vista system when connected to an
ADVIA Automation system. The Dimension Vista systems combine several
measuring technologies in one system. The Dimension Vista system
supports the diagnosis of many indication fields including anemia, heart
diseases, thyroid function, therapeutic drug monitoring, proteins and urine
narcotic screening.
The Dimension Vista system controls and tracks system reagent,
consumable, and waste levels and communicates this information to the
automation system. Specific requirements are determined and resolved at
the instrument.
Sample tubes loaded manually at the front of the system have processing
priority over sample tubes on the automation system. Track tubes may also
be STAT or routine. After aspirating the samples in the manually loaded
samples, sampling resumes from the automation system without operator
intervention.
Racks and tubes of the same priority are processed in approximately first in,
first out order. You can load routine sample tubes, STAT samples, cups,
calibrators, and controls from the front of the system while the interface is
online.
The Dimension Vista system automatically enables or disables on the
LineMaster Test List screen. Tests are disabled when the test is not
calibrated or reagents are depleted.
The Dimension Vista system interface to an ADVIA LabCell system or an
ADVIA WorkCell CDX system requires the use of primary sample tube sizes
from 13 x 75 mm to 16 x 100 mm.

Introduction
For more information about operating the Dimension Vista system, see the
Dimension Vista Interface Operating Instructions.
IMMULITE® Systems
The IMMULITE® system performs chemiluminescent immunoassays that
use serum, plasma, and/or urine samples for in vitro diagnostic testing.
Adjustors, controls, diluents and micro samples are loaded using the
sample carousel on the IMMULITE instrument. The IMMULITE interface
uses the VersaCell® robotic interface to transfer sample tubes to and from
the automation system.
Figure 1-39: IMMULITE System
1. Sample Carousel 9. Reaction Tube Hopper

2. Reagent Carousel (Covered) 10. Liquid Waste
3. Pipettors 11. Probe Wash
4. DRD Priming Accessories 12. Distilled Water

Introduction
5. Substrate Reservoir 13. Solid Waste

6. Bead Carousel 14. Printer
7. CD/DVD Drive 15. Power Switch
8. Floppy Drive
As the first sample arrives at the pick position of the interface gate, the
VersaCell robotic interface picks the first sample tube from the interface
gate pick position and places it into the IMMULITE instrument. The
VersaCellinterface reads the barcode and the ADVIA CentraLink system is
queried for a workorder. The next sample is indexed to the pick position of
the interface gate and the VersaCell interface picks the second sample tube
from the interface gate and places it into the IMMULITE instrument. After
the second sample tube is picked by the VersaCell interface, the empty
puck remains in the pick position to receive the first processed sample tube
into the interface gate pick position. The placed sample tube is indexed to
the place position and the next unprocessed sample is moved into the pick
position. The VersaCell interface then picks and places samples tubes as
they arrive at the pick position of the interface gate.
For more information about operating the IMMULITE system, see the
IMMULITE Interface Operating Instructions.
Software Overview
The ADVIA Automation Solutions system consists of the hardware and the
LineMaster and Router software. The LineMaster software is the primary
point of interaction for the operator. You use the LineMaster software to
monitor the status of stations and determine the location of samples. The
Router software controls the divert gates and the interface gates, and
determines the route of a sample tube on the track. You use the Router
software to access information about the gates.
The ADVIA CentraLink system is the data management component of
ADVIA Automation Solutions systems. The ADVIA CentraLink system is a
communication link between the automation system, the Laboratory
Information System (LIS), and the instruments.
The instruments query the ADVIA CentraLink system for workorders. The
instruments send test results and QC data to the ADVIA CentraLink system.
Patient test results are not processed by the automation system.

Introduction
LineMaster Software
The LineMaster software is the primary point of interaction for the
operator. The user interface for the LineMaster software is the LineMaster
workspace.
Figure 1-40: LineMaster Software
1. Customized diagram of your automation system configuration

2. Help icon
3. Date and time
4. Log-on badge

Introduction
You use the workspace to manage the sample trays, monitor the status of
stations, and determine the location of samples.
Figure 1-41: LineMaster System and Station Buttons
1. System buttons –These buttons provide access to LAS system

information.
2. Message line – This area displays messages to the operator. The
messages acknowledge an operator action or notify the operator
that an action was not performed correctly.
3. Status bars – These bars change color to indicate that the system
or a station requires attention:
White indicates a warning condition, such as a low reagent.
Yellow indicates that user attention is required, such as an empty
reagent.
Red indicates a failure condition that causes the system or a
station to shut down.
4. Station buttons – These buttons open screens that provide
station information and access tasks for that station.
The workspace buttons are grouped into 2 areas: system buttons and
station buttons.

Introduction
The system buttons open screens that provide information on the

automation system and screens that are associated with specific tasks.
Figure 1-42: LineMaster System Buttons
1. Status bars – These bars change color to indicate that the system
or station requires attention.
2. Utilities Cabinet – This button opens a screen that allows you to
view details of the utilities and turn the track on and off.
3. System – This button provides access to screens that allow you to
determine the location of samples, change the routing status of
samples, view the event log, and perform other tasks.
4. Control – This button opens a screen that allows you to change
the operating state of any or all of the stations on the track and to
exit the LineMaster software.
5. Overview – This button displays the System Layout screen, which
graphically depicts the layout of your system.
Each station on the automation system, with the exception of SIQ, has a
button on the workspace.
Figure 1-43: LineMaster Station Buttons
The station buttons change from green, when the station is online, to red,
when the station is offline, paused, or in the shutdown state.

Introduction
Each station button opens a Details screen for that station. From the
Details screen, you can view station information and change the state of
the station.
Figure 1-44: LineMaster Details Screen
The stations have 3 states, which are identified by the Online, Offline, and
Shutdown states buttons on the lower, left hand portion of the station
window, during which the stations accomplish the following:
• Online processes samples.
• Offline transitions the robots to idle and halts sample aspiration from
the track.Various tasks at certain stations can only be performed when
the station is offline.
• Shutdown stops the communication between the automation system
and the selected instrument/module interface..
ADVIA Automation Solutions systems do not control sample processing at
the instruments. The automation system only provides transport of the
sample to the instrument for aspiration.
After you select a state button, the station transitions from the previous
state to the selected state. When the station reaches the selected state, the
state button turns white.

Introduction
Note The Online states button can turn white or blue green depending on
whether the station is ready to accept samples.
If the station Then

is ready to accept the Online states button turns white, which
samples indicates that the station is online.
The online status is dependent upon the
state of the LAS and the state of the station.
is not ready to accept the Online states button turns blue green,
samples which indicates that the station is paused.
A station can be paused when the station is
not ready, the system is initializing, the
startup sequence is running, or samples are
being loaded manually on the station,
among other reasons.
When the station is ready to accept samples,
the Online states button transitions from
blue green to white, indicating that the
station is online.
LineMaster Screens
Many of the LineMaster screens are organized in 1 of 2 ways:
• organized by station
• organized by table

Introduction
The following figure shows a screen that is organized by station. All station
screens are organized this way.
Figure 1-45: LineMaster Station Screen Organization
1. Station name – This is the name of the station.

2. Operation buttons – These buttons change the information in the
information display area:
• The Details screen shows a picture of the instrument or
module at that station and may provide information specific
to the station.
• The Events screen displays the event log for that station.
• The Diagnostics screen allows authorized personnel to
access information that is helpful for troubleshooting
problems at that station.
• The Test List screen allows you to view and update the test
list for a station.
• The Teach screen allows authorized personnel to change the
motion of the robot arm.

Introduction
3. State buttons – These buttons change the operating state of the

station:
• Select Online to deliver samples to the station.
• Select Offline to transition the robots and software to the
idle state and to stop delivery of samples to the station.
• Select Shutdown to shut down the robots and software.
4. Information display area – The information that is displayed in
this area depends on which Operation button you select.
The number of operation buttons is different for each station depending

on the configuration of the station. For example, the Sample Manager
screens do not have a Test List button because the Sample Manager does
not process tests.
The following figure provides an example of a screen that is organized by
table.
Figure 1-46: LineMaster Screen Table Layout
1. The title bar indicates the name of the screen and the function key
for system buttons.
2. The information display area displays the information.
3. The buttons perform actions on the selected information.

Introduction
You can sort the information in some tables.
Figure 1-47: Sorting data in Tables
1. Select this button to sort byascending or descending order. For

example, if you want to change the order of the log time from
most recent time (ascending) to last time in the list (descending),
select the button.
2. Type characters to sort by character. As characters are typed into
the field, the data list is sorted to meet the criteria. For example, if
you want to view the events for the Sample Manager, type the
first few letters of its name.
3. Select this button to sort by group. The data in the selected group
is displayed first. For example, if you want to view the System
Fatal events, select System Fatal.
Function Keys
In addition to clicking an item on the workspace to open a screen, you can
open the most frequently used screens by pressing a keyboard function
key.
This key Opens this screen

F2 Event Log
F3 Sample Query and Pick List
F4 Cold Storage
F5 SIQ
Shift+F2 Users
Shift+F3 Global Test List
Shift+F4 Sort Groups
Shift+F5 Pre and Post Tests
Shift+F6 Load Zone List
Ctrl+F2 Scheduled Tasks
Ctrl+F3 Daily Log

Introduction
This key Opens this screen

Ctrl+F4 Service Log
Ctrl+F5 Backup
Ctrl+F6 Global Router Settings
Ctrl+F7 Override by SID
Ctrl+F8 Gate Information
Router Software
The Router software controls the divert gates and the interface gates and
determines the route of a sample tube on the track. The Router software
also balances the workload between multiple instruments.

Introduction
Use the Router software to access information about gates and samples.
The Router main screen displays assignments made in the LineMaster gate
properties window and a representation of the system layout.
Figure 1-48: Router Software
1. Station gate name

2. Stack lights represent the activity at a pair of divert and interface
gates:
• Red indicates the gate pair is off or is homing.
• Yellow indicates the gate pair, robot, or instrument is offline.
To expedite processing and reduce the time that sample
tubes spend on the main track waiting to be diverted to a
side track, the sample tubes are redirected to another like
station or to a Partial Processed tray.
• Green indicates the robot or instrument is online.
• Blue indicates an instrument is in manual calibration mode
or pause.
Additional information is available by accessing the stack light.
3. Gate pair number
Note No relation exists between the stack lights on the Router main
screen and the lights on the workspace or the light tower.

Introduction
ADVIA CentraLink System

The ADVIA CentraLink system is the data management component of
ADVIA Automation Solutions systems. The ADVIA CentraLink system is a
communication link between the LIS, the automation system, and the
instruments. Upon receipt of workorder download from the LIS, the
ADVIA CentraLink system automatically downloads all received workorders
to the LAS through the Router software. Upon sample tube check-in to the
LAS and during the physical routing of samples, LAS status update
messages are uploaded from the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink system to
provide accessioning and sample location information.
The ADVIA CentraLink system also provides the ability to manually query
the LAS for sample location information. The ADVIA CentraLink system
manages patient results and QC data by doing the following:
• reviewing and editing results
• manually entering workorders for samples
• determining which tests are complete for a sample
• managing QC data, including Levy-Jennings charts and Westgard rules
• automatically requests repeat, reflex, and add-on tests that are
retrieved and processed by the LAS
Test Status
When an instrument communicates a test status (enabled or disabled) to
the LAS, the LAS automatically communicates this information to the
ADVIA CentraLink system. If the sample is in the Sample Manager or on the
main track, the sample routing can adjust to the new test status on the
instrument. However, if the sample is on the side track or completing
aspiration, the sample routing does not consider the instrument’s new test
status.
If you manually enable or disable a test on the automation Interface Test
Lisst screen, the LAS automatically communicates this information to the
ADVIA CentraLink system. Additionally, if you manually enable or disable a
test on the ADVIA CentraLink system, the ADVIA CentraLink system
automatically communicates this information to the automation interface.
These instruments do not communicate test status to the LAS:
CLINITEK Atlas®, IMMULITE®, ADVIA 120/2120/2120i, and Stago STA-R
systems.
You can activate the ADVIA CentraLink test status on the Global Router
Settings (Ctrl F6). For information about activating and deactivating this
feature, see Enabling the ADVIA CentraLink Test Status Feature‚ page 287.

Introduction
Note The ADVIA CentraLink system and the LAS cannot send commands to
the instrument to enable or disable a test.
Inlabbing
The ADVIA CentraLink system has the ability to send inlabbing information
that it receives from the LAS to the LIS. Inlabbing information is the check-
in and cold storage information associated with samples.. Inlabbing
information includes the SID, registration date and time stamps, and
location of the sample tube in cold storage.
Inlabbing information is sent by the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink system
when sample tube barcodes are read on the automation system. This
inlabbing information serves as notification to the ADVIA CentraLink
system that the sample is in the lab. Inlabbing information can be sent to
the LIS from the ADVIA CentraLink system only once and is sent before
result upload to the LIS. This inlabbing check-in information can be used by
the laboratory to measure sample processing turnaround time.
In addition, the ADVIA CentraLink system can be configured to upload
sample archive and location information to the LIS for each sample for
which it receives information from the LAS. You have the ability to upload
this sample archive and location information as many times as the
ADVIA CentraLink system receives cold storage message updates from the
LAS.
Advanced Rerun
With the Advanced Rerun feature, the ADVIA CentraLink system allows you
to select a specific instrument for a sample tube to be rerun on. The
instrument specified in the Advanced Rerun request will override other
settings and preferences configured on the Automation system. The
instrument specified in the Advanced Rerun request is strictly enforced.
Therefore, if the requested instrument is not available to process the rerun,
the sample tube will be sent to the Partial Processed tray. For more
information, see Processing Samples with the ADVIA CentraLink System
Advanced Rerun Feature‚ page 311.
Computer Controllers
Each station has an interface computer and a programmable logic
controller (PLC).
The interface computer (IC) runs the software that provides the
communications connection between the instrument and the LAS system.
The interface computer exchanges sample tube information and event
messages between the instrument and the LineMaster software.

Introduction
The PLC provides the communications connection between the Router

software and the gates. The PLC relays the Sample ID (SID) number from
the divert gate (DG) or the interface gate (IG) to the Router software and
relays signals from the Router software to index the gate.
In order for this exchange of information to occur, the station must be

online and the gate control button must be up so power is supplied to the
PLC.

Introduction
Communications Pathways
ADVIA Automation Solutions systems exchange information between the
various parts of the system using different types of cable: ethernet,
profibus, and serial or parallel cable.
IC Interface computer
IG Interface gate
DG Divert gate
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
E Ethernet
P Profibus
S Serial/Parallel
Ethernet is a high-speed local area network that is used to exchange

information between the LIS, ADVIA CentraLink system, instruments,
Router software, LineMaster software, and the interface computer.
The profibus is a high bandwidth network that is used to exchange
information between the Router software and the PLCs.
Serial or parallel cables are used between the interface computers and the
instruments. Serial cables are also used between the gates and the PLCs.

Introduction
The following steps describe the communications that occur as a sample is

processed by the automation system.
The LIS sends the SID number and corresponding test requests to the
ADVIA CentraLink system. The ADVIA CentraLink system sends this
information to the Router software and the Router software sends this
information to the LineMaster software. The Router software creates a
route to the appropriate instruments for the sample based on the test
requests at the time of check-in.
The divert gate (DG) reads the sample barcode and sends the SID to the
Router software by way of the PLC. The Router software then sends the SID
to the interface computer by way of the LineMaster software if the sample
requires processing at that station.
The interface computer sends a message to the instrument. The
instrument queries the ADVIA CentraLink system for the workorder of the
SID.

Introduction
The Router software sends a message to the PLC to signal the divert gate to
move the sample tube to the side track.
If the instrument has a workorder for that SID, the instrument sends a
message to the LineMaster software through the interface computer. The
LineMaster software sends this message to the Router software.

Introduction
The interface gate (IG) reads the sample barcode and sends the SID to the
Router software by way of the PLC. The Router software sends the SID to
the instrument by way of the LineMaster software and the interface
computer. For instruments that do not have a queue, the instrument
aspirates the sample. For instruments that have a queue, the interface
computer compares the SID with the next SID on its worklist queue. If the
SIDs match, the instrument aspirates the sample. If the SIDs do not match,
the sample is skipped.
When aspiration is complete, the instrument sends a message to the

Router software by way of the interface computer and the LineMaster
software. The Router software sends this message to the PLC, which
signals the interface gate to move the sample to the place position and
then to the side track.

Introduction
The instrument processes the sample and sends the test results for that SID
to the ADVIA CentraLink system, which combines all the results for the SID
from all stations where the sample was processed and then sends the
results to the LIS.
SampleTrakker Software
The SampleTrakker software is a scaled down version of the LineMaster
software that runs on a computer connected to the automation network. It
allows operators who are not in close proximity to the LineMaster
workspace to access event and sample information.
The robot screens cannot be accessed using the SampleTrakker software
and no connection to the Router software exists.
To use the SampleTrakker software, the LineMaster must be online and the
system software must be running. To start the software on the
SampleTrakker computer, double-select the Sample Trakker icon on the
computer desktop. Log on using your Siemens user name and password.
SampleTrakker software recognizes the users assigned through the
LineMaster software.
The SampleTrakker workspace displays a blank overview. Because you are
not accessing track configuration information, the Control Management
area of the screen remains blank.
During operation, the SampleTrakker software communicates with the
LineMaster software; therefore, the LineMaster software must be active for
the SampleTrakker software to run properly.
System
At the SampleTrakker workspace, select System. A list of available
functions, for example, the Event Log, displays.

Introduction
Event Log
The Event Log reflects only those events that have been logged within the
SampleTrakker software. Events logged by the LineMaster software for LAS
events do not display.
Scheduled Tasks
The Scheduled Tasks screen displays only those tasks that occur on the
SampleTrakker computer. For instance, running the Archive Event Log task
in the SampleTrakker software archives the event log on the
SampleTrakker computer and not the event log on the LineMaster
computer.
The remaining screens in the SampleTrakker software show the same
information as the corresponding screens in the LineMaster software.
Sample Query and Pick List

The Sample Query and Pick List screen displays up-to-date sample
information when the LineMaster software is running concurrently.
Cold Storage
The Cold Storage screen displays up-to-date sample information when the
LineMaster software is running concurrently.
SIQ
The SIQ screen does not have any of the command buttons that interact
with the Router computer, that is, Route to SIQ, Reset Sample, Set Routed,
among others. A sample pulled from the SIQ gate updates the SIQ screen in
the LineMaster software, but does not update the SIQ screen in the
SampleTrakker software. The most up-to-date information for a sample can
be viewed by typing the SID and then pressing Enter.
To exit the SampleTrakker software, select Control and then select Exit.

2 System Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Types of Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Logging On to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Resetting the Routing and Puck Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Automation Systems Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Loading Samples on Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Monitoring the Sample Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tray Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Graphical Representation of Trays on the LineMaster Computer . . . . 97
Automation Systems with a Decapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Loading Samples on Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Attaching Tray Labels for Uncapped Sample Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Load Tray Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Defining Tray Types and Loading Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Defining Tray Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Loading Trays into Drawers of Sample Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Bringing Stations Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Starting the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Starting the Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Introducing Samples to the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Loading Samples at the Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
The sample tube starts its path around the track.. . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Loading Samples at an SIQ Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Loading STAT Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Introducing a Sample to the Track at an SIQ or
Manual Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Manual Check-in on an Automation System with
a Decapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Unloading Trays from the Sample Manager. . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reusing an Unexpired Unload Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using the Sample Query and Pick List (F3) Screen . . . . . 116
Sample Query Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Locating a Sample using the LineMaster Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Pick List Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Printing the Pick List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Additional Test Requests and Sample Management. . . . . . . . . . 121
83
Using the SIQ (F5) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Accessing Event and Workorder Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
SIQ (F5) Screen Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Workorders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Manually Change the Cap Status for Sample Tube at SIQ. . . . . . . . . 128
Workorders Tab Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Viewing the Sample in Route Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using the Cold Storage (F4) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using Sample Tray Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Assigning a Location to a Tray in Cold Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Purging Cold Storage Tray Information from the System . . . . . . 133
Printing the Tray Inventory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
End-of-Shift Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
84
System Operation
2 System Operation
Overview
The System Operation chapter outlines the routine tasks that a user with
Operator privileges might perform on a daily basis. This section also
provides information on sample management.
Types of Users
There are 2 types of system users: operator and system administrator. Each
type of system user is able to perform certain tasks. For more information
about the tasks that the System Administrator can perform, see System
Configuration‚ page 247.
Task Operator System

Administrator
Reviewing event messages Yes Yes
Acknowledging events Yes Yes
Performing diagnostics Yes Yes
Archiving events Yes Yes
Maintaining operator privileges No Yes
Maintaining global test lists Yes Yes
Using cold storage Yes Yes
Using the pick list Yes Yes
Maintaining sort groups Yes Yes
Assigning pre, post, and end of line Yes Yes
tests
Modifying the instrument test list No Yes
Scheduling tasks No Yes
Changing global router settings Yes Yes
Using the daily log Yes Yes
Shutting down the system Yes Yes
Teaching robot coordinates No Yes
Activating ADVIA CentraLink Test No Yes
Status

System Operation

Administrator
Changing Gate Information No Yes
Changing Preferred STAT Instrument Yes Yes
status
Changing Maximum In Route Queue No Yes
Adding, Modifying, Deleting Load No Yes
Zones
For tasks performed by a system administrator, see System Configuration‚

page 247.
Logging On to the System

After a system shutdown, you are presented with the Logon screen. Enter
the user name and password:
1. At the LineMaster logon screen, enter your user name or siemens.
2. Press the Tab key.
3. Enter your password or siemens.
Password characters are displayed as asterisks (***).
If either the user name or the password is entered incorrectly, both
fields are cleared.
4. Press Enter.
The LineMaster workspace displays.
5. Select Reset All.
Ensure that all stations home and the gate control buttons illuminate.
Resetting the Routing and Puck Count

The routing and puck count settings must be reset daily. For additional
information, see Reset All Function‚ page 297.
1. Ensure that all sample tubes are removed from the automation system.
All sample tubes must be removed from instruments, modules, the
main track, and side tracks before starting daily operation.

System Operation
2. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Global Router

Settings (Ctrl F6) or press Ctrl F6.
The Puck Management tab of the Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6) screen
displays.
Figure 2-1: Puck Management Tab

4. Verify that the global router settings are reset:
a. Switch to the Router computer.
b. Select the stack light for the Sample Manager.
c. On the Sample Manager screen function bar, select F7 Show
Queue.
The Samples in Route In Queue screen displays.
d. Ensure that the queue does not contain barcode numbers and that
the word “None” displays.
e. Switch to the LineMaster computer.
Automation Systems Trays

Loading Samples on Trays
You can load various types and sizes of sample tubes on the same tray. For
more information on sample tube sizes that you can use on the system, see
Sample Tubes‚ page 331.

System Operation
The Sample Manager has a sample tube sensor that detects whether a
sample tube exists in the tray and determines whether the tray is empty or
not. The Sample Manager robot begins retrieving the sample tube or tubes.
Should the robot encounter 3 consecutive empty positions in the tray, the
LineMaster software determines that the remaining positions in the tray
are empty, and the robot stops attempting to retrieve sample tubes from
that tray and moves on to the next full tray.
Note Best practices recommend that you load input trays starting at
position A1 and that you do not leave empty positions between sample
tubes.
For automation systems without Decappers, define STAT, Load Mixed,
Centrifuge Override, and AutoSwitch trays to load sample tubes to the
track.
BIOHAZARD
All products or objects that come in contact with human blood, even after
cleaning, should be handled as if capable of transmitting infectious
diseases. Wear facial protection, gloves, and protective clothing. See
Protection of Laboratory Workers from Occupationally Acquired Infections;
3rd edition, Approved Guideline (2005), Document M29-A3, promulgated
by the Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI), for information
about user protections when working with biohazardous material.
Drawers with Load trays that were previously used as unload trays within
the past 7 days will not close until the user acknowledges the expiration of
the tray.
1. When placing a tray in the drawer, orient the tray so that the bar code
on the face of the tray is to the left.

System Operation
2. Load the first sample tube in position A1 (row A, column 1).
Figure 2-2: Sample Tray Positions
1. Position A1
3. Load the second sample in position A2.

4. When row A is full, load the next sample tube in position B1.
5. Continue placing sample tubes from left to right, filling each row.
Note Do not leave empty positions between sample tubes. If there are
more than 3 empty positions in a row, the system assumes that there are
no more samples in the tray.
Monitoring the Sample Trays

The Sample Manager Details screen shows a graphical display of the
contents of the 5 drawers of the Sample Manager. Use the Sample
Manager Details screen to monitor the status of trays and to select tray
types.

System Operation
To access the Sample Manager Details screen at the LineMaster workspace,

select the Sample Manager station button.
Figure 2-3: Sample Manager Details Screen
At the Sample Manager Details screen, you can define the type of tray that
goes in each of the 10 positions in the 5 drawers. Once the tray type is
defined, the system manages all of the trays in that position as that type.
For example, if you define the front tray position in drawer 5 to be a STAT
tray, the system manages any of the trays that you load in that position as
STAT trays.
Although you can change the tray types as needed, it is recommended to
keep the drawers defined consistently once they are established.

System Operation
Tray Types
The tray type determines the status of the sample tubes in the Sample
Manager. The following table describes the tray types that you can define
on an Automation system.
Tray Type Definition

Load Mixed Load Mixed trays contain samples ready for testing.
tray Sample tubes that must be checked into the system for
(Required) processing are placed into a Load Mixed tray. The sample
tubes of a Load Mixed tray are moved from the Sample
Manager to the interface gate and onto the track.
A Load Mixed tray is an input tray that brings samples into
the automation system.
For systems with a Decapper:
Load Mixed trays can contain capped and uncapped
sample tubes with the following rations: 100/0, 80/20, 60/
40, 0/100.
The first portion of the ratio applies to capped tubes; the
second portion of the ratio applies to uncapped tubes.
Unload tray Unload trays contain samples that were processed by the
(Required) automation system and are ready for removal from the
system.
The Sample Manager robot moves processed samples
from the interface gate to an Unload tray. An Unload tray
is a destination tray.
If repeat or add-on tests are requested after the results are
reported to the ADVIA CentraLink system and the samples
remain in the Sample Manager, the samples are retrieved
automatically and placed back onto the track.

System Operation

Partial Partial Processed trays contain samples with incomplete
Processed routes. A Partial Processed tray is a destination tray.
tray Samples are considered partially processed when a test of
(Required) its workorder cannot run on the instrument to which it is
routed. This partial process happens when the target
instrument is offline, when a test is not available at the
instrument, or when a test is disabled for the instrument
on the Test List screen. When a sample does not complete
processing at a station, the sample tube routes to the
Partial Processed tray. When the automated retrieval from
Partial Processed tray feature is activated and the
condition that prevented route completion at the
instrument is addressed, the sample tube is automatically
retrieved from the Partial Processed tray and routed to an
instrument for processing. See Activating the Automated
Retrieval Feature‚ page 281 and Automated Retrieval
From Partial Processed Tray‚ page 281.
When the automated retrieval from Partial Processed tray
feature is not activated, the sample tube from the Partial
Processed tray must be manually transferred to a Load
Mixed tray or to a manual gate before the sample tube is
reintroduced to the track. You should wait until the
condition that prevented route completion at the
instrument to be addressed before transferring the sample
tube to the Load Mixed tray or to a manual gate.

System Operation

SIQ tray SIQ trays contain problem samples and perform the same
function as an SIQ station. Samples route to SIQ when
they have duplicate SIDs, no workorder, defective
barcodes, or integrity errors. After you troubleshoot the
problem, check the sample back into the system.
If your system does not have an SIQ station, at least 1 tray
in at least 1 Sample Manager must be defined as an SIQ
tray. Conversely, if an SIQ station is configured on the
system, you cannot assign an SIQ tray within the Sample
Manager.
If you enabled the Automated Retrieval from SIQ feature,
samples that had no workorder will be checked back into
the automation system when the workorder arrives. See
Activating the Automated Retrieval Feature‚ page 281.
For more information about the SIQ function, see Using
the SIQ (F5) Screen‚ page 122. For more information
about resolving SIQ events, see Identifying and Resolving
SIQ Events‚ page 189.
Sort tray Sort trays contain sample tubes that are sorted by tests
assigned to sort groups.
Sample tubes route to Sort trays when the corresponding
tests of the sample workorder must be processed or
analyzed offline or contain tests grouped together to meet
the laboratory requirements.
A Sort tray is a destination tray.
Note
For additional information, see Defining Sort Groups‚
page 265. Also, Changes to Sort Groups Affect Sample
Processing‚ page 303, and Assigning a Location to a Tray
in Cold Storage‚ page 131.

System Operation

STAT tray STAT trays contain samples that must be processed
immediately. STAT tray samples have priority over the
samples of other trays and are checked into the system
before other samples.
If an instrument side track queue is full, STAT samples are
still allowed to divert to the side track, while routine
samples are not allowed to divert to the side track.
STAT trays contain sample tubes requiring immediate
processing. Sample tubes processed from STAT trays have
higher priority than sample tubes processed from any
other tray.

System Operation

Centrifuge Centrifuge Override trays contain samples that are pre-
Override tray spun and therefore do not route to the Centrifuge
interface module.
When a Centrifuge module is connected to an automation
system, most samples of a defined sample type are routed
to the Centrifuge station for processing. Some samples
that originate from outside locations, however, may
already be centrifuged and decapped. When these
centrifuged and decapped samples are checked into the
system, they must not route to the Centrifuge module
even though their sample type is normally routed there.
These sample tubes must be assigned to a Centrifuge
Override tray.
Note Do not send uncapped samples to the
Centrifuge module. This causes sample spillage and can
cause damage to the system. To prevent centrifuged and
decapped samples from being routed to the
Centrifuge module, place these samples in a
Centrifuge module override tray.
For system with a Decapper:
Centrifuge Override trays contain sample tubes that do
not route to the Centrifuge module. Centrifuge Override
trays can contain all capped or all uncapped sample tubes.
For more information, see Enabling the Centrifuge
Override Feature Globally‚ page 280 and Enabling the
Centrifuge Override Feature by Sample ID‚ page 283.
MultiZone A MultiZone Sort tray can be defined as having a
Sort tray maximum of 5 different zones. Each zone consists of 20
consecutive positions within 2 rows on the tray. Each zone
can be defined to have the following destination types:
Unload, Partial Processed, Sort, Buffer, SIQ, and Duplicate.
Note Load Mixed, STAT, Centrifuge Override, and
Autoswitch trays types are not available to be defined in
a MultiZone Sort trays.
After sample processing, the Sample Manager unloads
samples into the applicable zone defined within the
MultiZone Sort tray.

System Operation

Autoswitch AutoSwitch trays allow you to use a single tray for both
tray loading and unloading samples. When an Autoswitch tray
contains samples, the Sample Manager empties the tray
like a Load Mixed tray. When an Autoswitch tray is empty
and is not removed from the drawer location, the Sample
Manager treats the tray like an Unload tray.
When a tray is identified as an Autoswitch tray, the
operator does not have to manually replace it when empty
with an empty Unload tray. The Autoswitch tray can
provide an efficient use of space within the Sample
Manager for managing samples.
Note Do not leave 3 consecutive empty positions in an
Autoswitch tray when loading samples. If the Sample
Manager detects 3 consecutive empty positions, the
Sample Manager assumes that the tray is empty and
treats it as an Unload tray. This could result in the Sample
Manager robot attempting to place a sample tube onto a
tray position that is already occupied by another sample
tube.
The Autoswitch tray should only be used under high
volume conditions where the Load Mixed tray and Unload
tray are not sufficient to handle the workflow. Before
designating an Autoswitch tray, contact your technical
support provider.
Switch loading and Switch unloading designations display
for AutoSwitch trays. You can use a single AutoSwitch tray
for loading and unloading sample tubes.
Buffer tray Samples are sent to the Buffer tray when the number of
samples currently in route equals or exceeds the
Maximum In Route Queue for instruments that can
process the sample.
Samples are auto retrieved from the Buffer tray when the
in route count drops below the maximum threshold or
another instrument that can process a test in the work
order becomes available.

System Operation

MultiZone A MultiZone Load tray can be defined as having a
Load tray maximum of 5 different zones. Each zone consists of 20
consecutive positions within 2 rows on the tray. Only user
pre-defined load zones may be assigned to MultiZone
Load trays.
Note Load Mixed, STAT, Centrifuge Override,
Autoswitch, Partial Processed, SIQ, Sort, Unload, Buffer,
and Duplicate trays types are not available to be defined
in a MultiZone Load trays.
Duplicate When Enhanced Duplicate SID Management and Direct
tray Sample Return are enabled, sample tubes identified as
duplicates are immediately returned to the Duplicate tray.
Note When Enhanced Duplicate SID Management is
enabled, a Duplicate tray must be defined and a tray
must be present with empty positions available for a
Sample Manager to transition online.
Unknown An Unknown tray contains sample tubes with unknown
status. The Sample Manager does not pick sample tubes
from an Unknown tray.
Note Throughout this document, the terms tray and zone are used
interchangeably for Automation System installations that have either a tray
or a zone in the Sample Manager.
Graphical Representation of Trays on the LineMaster Computer

When tubes are detected in Load Mixed, STAT, Centrifuge Override, and
Autoswitch trays placed in a Sample Manager, colors reflect the presence
of tubes in the tray. Load Mixed, Stat, Centrifuge Override, and AutoSwitch
trays are assumed to be completely filled when tubes are detected in these
trays. When sample tubes are picked from these trays by the robot, the
color is dynamically updated to black to show that a sample tube is no
longer present at that location.
The following colors are used to reflect the contents of the tray types
shown below:
Color Tray
Green Unload
Yellow Partial Processed
Red SIQ

System Operation
Color Tray
Cyan Sort
Blue Buffer
Red Duplicate
Black Empty sample tube position
If a sample tube is placed in a tray, the color associated with that tray is
displayed to represent the sample tube’s position. If a sample tube is auto
retrieved from a tray, the color associated with that tray is removed and
black is displayed to represent an empty position.
Tray condition Graphical representation

When an empty tray is placed in the
Sample Manager, all tube positions
are black.
When a Load Mixed tray with

samples is placed in the Sample
Manager, the tray displays the
number of sample tubes in the tray.
If 2 sample tubes are checked into

the system from a Load Mixed tray,
the first 2 tube positions
dynamically change to black.

System Operation
Tray condition Graphical representation

If 1 sample tube is checked out of
the system and moved from the
track to the Sample Manager, the
first tube position dynamically
changes from black to colored.
If another sample tube is checked

out of the system and moved from
the track to the Sample Manager,
the second tube position
dynamically changes from black to
colored.
Automation Systems with a Decapper

For automation systems with 1 or more configured Decappers, define Load
Mixed, STAT, and AutoSwitch trays to accommodate a mixture of capped
and uncapped sample tubes in separate predefined sections. Each tray can
contain capped tubes in the front section and uncapped tubes in the back
section. This feature enables you to introduce uncapped sample tubes
without using an entire tray. For Automation systems without Decappers,
this feature is not available.
Note Adding 1 or more Decappers to an automation system introduces
additional procedures for defining instruments, configuring Load trays in
the Sample Manager, attaching labels to Load trays, and enabling the cap
status confirmation feature.
Note With a Decapper, a cap status is required for a user defined load
zone. The cap status applies to all samples in the zone, whether a full tray
or Multizone Load tray.

System Operation
Load Mixed, STAT, and AutoSwitch trays accommodate the following fixed
ratios of capped to uncapped sample tubes in groups of 20 sample tubes (2
rows). The Centrifuge Override tray cannot contain mixed capped and
uncapped sections.
Tray Types Capped/Uncapped Capped/Uncapped

Tubes Rows
Load Mixed, STAT, and 100/0 10/0
AutoSwitch 80/20 8/2
60/40 6/4
0/100 0/10
Centrifuge Override, user 100/0 10/0
defined load zones 0/100 0/10
Note The Decapper and confirmation gate do not verify cap status for
sample tubes checked in from an uncapped section of a Load tray. When
sample tubes destined for a Cap On instrument or sort tests are checked in
from an uncapped section, the system routes them to SIQ. Sample tubes in
route to a Cap On instrument, that is, a Centrifuge module,
ADVIA Hematology, or Stago STA-R in Cap-On mode, are not processed at
the Decapper or confirmation gate.
Loading Samples on Trays

The system places sample tubes in capped positions onto the track before
those in uncapped positions. If the Sample Manager robot does not find
sample tubes in 3 consecutive capped positions, the Sample Manager
robot moves to the uncapped section of the tray.
CAUTION
Do not place uncapped sample tubes in sections of trays that are
configured for capped sample tubes. Uncapped sample tubes in capped
sections can have a negative impact on system performance and can
cause system damage. Always place uncapped sample tubes into
uncapped sections and place capped tubes into capped sections of Load
Mixed, STAT, or AutoSwitch trays.

System Operation
Load sample tubes in a split Load tray:

1. At the Sample Manager, place the first capped sample tube in the
position at the upper left corner of the capped tube section.
Figure 2-4: Split Load Tray
1. First capped sample tube position in capped tube section

2. First uncapped sample tube position in uncapped section
2. Continue loading all capped sample tubes sequentially without leaving

empty positions between tubes.
Note If the Sample Manager encounters 3 consecutive empty
positions in a capped section of a Load tray, it moves to the uncapped
section of the tray to continue processing and designates the capped
section as empty. If additional tubes are present in the capped section,
the Sample Manager does not place those tubes on the track.
3. Place the first uncapped sample tube in the first position of the
uncapped section.
4. Continue loading all uncapped sample tubes sequentially without
leaving empty positions between tubes.
Note If the Sample Manager encounters 3 consecutive empty
positions in an uncapped section of a Load tray, it moves to a new Load
tray to continue processing and designates the uncapped section as
empty. If additional tubes are present in the uncapped section, the
Sample Manager does not place those tubes on the track.
Attaching Tray Labels for Uncapped Sample Tubes

You can use labels to mark uncapped sections of Load trays so that staff
can properly place sample tubes in the correct sections. Each label marks 2
rows of an uncapped section. Capped sections do not require labels.

System Operation
Note The designations of capped and uncapped sections should remain

fixed. You can recycle these trays as they empty; do not designate them as
Unload trays.
Figure 2-5: Sample Tray Labels
Perform the following steps to attach labels to a Load tray:

1. From the tray pull-down menu at the Sample Manager Details screen,
select the tray configuration that lists the required proportions of
capped and uncapped sample tubes.
2. Starting from the bottom of the tray, attach one label for each group of
20 uncapped sample tubes.
Figure 2-6: Uncapped Sample Tube Labels
3. Continue labeling as many trays as you use in a normal work day.

You can reuse these trays after they have been removed from the Sample
Manager.

System Operation
Load Tray Configurations

The Sample Manager Details screen reflects the Load tray capped and
uncapped configurations when a Decapper is present on the system.
Figure 2-7: Sample Manager Details Screen
• Capped sections have a black background when no sample tubes are

present.
• Uncapped sections have an aqua background when no sample tubes
are present.
• When capped or uncapped sample tubes are present, they display in
multiple colors.
• Icons at the right side of a tray image indicate capped and uncapped
sections.
The pull-down menu lists each available tray configuration and the ratio of
capped to uncapped sample tubes. Menu names reflect configurations that
accommodate capped and uncapped sections in Load trays.
Defining Tray Types and Loading Trays

Defining Tray Types
1. Ensure that the Sample Manager is not in the shutdown state.
2. At the LineMaster workspace, select the Sample Manager station
button.

System Operation
3. At the Details screen, open the appropriate drawer of the Sample

Manager by selecting the drawer number below the position of the
drawer: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
4. At the appropriate tray position, select the pulldown menu.
5. Select the tray type for the first tray in the open drawer.
For explanations on tray types, see Tray Types‚ page 91.
6. Select the tray type for the second tray in the open drawer.
Loading Trays into Drawers of Sample Manager

1. At the Sample Manager, pull the open drawer until it is fully extended.
You must pull the drawer open until it is fully extended. If you do not
open the drawer to the fully extended length, the drawer does not
latch when you push it back in.
Figure 2-8: Opening Sample Manager Drawer
1. Drawer
2. Release button

System Operation
2. Load an appropriately filled or empty tray into each tray position of the
open drawer.
Ensure that the tray is loaded with the barcode located on the left-hand
side of the tray.
You load trays with samples to Load Mixed, STAT, Centrifuge Override,
AutoSwitched, MultiZone Load, or user defined load trays. You load
empty trays to Unload, Partial Processed, MultiZone Sort, Buffer,
Duplicate, SIQ, or Sort tray positions.
3. Close the Sample Manager drawer and ensure that it latches.
If the drawer does not close, open the drawer until it is fully extended
and then slowly close it again. If the drawer does not latch, at the
LineMaster workspace, read and acknowledge all messages. At the
Sample Manager, close the drawer.
Each drawer of the Sample Manager has a barcode reader. As the
drawer is closed, the tray barcode is read and the sample tube sensor
determines whether sample tubes are in the tray.
If the tray barcode the Sample Manager

changes because a different tray is either picks up the sample tube
loaded in that tray position in position A1 or places a
sample tube in position A1.
does not change either resumes picking up
sample tubes at the position
where it left off when the
drawer was opened or resumes
placing sample tubes in this
position.
4. Repeat these steps for each Sample Manager drawer for which you
must define a tray type and load a tray.
Note Many laboratories assign the 2 tray positions within a given
drawer the same type. For example, Drawer 1 is assigned 2 Load Mixed
trays and Drawer 2 is assigned 2 Unload trays.
Bringing Stations Online

Before bringing the Sample Manager online, ensure that the instruments
are maintained and the instrument and automation components are
online.

System Operation
Note If the stations are not online prior to bringing the Sample Manager
online, samples route to either partial processed or SIQ.
1. Verify that each of the instruments of the automation system are
maintained and ready for use:
• Instrument maintenance – As needed, add reagents and fill
supplies.
BIOHAZARD
Ensure that reagent packs are level and loaded correctly. Reagent packs
that are not level and loaded correctly can cause the system to stop.
For all instruments, ensure that reagent volume is sufficient to process the
day’s workload.
• Instrument calibration – Ensure the proper calibration of each
instrument.
• Instrument QC – Validate the QC controls for each instrument.
2. Bring the instruments online.
Note See the operating instructions for each instrument on the track
for bringing the instrument online.
3. Verify that the Sample Manager is offline.
4. Verify that the main track and side tracks are running.
5. Verify that the robot modules of the appropriate stations are online.
6. At the LineMaster workspace, verify the following:
• All station buttons are green except for Sample Manager, which is
still in the red offline state.
• All instruments on the system are in the white online state.
• The track is on.
Starting the Track

After ensuring that the instruments are online, start the track. The
procedure for starting the track depends upon the automation system.
Ensure that the E-stop buttons and E-stop cord are not activated. Reset the
E-stop button or cord if necessary.

System Operation
To start the ADVIA WorkCell CDX system track:

1. On the LineMaster workspace, select Utilities Cabinet from the system
buttons.
Note On some systems, this button may be labeled Track.
2. Select Online.
To start the ADVIA LabCell system track:

1. On the LineMaster workspace, select Utilities Cabinet from the system
buttons.
2. Select Online.
3. Locate the motor start box on the utilities cabinet.
The motor start box is behind the left door of the Utilities cabinet.
4. Press the Reset button.
Starting the Sample Manager

Only start the Sample Manager after you ensure all instruments are ready
for use and online, the robot modules are online, and the main track and
side tracks are running. When the Sample Manager is online, sample tubes
are introduced to the track automatically.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, verify these states:
• All required station buttons are green except for the Sample
Manager. The Sample Manager is in the offline state.
• The track is on.
2. Verify the tray information:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select the Sample Manager station
button.
b. Select Details.
c. Verify that the tray type and tray contents accurately match the
trays loaded in the Sample Manager.

System Operation
3. Start the Sample Manager.

You can start the Sample Manager from the Sample Manager operation
panel or from the LineMaster workspace.
If you are at the Then

Sample Manager station 1. On the Sample Manager operation
panel, ensure that the Drive Power On
light and the Power Indicator light are
illuminated.
The Sample Manager ignores the
Start button command until the
drive power is available.
2. Press the Start button.
3. To ensure that the Sample Manager is
online, wait until the green System
Running light displays.
LineMaster workspace 1. Select the Sample Manager station
button.
2. Select Online.
3. If Centrifuge Override or Decapper
Override trays are loaded in the
Sample Manager, respond to all
displayed system message windows.
Failure to do so prevents the Sample
Manager from operating.
Wait until the Online button turns
white. The station button turns
green.
Introducing Samples to the Track

You can load sample tubes using the Sample Manager, manual station, or
SIQ station.
Loading Samples at the Sample Manager

Samples are introduced to the track automatically through the Sample
Manager. The Sample Manager robot picks up the sample tube from a tray
and places it in an empty puck at the interface gate. The sample tube
barcode is read and the sample tube is checked into the system.

System Operation
Samples are loaded onto the track with this priority:

• STATs in unload trays that receive change orders
• STATs from Partial Processed
• STATs without workorders receiving a workorder
• Samples from STAT load trays
• Routine samples in unload trays that receive change orders
• Routine samples from Partial Processed or Buffer trays
• Routine samples without workorders receiving a workorder
• With equal priority, the Sample Manager robot alternates between
samples from Load Mixed and Centrifuge Override or AutoSwitch and
Centrifuge Override trays.
The sample tube starts its path around the track.
Loading Samples at an SIQ Station

If your automation system includes an SIQ station, samples can be
introduced to the track manually through this station, which includes an
interface gate.

System Operation
After troubleshooting SIQ samples with duplicate Sample IDs, damaged,

misaligned barcode labels, or no workorders, once resolved, you can check
them back into the system at the SIQ station. Samples can quickly be
checked into the system at the SIQ station.
Figure 2-9: SIQ Interface Gate
1. Pick Position (left puck position)

2. Place Position (right puck position)
To remove the sample from the track:

1. Remove the sample tube at the pick position, left puck position, of the
interface gate.
To return the sample tube to the track:
1. Place the sample tube at the place position, the right puck position, of
the interface gate.
When the barcode is read at the SIQ interface gate, the sample tube is
checked into the system and receives a route.
Note If a manual SIQ station is configured on the track, do not assign an
SIQ tray or SIQ zone in a MultiZone Sort tray within the Sample Manager.

System Operation
Loading STAT Samples

STAT samples, have a higher priority than routine samples. STAT samples
maintain priority processing during all sample processing states. STAT
samples can be introduced to the system through the Sample Manager,
the SIQ station, or they can be put directly on the instrument for
processing:
• STAT tray – Check in STAT samples using a STAT tray in the Sample
Manager. Samples in a STAT tray are moved to the track before the
samples in other trays.
• Manual gate – You can check in STAT samples at a manual gate.
• SIQ station – You can check in STAT samples at the SIQ station.
• Instrument – You can process STAT samples directly at the instrument.
Note See the station specific Operation Notes for the procedure on
loading STAT samples.
Introducing a Sample to the Track at an SIQ or Manual

Station
This section applies only to those installations that have an SIQ station
connected to the track.
Note The SIQ station divert gate is always singulating. As such, the
barcode label of every sample tube on the track is read each time it passes
the barcode reader at the SIQ divert gate.

System Operation
1. At the SIQ interface gate, put the sample tube in an empty puck at the
place position.
Figure 2-10: Pick and Place Positions
1. Pick position
2. Place position
2. If there is a sample in the pick position of the interface gate, remove it

so the sample tube in the place position can be checked in.
a. If this is an SIQ gate place the sample tube removed from the pick
position in a rack or tray until you can resolve the issue for which
the sample tube was routed to the SIQ station.
b. If this is a manual gate, the sample is delivered here for you to
process it off the LAS system.
The station interface gate does not index with a sample in the pick
position.
Note At the gate, remove samples from the pick position only, not
from the side track or from other positions at the gate. If a sample tube
is physically removed from a position other than the pick position, the
sample tube is not checked out of the system and, as such, the SID for
the sample tube remains in memory. Under these circumstances, when
the sample tube is reintroduced to the track at the interface gate for
check-in and the SID is read from the barcode label, a duplicate
Specimen ID error is generated and the sample tube is rerouted back to
the SIQ. For more information, see Duplicate Sample ID Event
Conditions‚ page 194.
When the sample is removed from the pick position, the gate indexes
and the sample is moved to the side track.

System Operation
Manual Check-in on an Automation System with a

Decapper
CAUTION
Do not manually check in sample tubes at a manual or SIQ interface gate
without first ensuring that the cap status is correct for the target
instrument. Sample tubes manually checked in at a manual or SIQ
interface gate bypass the Decapper and route directly to the instrument.
Sample tubes with an incorrect cap status that route to an instrument can
cause damage to the system.
On an automation system with a Decapper when a sample tube is not

checked in from the Sample Manager, it does not check in as it passes the
SIQ divert gate. The sample tube routes to SIQ. From SIQ, you must check
in the sample tube at a manual gate, SIQ gate, Load Mixed, STAT, or
AutoSwitch tray.
Unloading Trays from the Sample Manager

To unload trays from the Sample Manager, perform the following steps:
1. Stop the Sample Manager.
You can stop the Sample Manager from the Sample Manager operation
panel or from the LineMaster workspace.
If you are at the then

Sample Manager On the Sample Manager operation panel,
press Stop.
Ensure you use the Stop button and not
the E-stop button.
LineMaster workspace Do not select Shutdown with samples
remaining in the Sample Manager.
Selecting Shutdown erases sample
locations.
1. Select the Sample Manager station
button.
2. Select Offline.
Wait until the Offline button is white
and the station button turns red.

System Operation
2. Open the appropriate drawer of the Sample Manager.

You can open a drawer o at the Sample Manager using the drawer
release button or through the LineMaster workspace.
If you are at the then

Sample Manager Press the drawer release button on the
appropriate drawer.
Press only 1 drawer release button at a time.
The system only allows 1 drawer open at any
given time.
Do not press any other drawer button while
waiting for the first drawer to open. Doing so
causes the drawers associated with each
successive pressed button to open after you
fully extend and close the open drawer that
precedes it.
In the event that the release button is pressed
but the Sample Manager did not transition
offline, the Sample Manager robot completes
its current activity, such as, moving a sample
tube to an Unload tray, and then stops. The
Sample Manager transitions to offline; the
drawer opens.
LineMaster workspace 1. Select the Sample Manager station
button.
2. Select the drawer number, located below
the 2 tray positions of the of the
appropriate drawer: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
You must pull the drawer open until it is fully extended. If you do not
open the drawer to the fully extended length, the drawer does not
4. Remove the appropriate tray.

System Operation
5. Load a tray into this tray position.

Ensure that the tray is loaded with the barcode located on the left-hand
side of the tray.
You can leave Unload trays in the Sample Manager until they are filled
to capacity with 100 samples. Your technical service provider can set
an option to automatically expire trays reintroduced to a system for less
than 7 days.
In the event that you replace an Unload tray from Cold Storage to the
Sample Manager within 7 days of its expiration, the drawer of the
Sample Manager does not close and the system generates an event
indicating that the tray is not expired. See Reusing an Unexpired
Unload Tray‚ page 116.
and then slowly close it again. If the drawer still does not close, go to
the LineMaster System Manager Events Log to determine why the
drawer does not close and correct this issue.
Each drawer of the Sample Manager has a barcode reader. As the
drawer is closed, the tray barcode is read and the sample tube sensor
determines whether sample tubes are in the tray.
If the tray barcode... the Sample Manager...

changes because a different tray is either picks up the sample tube
loaded in that tray position in position A1 or replaces a
sample tube to position A1.
does not change either resumes picking up
sample tubes at the position
where it left off when the
drawer was opened or resumes
replacing sample tubes at this
position.
7. Start the Sample Manager.

See Starting the Sample Manager‚ page 107.

System Operation
Note When a printer is assigned to the Sample Manager and you remove
an Unload tray from the Sample Manager, a Cold Storage Inventory List
prints automatically. This report lists the Sample ID, secondary ID, date,
location, and assigned tests for each sample in the Unload tray. You can
also initiate printing of this report from the Cold Storage (F4) screen. See
Printing the Tray Inventory List‚ page 133.
Reusing an Unexpired Unload Tray

By default, Unload trays and the sample tubes contained therein, which are
removed from the Sample Manager to Cold Storage, expire on the 7th day
after removal from Cold Storage.
When an Unload tray is returned to the Sample Manager prior to
expiration, that is, within 7 days of removal, the drawer of the Sample
Manager does not close and the system generates an event indicating that
the tray is not expired.
To eliminate this unexpired tray event message and reset the status of the
Sample Manager tray, perform the following procedure:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select the Sample Manager station
button.
2. At the message dialog box, select Set Expired Tray.
3. At the Sample Manager, push the drawer in slowly until it latches.
and then slowly push the drawer back in until it latches.
Note If your laboratory commonly reuses the same Unload trays in less
than 7 days of removal from the Sample Manager, speak to your technical
service provider about disabling this unexpired tray warning feature and
enabling autoexpire trays.
Using the Sample Query and Pick List (F3) Screen

The Sample Query and Pick List (F3) screen displays the location of samples
within the automation system, that is, on the track, at an instrument, in
the Sample Manager, or in Cold Storage. This screen consists of a Sample
Query area and a Pick List area.
Upon initiating a successful query, sample information displays in the top
portion of the Sample Query area. Upon selecting an entry, location
information for a given SID automatically populates the bottom portion of
the Sample Query area.

System Operation
The SID, patient name, patient ID, or secondary ID can also be used to
search for patient’s; however, the SID is the main way of searching for this
information.
If the sample is in Cold Storage, the location information automatically
populates the location fields of both the Sample Query area and the Pick
List area and the checkbox in the Pick List column of the Sample Query area
is selected.
Sample Query Area

After you initiate a successful query from the Sample Query area, sample
location information displays.
If a sample is... Then...

on the track, at an • location information for a given SID
instrument, or in the automatically populates the bottom
Sample Manager portion of the Sample Query area.
• the checkbox in the Pick List column is
not selected.
• the location fields in Pick List area are
not populated automatically.
in Cold Storage • location information for a given SID
automatically populates the bottom
portion of the Sample Query area.
• the checkbox in Pick List column is
selected.
• the location fields in the Pick List area
are populated automatically.

System Operation
Locating a Sample using the LineMaster Workspace

1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Sample Query
and Pick List (F3) or press F3.
The Sample Query and Pick List (F3) screen displays.
Figure 2-11: Sample Query and Pick List (F3)
2. The white space above the column headings are the search criteria
entry fields. Enter the search criteria.
For example, enter the SID above the SID column heading.
3. Select the sample entry in the top portion of the Sample Query area.
Depending on where the sample is located within the automation
system, different values automatically populate the fields in the
demographics and Pick List area of the Sample Query screen:
If the Location is then

blank the sample was never checked in to the track or
it has exceeded the 7-day expiration date.

System Operation
If the Location is then

LabCell the sample is on the main track.
Instrument Name the sample tube is either at the indicated station,
on its way to the station, or just left the station.
If the Location, Tray then

ID, and Position is
populated the sample is in that location on the Sample
Manager.
If the Area, Shelf, then

Tray ID, and Pick
Position of the Pick
List is
populated the sample is in that cold storage location.
When the ADVIA CentraLink system requests a repeat, reflex, or addon

test, the Pick List checkbox is selected and the Pick List area of the
Sample Query and Picklist window are populated. If you manually
select a Pick List checkbox, the Pick List area of the Sample Query and
Picklist window are also populated.
Pick List Area

After a query is initiated for a sample that is in Cold Storage, the Cold
Storage location fields in the Pick List area of the Sample Query and Pick
List (F3) screen are populated with area, door, shelf, tray, and position
values for the applicable SID.
Printing the Pick List

You can print the pick list as a reference for locating a particular sample or
samples in Cold Storage by area, door, shelf, tray, and position.
Typically, you print a pick list after additional testing on a sample in Cold
Storage is requested. The printed list saves you from having to manually
write the location of samples in Cold Storage. You can carry the printed
pick list over to the Cold Storage location and manually retrieve the
samples that correspond to the printed location information.

System Operation
Note After the sample is retrieved from Cold Storage and is checked into
the system, the checkbox in the Pick List column in the Sample Query area
for the applicable SID is cleared and the corresponding location
information no longer displays in the Pick List area.
Note If a sample is removed from Cold Storage and not reintroduced to
the system, the checkbox in the Pick List column in the Sample Query area
for the applicable Sample ID remains selected. You have to manually clear
the checkbox in order to remove the location display from the Pick List
area.
To populate the Pick List:
1. Enter the SID and press Enter.
2. Select the Pick list checkbox.
3. Repeat these steps for all the SIDs that must populate the Pick List.
Print the Pick List:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then Select Sample
Query and Pick List (F3) or press F3.
2. Select Print Pick List.
The printed Pick List lists the location of the samples.

System Operation
Additional Test Requests and Sample Management

When a rerun or an additional test on a sample is requested through the LIS
or the ADVIA CentraLink system, the Router software determines the
location of the sample within the automation system.
If a sample is then
in an Unload tray in the the robot of the Sample Manager
Sample manager automatically moves the sample from the
tray to the track for the rerun test.
in Cold Storage you must manually retrieve the sample from
the Cold Storage location and check the
sample back into the system for the rerun
test.
Use the Sample Query and Pick List (F3)
screen to determine the exact location of
the sample in Cold Storage.
Note Whenever you initiate a Sample
Query query for a sample and that sample
exists in Cold Storage, the LineMaster
software generates a status message that it
cannot find the sample tube on the track.
This message is logged in the Event Log
(F2) screen. Simultaneously, the Cold
Storage location information for the
sample displays on the Sample Query and
Pick List (F3) screen.
Through the Sample Query and Pick List (F3)
screen, you can query the SID. The Pick List
column in the Sample Query area is
selected. The Cold Storage location fields in
the Pick List area are populated with the
exact location information.
Note The SID is removed from the Pick List
when the sample is removed from Cold
Storage and reintroduced into the system
via the Sample Manager or manual SIQ
station.

System Operation
Using the SIQ (F5) Screen

Depending on the configuration of the automation system, SIQ is defined
in 1 of 2 ways: an SIQ station or an SIQ zone defined within the Sample
Manager. If you have an SIQ station, you cannot have an SIQ tray defined
within the Sample Manager. Throughout this document, the term SIQ is
used interchangeably for installations that have either an SIQ station or an
SIQ tray in the Sample Manager.
The SIQ (F5) screen displays events associated with a sample, that is,
problems that cause the sample to route to the SIQ station, as well as
workorder details and sample status.
In addition to serving as a reference point and troubleshooting aid for
problem samples, the SIQ (F5) screen enables you to query the workorder
information for every sample in the automation system whether it has
been processed or not.
The SIQ (F5) screen is comprised of 2 tabs: Events and Workorders.
Accessing Event and Workorder Information

Access the SIQ (F5) screen:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then select SIQ (F5)
or press F5.
The Events tab of the SIQ (F5) screen displays.

System Operation
Field Description
Tray ID Unique identification number associated
with the tray in which the sample tube
exists after processing on the automation
system.
Note After you enter a Tray ID value in
the Tray ID field, you must press Enter in
order for this Tray ID to populate the
Current Tray field and to update the list
of SIDs that display in the left, topmost
area of the screen.
SID Unique identification number associated
with the sample.
Note After you enter an SID value in the
SID field, you must press Enter in order
for this SID to populate the Current
Sample field and to update the sample
details which display in the Event and
Workorder tabs.
Last Name, First Name, Fields are populated with patient specific
Sex, DOB, Patient ID, data.
Secondary ID
Sample Type The type associated with the sample:
whole blood, serum, plasma, or other.
Centrifuge Override This field is selected when sample tubes
are checked in under one of the Centrifuge
Override conditions:
• Checked in to the track from a
Centrifuge Override tray
• Checked in to the track from another
input tray, which includes Load
Mixed, STAT, and Autoswitch trays,
when the Centrifuge Override feature
is enabled globally
• Checked in to the track from another
input tray when the global Centrifuge
Override feature is enabled by
Sample Identification Number (SID)
for this sample

System Operation
Field Description
Spin Status The Spin Status checkbox is selected when
the hatch opens after a sample tube is
successfully centrifuged on the
Centrifuge module.
Priority The priority assigned to a test:
• S - STAT from LIS
• s - STAT from tray
• R - Routine
Cap Status Area
Cap On When the cap detector detects a cap on a
sample tube after a decapping attempt, or
an operator manually selects Cap On
status for a sample tube, the Cap On
checkbox is selected.
Cap Off When the sample tube is decapped, or an
operator manually selects Cap Off status
for a sample tube, the Cap Off checkbox is
selected.
Unknown When a workorder is downloaded to the
automation system from the
ADVIA CentraLink system, the Unknown
checkbox is selected. Samples that have
been processed and then removed from
the system also default to Unknown
status.
Cap Status Confirmation The Cap Status Confirmation checkbox is
automatically selected when a sample
tube is correctly processed at the
Decapper or is routed to the confirmation
gate after decapping.
Manual Override When an operator manually selects the
cap status for a sample tube, the Manual
Override checkbox is selected.

System Operation
2. To access information on a given sample or tray, enter the SID in the

SID field or enter the Tray ID in the Tray ID field.
If you enter... then...

an SID and press Enter patient information specific to that SID
displays as does event specific information
when an event condition exists: date and
time, event message, SIQ status of the
sample, and corrective actions to the
problem.
NOTE: After you enter an SID value in the SID
field, you must press Enter in order for this
SID to populate the Current Sample field and
to update the sample details which display in
the Event and Workorder tabs.
a Tray ID and press Enter a list of the SIDs for each sample in the SIQ or
any other tray where samples have been
processed displays in the left, topmost area of
the screen. By selecting each SID within this
screen, the associated event specific
information displays for each sample within
the tray.
NOTE: After you enter a Tray ID value in the
Tray ID field, you must press Enter in order for
this Tray ID to populate the Current Tray field
and to update the list of SIDs that display in
the left, topmost area of the screen.

System Operation
3. To view the workorders associated with a given SID, select the

Workorders tab.
Figure 2-12: Workorders Tab
Events Tab
Use the Events tab at the SIQ (F5) screen to determine why a sample was
routed to the SIQ station or to determine other processing information on
a sample. You can query sample event information based on SID or Tray ID
if SIQ is a tray in the Sample Manager.
When you type an SID, patient information displays as does event specific
information when an event condition exists: date and time, event
message, SIQ status of the sample, and corrective actions that allow for
you to work through problem resolution.
Note If no events are associated with this SID, the Date/Time column may
be populated with the check-in time to the track and checkout time from
the track.
When you enter a Tray ID, a list of the SIDs for each sample in the tray
displays in the upper left area of the screen. By selecting each SID within
this screen, the associated event specific information displays for each
sample within the tray.
After looking at the event conditions and corrective actions, you must
resolve the problem. After problem resolution, you can return the sample
to the automation system through the SIQ station.

System Operation
SIQ (F5) Screen Button Functions

The buttons on the top area of the SIQ screen execute the Route to SIQ and
Reset Sample functions.
Route to SIQ Button

If you want to remove the sample from the track before the route
completes, you can select the Route to SIQ button.
For example, this function addresses samples that continue to circle the
track without arriving at a destination.
Reset Sample Button

If you remove a sample incorrectly from the track, you must select Reset
Sample before checking the sample back in. Also, if the Duplicate SID
Management feature is enabled and you remove a sample from a tray in a
Sample Manager, you must select Reset Sample before checking the
sample back in. This prevents the sample from being identified as a
duplicate sample.
For additional information, see Reset Sample Function‚ page 296.
Workorders Tab
Use the Workorders tab at the SIQ (F5) screen to review all of the tests
associated with a given SID and the route status of each test. You can
query workorder information based on Sample ID or Tray ID.
When you enter an SID, patient information displays as does the test code
information, routing status, and instrument associated with the tests that
comprise the sample workorder.
When you enter a Tray ID, a list of the SIDs for each sample in the tray
displays in the upper left area of the screen. By selecting each SID within
this screen, the associated test information displays for each sample within
the tray.

System Operation
The following statuses exist for the tests of a workorder assigned to a

sample:
Sample Status Description

Route complete The test successfully completed processing at
the station listed in the Instrument column.
Unrouted The sample to which the test is assigned was
either not checked into the automation
system or did not route to the station specified
at the Instrument column.
In Route The sample to which the test is assigned is
checked into the automation system and is on
the track.
Cancelled The entire workorder for the sample, and
therefore all the tests associated with the
workorder, is cancelled.
Deleted A test on the workorder for the sample is
deleted.
Manually Change the Cap Status for Sample Tube at SIQ

You can manually change the cap status of a sample to Cap On or Cap Off
only if a sample is not checked into the system.
For details on the Cap Status Confirmation feature, see Enabling the Cap
Status Confirmation Feature‚ page 284.
Manually change the cap status for Cap On instruments:
1. Locate the sample tube at SIQ or enter the SID.
2. Determine whether the cap status is correct for the target instrument.
3. If necessary, manually replace the cap on the sample tube.
4. In the Cap Status area, select Cap On.
5. Check the sample in at a manual gate, SIQ gate, or from a capped
section of a Load Mixed, STAT, Centrifuge Override, AutoSwitch, or
appropriate user defined tray in the Sample Manager.
Manually change the cap status for Cap Off instruments:
1. Locate the sample tube at SIQ or enter the SID.
2. Determine whether the cap status is correct for the target instrument.
3. If necessary, manually remove the cap from the sample tube.

System Operation
4. In the Cap Status area, select Cap Off.

5. Check the sample in at a manual or SIQ gate, or from an uncapped
section of a Load Mixed, STAT, Centrifuge Override, AutoSwitch, or
appropriate user defined tray in the Sample Manager.
Workorders Tab Button Functions

When a sample tube is checked in, the routing status of the sample is In
Route. When the sample tube routes to the first instrument pick position,
each of the tests of the workorder that will be run on that instrument are
set to Route Complete. When all the tests of the workorder that were run
on all instruments on the automation system are complete, the routing
status of the sample is Route Complete and the sample tube returns to the
Sample Manager.
The buttons on the Workorders tab execute the Set Routed and Set
Unrouted functions.
Set Routed Button

This function changes the routing status of a single test on the workorder
to Routed, which indicates to the system that processing for this test is
complete. The Route complete status of a test allows for subsequent tests
of the workorder to route to the appropriate stations.
See Set Routed and Set All Routed Functions‚ page 298.
If the status of then the sample on the track

at least 1 of the routes to the station required by the next
remaining tests on a Unrouted test of the workorder.
workorder is not Routed
all of the remaining tests routes to the Sample Manager.

on a workorder are
Routed,
Set All Routed Button

This function changes the routing status of all tests on the workorder to
Routed, which indicates to the system that processing for this sample is
complete. The sample tube routes to the Sample Manager.
See Set Routed and Set All Routed Functions‚ page 298.

System Operation
Set Unrouted Button

This function changes the routing status of a single test on the workorder
to Unrouted, which indicates to the system that processing for this test is
not complete. As unrouted tests are not complete, they must receive a new
route and subsequently route to the appropriate station for processing the
next time the sample is checked in.
See Set Unrouted and Set All Unrouted Functions‚ page 299.
Set All Unrouted Button

This function changes the routing status of all tests on the workorder to
Unrouted, which indicates to the system that processing for this sample is
not complete. The sample tube receives new routes for each of the tests of
the workorder and routes to the appropriate stations for processing the
next time the sample is checked in.
For more information, see Set Unrouted and Set All Unrouted Functions‚
page 299.
Viewing the Sample in Route Count

You can view the number of samples in route to an instrument or
destination.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select
Gate Information Ctrl F8) or press Ctrl F8.
2. Select the appropriate gate.
The value at the Current In Route Queue: field displays the current
number of samples in route to the instrument.
Using the Cold Storage (F4) Screen

After all the tests of a sample workorder are complete, the sample tube
routes to an Unload tray in the Sample Manager. Typically when 100
samples fill the available positions of the Unload tray, you remove the
Unload tray from the Sample Manager and place it in a Cold Storage
location.
After you place the Unload tray in an available location within Cold
Storage, you can update the Cold Storage entry by Tray Barcode with the
exact Cold Storage location information. See Assigning a Location to a Tray
in Cold Storage‚ page 131.
Note Ensure that a procedure exists for handling partially filled Unload
trays at end-of-shift or end-of-day.

System Operation
Note Ensure that the sample tray cover is secure prior to placing the tray in
Cold Storage.
By default, the Unload trays moved from the Sample Manager to Cold
Storage expire on the 7th day. To aid in retrieving a sample from its Cold
Storage location prior to expiration, record the location information of the
tray in Cold Storage through the Cold Storage (F4) screen at the LineMaster
workspace.
Using Sample Tray Covers

Sample tray covers are specially designed covers used for covering and
stacking sample trays. A sample tray cover is designed to fit directly over a
sample tray. Once the cover is securely in place, you can stack a second
sample tray on top of the first using the 4 stacking guides on the top of the
cover.
CAUTION
Do not stack more than 2 trays one on top of the other. The weight can
cause damage to the supporting covers. In addition, do not carry 3 or
more stacked trays filled with samples as this could cause a mishandling
accident.
Sample tray covers provide the following benefits:

• The need for recapping most samples is eliminated.
• Evaporation is minimized (Na+ results increased ~2% over 4 days using
the cover versus ~1% with recapped sample tubes).
• Multiple size sample tubes can be used in each tray.
• Uncapped or capped sample tubes can be used in each tray.
• Repetitive motion injuries and spills are prevented thereby improving
operator safety.
• A level surface for tray stacking in the refrigerator.
• Light protection for samples.
Assigning a Location to a Tray in Cold Storage

1. Remove an Unload tray from the Sample Manager.
The LineMaster software automatically creates a Cold Storage entry
that only lists the Tray Barcode for this Unload tray.

System Operation
2. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Cold Storage

(F4) or press F4.
The Cold Storage (F4) screen displays. In the Tray Barcode column, the
Tray IDs of all the Unload trays removed from the Sample Manager
display.
Figure 2-13: Sample Manager Cold Storage Screen
3. Highlight the Tray ID entry that corresponds to the Tray ID that you
placed in Cold Storage.
4. Select Edit.
On the Edit screen perform the following actions:
• Select an Area.
• Select a Door.
5. Select a Shelf.If a printer is connected to the LineMaster computer, you
can print a tray inventory list:
a. Select the tray barcode.
b. Select Print Inventory.
6. Put the Unload tray in the specified tray position in Cold Storage.

System Operation
Purging Cold Storage Tray Information from the System

The LineMaster software automatically assigns the status of Expired to
samples that are in Cold Storage for 7 days and automatically deletes the
location information of these expired trays on the 7th day.
Depending on your laboratory’s requirements, you can delete Cold Storage
tray information prior to the predetermined expiration on the 7th day.
You may choose to purge Cold Storage tray information if your laboratory
commonly reuses the same Unload trays within 7 days of removal from the
Sample Manager or if problems are identified with the samples of a tray in
Cold Storage.
To manually purge Cold Storage tray information from the system prior to
the automatic deletion of tray information on the 7th day of storage:
(F4) or press F4.
2. Select the tray.
3. Select Delete Expired.
Printing the Tray Inventory List

From the Cold Storage (F4) screen, you can initiate printing of the Cold
Storage Tray Inventory List, which lists in SID order each of the samples on
a given Cold Storage tray. Each entry in the Inventory List includes the SID,
Secondary ID, Date, Location, and assigned tests for the sample.
Note When a printer is configured on the LineMaster computer, you can
print tray inventory. To install a printer on your system, contact your
technical support provider.
Print the tray inventory list:
(F4) or press F4.
2. Select the tray barcode.
3. Select Print Inventory.
The Cold Storage Tray Inventory List prints.

System Operation
End-of-Shift Activities
Ensure that all samples on the track are accounted for and correspond to
workorders downloaded during the shift.
Best practices recommend that you ensure that all instruments are
maintained and ready for use:
• Instrument maintenance – As needed, add reagents and fill supplies.
instrument.
Note The recommendation is that instrument QC should be done once
per shift.
As your laboratory requirements dictate when the 24 hour cycle begins
and ends, determine when the system-wide reset through the Reset All
function at the Global Router Settings (F6) screen should be initiated.
The Reset All function at the Global Router Settings (F6) screen must be
initiated once per day when no samples are processing on the track. The
Reset All function clears all current routes and resets puck management.
For additional information, see Resetting the Routing and Puck Count‚
page 86 and Reset All Function‚ page 297.

3 Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Daily Maintenance Procedures — Hardware . . . . . . . . . . 137
Monitoring the Oil-Less Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Check the Waste Level in the Oil-Less Air Compressor
Waste Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Check the Air Pressure in the Oil-Less Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Monitoring the Oil Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Check the Waste Level in the Oil Compressor Waste Bottle . . . . . . . 140
Check the Oil Level in the Oil Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Monitoring the Air Prep Unit Waste Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Monitoring the DI Water Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Monitoring the City Water Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Inspecting the Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Inspecting the Robot Gripper Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Inspecting the Main Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Inspecting the Side Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning the Sample Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning the Sample Tray Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Daily Maintenance Procedures – Software. . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Weekly Maintenance Procedures – Hardware . . . . . . . . . 149
Cleaning the Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Weekly Maintenance Procedures — Software . . . . . . . . 156
Shutting Down and Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Shutting Down All Stations and Exiting the
LineMaster Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Exiting the Router Software and Turning Off the
Router Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Restarting the LineMaster Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Turning on the Router Computer and Starting
the LineMaster Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Bringing all Stations Online and Verifying Online Status . . . . . . . . . 159
Monthly Maintenance Procedures — Hardware . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning and Inspecting the Pucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Puck Maintenance Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Preparing the Pucks for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Puck Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Replacing the O-Rings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
135
Re-assembling the Pucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cleaning the Puck Maintenance Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Monthly Maintenance Procedures — Software . . . . . . . . 170
Managing the Total Puck Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Performing a Manual System Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
As-Needed Maintenance Procedures — Hardware . . . . . . 173
Emptying the Oil-Less Air Compressor Waste Bottle . . . . . . . . . . 173
Emptying the Oil Compressor Waste Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Adding Oil to the Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Emptying the Air Prep Unit Waste Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cleaning the Main Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cleaning the Side Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Replacing the Robot Gripper Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
As-Needed Software Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . 180
Restoring System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
136
Maintenance
3 Maintenance
Overview
The Maintenance chapter outlines the daily, weekly, monthly, and as-
needed maintenance required for the automation system.
Daily Maintenance Procedures — Hardware

Perform daily maintenance on the system hardware only when the system
is not processing samples.
Materials needed:
• 10% bleach solution
• Cleaning cloths
• Screwdriver
Monitoring the Oil-Less Air Compressor

Note This procedure only applies to sites that have an oil-less air
compressor. Do not follow this procedure if you have an oil compressor. If
you have an oil compressor, see Monitoring the Oil Compressor‚ page 140.
Check the Waste Level in the Oil-Less Air Compressor Waste

Bottle
The waste bottle is attached to the Oil-Less Air Compressor cabinet with a
magnet.
1. Check the waste level in the waste bottle.

Maintenance
2. When the waste bottle is 1/2 full, empty the waste bottle.
Refer to Emptying the Oil-Less Air Compressor Waste Bottle‚ page 173.
Figure 3-1: Oil-Less Air Compressor for ADVIA LabCell system
1. Waste bottle
2. Output pressure adjustable control
3. Output pressure gauge
4. Tank pressure gauge
5. Run timer
6. Fan light
7. Power switch

Maintenance
Figure 3-2: Oil-Less Air Compressor for ADVIA WorkCell CDX
1. Waste bottle
2. Output pressure adjustable control
3. Output pressure gauge
4. Tank pressure gauge
5. Fan light
6. Run timer
7. Power switch
Check the Air Pressure in the Oil-Less Air Compressor

1. At the output pressure gauge on the front panel of the oil-less air
compressor, check the output pressure gauge.
If you have an oil-less then confirm that the output pressure

air compressor for an gauge is set between
ADVIA LabCell 85-90 psi
The tank pressure gauge is always set and
self regulates between 90-120 psi.
ADVIA WorkCell CDX 80-85 psi
The tank pressure gauge is always set and
self regulates between 90-120 psi.

Maintenance
2. If the output pressure gauge value is not set correctly, adjust the psi
value by turning the output pressure adjustable control.
Monitoring the Oil Compressor

Note This procedure only applies to sites that have an oil compressor. Do
not follow this procedure if you have an oil-less air compressor.
If you have an oil-less air compressor, refer to Monitoring the Oil-Less Air
Compressor‚ page 137.
Check the Waste Level in the Oil Compressor Waste Bottle

1. Turn the compressor off using the power switch located in the top back
area of the compressor.
Figure 3-3: Compressor Power Switch
1. Power switch
2. Check the waste level in the waste bottle.

3. When the waste bottle is 3/4 full, empty the waste bottle.
Refer to Emptying the Oil Compressor Waste Bottle‚ page 175.
4. Turn the compressor on.
Check the Oil Level in the Oil Compressor

If you have an oil compressor, check the oil levels:

Maintenance
1. Check the oil level of each of the 3 compressor heads.
Figure 3-4: Oil Compressor Heads
1. The level is optimal when the oil line is at the middle of the
gauge.
CAUTION
Do not add oil while the compressor is on. This can cause damage to the
compressor.
2. If the oil level is below the middle of the gauge, add oil to the
compressor.
Refer to Adding Oil to the Compressor‚ page 176.
Monitoring the Air Prep Unit Waste Level

You must monitor the air prep unit waste container daily and empty the
waste container when it is half full. For oil compressors, the waste
container collects droplets of oil and water that overflow from the air prep
unit. For oilless compressors or when house air is in use, the waste
container collects droplets of water only.
CAUTION
Do not operate the system with the waste container more than 50% full.
When the waste container exceeds this level, oil and water can spill on
the floor below the conveyor and possibly damage the system or create a
slippery floor condition.

Maintenance
Note If the air prep unit waste container fills more than half full each day
or you notice a consistent increase in the usual waste level, there could be
a problem with the compressor or the house air, where applicable. Contact
your technical support provider or distributor to report the high levels in
the waste container.
1. Locate the air prep unit waste container.
2. If the air prep unit waste container is half full, empty the waste
container.
See Emptying the Air Prep Unit Waste Container‚ page 176.
Monitoring the DI Water Supply

Failure to check and verify the quality of your deionized (DI) water supply
can affect analyzer performance.
1. In the Utility Cabinet, check that the DI water pressure is 20 PSI.
2. Locate the source of your deionized (DI) water supply.
3. Verify that the water quality meets standards.
If you are unsure of how to check the water quality, contact your DI
water supplier.
Monitoring the City Water Supply

In the Utility Cabinet, check that the city water pressure is 30 PSI.
Inspecting the Gates
LASER WARNING
Do not look directly at the laser beam. The barcode scanner emits a low-
power laser light and can cause damage to the eyes if you look directly at
the light. Only authorized field service engineers should perform
procedures related to the barcode scanner.
1. Press down the gate control button.

2. Inspect the divert gate:
a. Remove the divert gate from the conveyor by unscrewing the 2
gate screws on top of the gate.

Maintenance
b. Ensure that the singulators are clean and in good condition.
Figure 3-5: Singulators
1. Singulators
2. Gate screw
4. Diverter
c. Ensure that the diverter is clean and in good condition.

d. Ensure that the 3 sensors and the barcode reader are clean and in
good condition.
e. If any part of the divert gate needs cleaning, clean the gates.
For more information, see Cleaning the Gates‚ page 150.
f. Replace the divert gate on the conveyor and tighten the 2 gate
screws.
3. Inspect the interface gate:
a. Remove any safety covers on the instruments that prevent you
from accessing the interface gate.
b. Remove the interface gate from the conveyor by unscrewing the
gate screws.

Maintenance
c. Ensure that the 4 flags are not bent or crooked.
Figure 3-6: Interface Gate Rollers and Flag
1. Rollers
2. Flag
d. Ensure that the rollers are clean, move freely, and are in good
condition.
Note If sample tubes dropped or if excessive serum buildup exists
at the interface gates for any robotic module, contact your
technical support provider to verify that the interface gate is
correctly aligned.
e. Ensure that the 4 sensors and the barcode reader are clean and in
good condition.
f. If any part of the interface gate needs cleaning, clean the parts as
needed.
For more information, see Cleaning the Gates‚ page 150.
g. Replace the interface gate on the conveyor and tighten the gate
screws.
h. Replace any safety covers that you removed to access the gate.

Maintenance
4. Lift up the gate control button.
Figure 3-7: Gate Control Button
5. Repeat each of these steps for each pair of gates on the system.
If any part of a divert gate or an interface gate requires attention,
contact your technical support provider.
Inspecting the Robot Gripper Fingers

The tips of the robot grippers are coated with a material that allows the
grippers to securely grasp the sample tubes. If this material wears or is
soiled, the grippers do not securely hold sample tubes.
1. Bring the Sample Manager interface offline.
button.
b. Select Offline.
Wait for the Offline button to turn white.
2. To access the gripper fingers, open the front panel with a screwdriver.
BIOHAZARD
diseases. Wear facial protection, gloves, and protective clothing. Refer to

Maintenance
WARNING
Do not handle cleaning solution without following the appropriate
chemical safety guidelines, which include wearing gloves, laboratory
coat, and safety glasses or protective face shield.
3. Inspect and clean the gripper fingers:

a. Press the release button on the robot arm.
b. Remove any pieces of barcode label or foreign material from the
gripper fingers.
Figure 3-8: Gripper Finger with Foreign Material
1. Pieces of barcode label
c. Dampen a cleaning cloth with the bleach solution and wipe the
gripper fingers.
d. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and wipe the gripper fingers.
e. Inspect the gripper fingers for signs of wear, such as peeling, tears,
or exposed metal surfaces.
f. If wear is evident, replace the gripper fingers.
Refer to Replacing the Robot Gripper Fingers‚ page 179.
4. Close the front panel and secure it with the screwdriver.
5. Bring the Sample Manager online:
button.

Maintenance
b. Select Online.
Wait for the Online button to turn white.
6. Bring the universal robot interface (URI) offline:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select the station button.
b. Select Offline.
7. For each URI, repeat steps 2-4.
8. Bring the URI interface online:
b. Select Online.
Inspecting the Main Track

Inspect the track when the automation system is not processing samples
and when no pucks are on the track.
1. Ensure that the main track and side tracks are turned on and that no
pucks are on the track.
2. Remove a track cover at a section where the track is conveniently
accessed, such as at the end of the track that is opposite the drive end,
which is the idle end.
3. While the track is moving, inspect the main track for dirt or spilled body
fluids.
4. If the track is dirty or has spilled body fluids on it, clean the main track.
Refer to Cleaning the Main Track‚ page 177.
5. Inspect the track covers:
a. Remove a track cover and inspect it for dirt or spilled body fluids.
b. If the cover is dirty or has spilled body fluids on it, clean the track
covers.
Refer to Cleaning the Main Track‚ page 177.
c. Replace the track cover.
d. Repeat these steps for each of the track covers.

Maintenance
Inspecting the Side Tracks

Inspect the track when the automation system is not processing samples
and when no pucks are on the track.
2. Remove a section of the track cover that is between the divert gate and
the interface gate.
3. While the track is moving, inspect the side track for dirt or spilled body
fluids.
4. If the side track is dirty or has spilled body fluids on it, clean the side
track.
Refer to Cleaning the Side Tracks‚ page 178.
5. Replace the track cover.
6. Repeat these steps for each side track.
Cleaning the Sample Trays

The automation system flags a cold storage tray as expired after 7 days in
Cold Storage. Remove the expired trays from Cold Storage and dispose of
the outdated samples in an appropriate biohazard container.
Clean the trays removed from Cold Storage:
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not expose the sample trays to autoclaving, temperatures exceeding
140° F or bleach solutions greater than 10%. This may damage the
sample trays.
1. Dampen a cleaning cloth with the bleach solution and wipe the tray.
2. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and wipe the tray.

Maintenance
3. Ensure that the tray barcode labels are clean and in good condition.
There are 5 barcode labels on each tray: 1 on the top and 1 on each
side.
4. If a barcode label is damaged, do not use the tray.
Cleaning the Sample Tray Covers
CAUTION
Do not expose the sample trays to autoclaving, temperatures exceeding
140° F or bleach solutions greater than 10%. This may damage the
sample trays.
CAUTION
Do not load covered sample trays into the Sample Manager. This could
cause serious damage to the Sample Manager robot.
WARNING
Clean the tray covers:

1. Dampen a cleaning cloth with the bleach solution and wipe the tray
cover.
2. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and wipe the tray cover.
Daily Maintenance Procedures – Software

The routing and puck count settings must be reset daily. For more
information, see Resetting the Routing and Puck Count‚ page 86.
Weekly Maintenance Procedures – Hardware

Materials needed:
• Screwdriver
• Cleaning cloths
• Puck
• Cotton-tipped swab

Maintenance
• Lens paper
• Glass cleaner
• Paper towels
Cleaning the Gates

Clean the gates when the automation system is not processing samples
and the track is clear of pucks and samples.
WARNING
Do not move your hands in front of the singulators when you are
cleaning the spinner wheel. The singulators can move and pinch your
hands.
WARNING
2. Clean and inspect the divert gate spinner and drive wheel:
a. Dampen a cleaning cloth with the bleach solution and press the
cloth against the rotating puck rotator until the wheel is clean.
Figure 3-9: Cleaning the Gates
1. Singulator 3. Puck rotator

2. Divert gate 4. Main track

Maintenance
b. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and press the cloth against the
rotating puck rotator to remove the bleach residue.
c. Use a clean, dry cloth to dry the wheel.
d. Check the puck rotator for wear or damage.
e. Place a sample tube with no barcode label in a puck, place the puck
on the main track before the divert gate, and ensure that the puck
rotator spins the puck.
f. Remove the sample tube and puck from the track.
g. Press the cloth dampened with the bleach solution against the
drive wheel until it is clean.
Figure 3-10: Cleaning Drive Wheel
1. Divert gate
2. Side track
3. Drive wheel
h. Press the cloth dampened with water against the drive wheel to
remove the bleach residue.
i. Use a clean, dry cloth to dry the wheel.
j. Check the drive wheel for wear or damage.
3. Clean the interface gate rollers:
a. Remove any safety covers on the instruments that prevent you
from accessing the interface gate.

Maintenance
b. Dampen a cotton-tipped swab with the bleach solution and gently

wipe the rollers until they are clean.
Figure 3-11: Interface Gate Rollers
1. Rollers
2. Side track
c. Dampen a swab with water and wipe the rollers to remove the
bleach residue.
d. Ensure that the rollers spin with the puck and sample tube.
4. Clean the barcode reader lenses and the sensors:
a. Press down the gate control button.

Maintenance
b. Dampen a piece of lens paper with glass cleaner and lightly rub the
divert gate barcode lens with the lens paper.
Figure 3-12: Divert Gate Barcode Lens
1. Divert gate
2. Barcode lens
c. Dry the barcode lens with dry lens paper.

Maintenance
d. Dampen a piece of lens paper with glass cleaner and clean each of
the 3 divert gate sensors with the lens paper.
Figure 3-13: Divert Gate Sensors
1. Backup sensor
2. Puck sensor
3. Sample tube sensor
e. Dry the sensors with dry lens paper.

Maintenance
f. Dampen a piece of lens paper with glass cleaner, lightly rub the
interface gate barcode lens, and then dry the lens with dry lens
paper.
Figure 3-14: Interface Gate Barcode Lens
1. Interface gate barcode lens

2. Side track
g. Dampen a piece of lens paper with glass cleaner and clean the 4
interface gate sensors with the lens paper.
Figure 3-15: Interface Gate Sensors
1. Place position sample tube sensor

2. Side track backup sensor

Maintenance
3. Pick position sample tube sensor

4. Inlet sensor
h. Dry the sensors with dry lens paper.

i. Replace any safety covers that you removed to access the gate.
j. Lift up the gate control button.
Figure 3-16: Gate Control Button
5. Repeat these Cleaning the Gates steps for each pair of gates.
Weekly Maintenance Procedures — Software

Archiving the Event Log
The automation system automatically archives the event log daily. After
the log is archived, the system deletes the messages in the event log. You
have the option, however, of manually archiving the event log prior to a
troubleshooting session.
Archive the event log when the system is not processing samples and the
track is clear of samples.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then select
Event Log.
2. Select Acknowledge All.
Ensure that all events are acknowledged.
3. Select Archive Log.

Maintenance
Shutting Down and Restarting the System

As part of your regularly scheduled weekly maintenance, shut down and
restart the LineMaster and Router software and computers in order to free
disk space and refresh memory.
Note After you exit the LineMaster software, you must exit the Router
software and then turn off the Router computer before restarting the
LineMaster computer.
Shutting Down All Stations and Exiting the LineMaster Software

Perform this part of weekly maintenance after all samples are finished
processing at their stations and are removed from the track.
1. Wait for all instruments to finish processing samples and for the
samples to route to their destination trays in the Sample Manager or
SIQ.
2. Bring the Sample Manager interface offline:
button.
b. Select Offline.
Wait until the Offline button turns white.
c. Remove all samples from the Sample Manager according to your
lab conventions.
3. Turn the track off:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select Utilities.
b. Select Shutdown.
Wait until the Shutdown button turns white.
4. Bring each station to the shutdown state:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select a station button.
b. Select Shutdown.
Wait for the Shutdown button to turn white.
c. Repeat these steps for each station.
5. At the LineMaster workspace, select Control.
6. Verify that all stations are in the Offline state.
Note Manual Gates do not transition to offline.
7. Select Shutdown.

Maintenance
8. When all the stations on the track are in the shutdown state, select
Exit.
9. At the Exit prompt, select Yes.
The LineMaster software shuts down and you are returned to the
LineMaster computer desktop.
Exiting the Router Software and Turning Off the Router

Computer
After exiting the Router software, turn off the Router computer.
1. At the LineMaster desktop, double-select the Bring Router to Desktop
shortcut icon.
This closes the Router sub-programs and shuts down the Router
software.
2. Switch to the Router computer.
3. On the Windows taskbar, select Start > Shutdown.
The Shut Down Windows window displays.
Note The Router software and the Router computer must be shut
down completely. Be sure to select Shutdown from the dropdown
menu. Do not select Restart.
4. At the dropdown menu, select Shutdown and select OK.
Depending on your Windows software release, the Router computer
may turn off automatically after the Router software shuts down.
5. If the Router computer did not turn off automatically and a message
displays that it is safe to turn off the Router computer, then press the
power button on the Router computer.
Restarting the LineMaster Computer

Shutting down the LineMaster computer involves restarting the system
from Windows. Manually turning off the LineMaster computer is not
required.
1. At the Windows taskbar, select Start > Restart.
The Shut Down Windows window displays.
2. From the dropdown menu in the Shutdown Event Tracker area, select
Hardware: Maintenance (Planned) and select OK.
The LineMaster computer restarts. Windows restarts automatically and
the Windows desktop displays.

Maintenance
Turning on the Router Computer and Starting the LineMaster

Software
1. When the Windows desktop displays after restarting the LineMaster
computer, turn on the Router computer.
When the Router computer restarts, the Router software automatically
launches. The Router computer may take 10-12 minutes to bootup.
2. When the Router main screen displays, switch to the LineMaster
computer.
3. To start the LineMaster software, double-select the LineMaster icon.
The logon screen displays.
4. Log on to the LineMaster software.
Bringing all Stations Online and Verifying Online Status

1. Before turning the track on and bringing the stations online, verify that
each of the instruments of the automation system are maintained and
ready for use:
• Instrument maintenance – As needed, add reagents and fill
supplies.
instrument.
2. Turn the track on:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select Utilities.
b. Select Online.
Wait until the Online button turns white.
3. For ADVIA LabCells, go to the left-side door of the Utility Cabinet and
press the track reset button.
4. Bring each station offline:
b. Select Offline.
c. Repeat these shutdown steps for each station.

Maintenance
5. Bring each station, except the Sample Manager, online:

Note All instruments must be maintained and the instrument and
automation components transitioned online before you bring the Sample
Manager online.
b. Select Online.
c. Repeat these steps for each station.
6. Verify that all stations are online:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select Control.
b. Verify that all stations are online.
Verify that the Online buttons are white (see Bringing Stations
Online‚ page 105.)
7. Verify that all station buttons, except the Sample Manager button, are
green.
8. Load the Sample Manager with empty trays and with trays with
samples.
a. At the Sample Manager, fully open each drawer one at a time.
b. At the LineMaster, configure the Sample Manager drawers.
c. At the Sample Manager, add sample trays into the appropriate
locations.
9. Bring the Sample Manager online:
button.
b. Select Online.
Wait until the Online button turns white (see Starting the Sample
Manager‚ page 107.)
Monthly Maintenance Procedures — Hardware

Materials needed:
• Distilled water
• Basin
• Sample tube

Maintenance
• Pucks
• Puck maintenance tool
Cleaning and Inspecting the Pucks

A sample tube carrier consists of 3 components that require attention
during normal maintenance:
• Puck – The puck is the internal core of the sample tube carrier and
contains 3 support fingers that hold the sample tube securely in place.
• Puck cover – The puck cover is a hard outer shell that protects the puck.
• O-rings – Two O-rings fit onto the puck. The larger, bottom-most O-ring
secures the puck cover to the puck. The smaller, uppermost O-ring
secures the support fingers and provides spring force to keep the
sample tubes vertical.
Figure 3-17: Puck and Puck Cover
1. Puck
2. Small O-ring
3. Large O-ring
4. Puck cover
CAUTION
Do not expose the pucks to autoclaving, temperatures exceeding 140° F
or bleach solutions greater than 10%. This may damage the pucks.
Puck Maintenance Tool

The puck maintenance tool allows you to remove the cover from the puck,
perform general maintenance, and replace the puck into the puck cover. In
addition, the puck maintenance tool can be used to replace the puck
O-rings. The puck maintenance tool is comprised of the following
components:
• Base – The base consists of the lever stand and the base well.
• Lever – The lever has open and closed positions.

Maintenance
• Push bit mount – The push bit mount is a grooved block that attaches
the push bit to the lever. With the push bit attached, you can remove
the puck cover from the puck. Without the push bit, you can replace
the puck into its cover.
• Push bit – The push bit is a detachable component that is alternately
attached to and removed from the push bit mount. The top portion of
the push bit consists of a track that slides over the grooved block of the
push bit mount. The bottom portion of the push bit is used to separate
the puck from its cover.
• O-ring guide – The O-ring guide is used to replace the O-rings onto
pucks.
Figure 3-18: Puck Maintenance Tool
1. Base
2. Push bit mount
3. Lever
4. O-ring guide
5. Push bit
Preparing the Pucks for Maintenance

Preparing the pucks for maintenance consists of 2 procedures:
• Ensuring that the push bit is installed on the push bit mount and
installing it if necessary
• Using the puck maintenance tool to remove the puck cover from the
puck.

Maintenance
Installing the Push Bit onto the Push Bit Mount

1. Position the lever in the open position away from the base.
2. Grasp the lever with one hand.
3. Slide the track of the push bit onto the grooved track of the push bit
mount until fully installed.
Figure 3-19: Installing the Push Bit
1. Lever
2. Push bit mount
3. Push bit

Maintenance
Removing the Puck from the Cover
BIOHAZARD
WARNING
Do not handle pucks without wearing safety glasses or a protective face
shield, gloves, and protective clothing. Handle pucks as if capable of
transmitting infectious diseases. Exercise extreme caution when
handling pucks because broken glass from sample tubes and
contaminated fluid may be in or on the puck and puck cover.
CAUTION
Do not expose the pucks to autoclaving, temperatures exceeding 140° F
or bleach solutions greater than 10%. This may damage the pucks.
1. Ensure that the push bit is installed properly on the push bit mount.
2. Place the puck in the puck holding station with the opening of the puck
facing up.

Maintenance
3. Move the lever and position the push bit into the opening of the puck.
Figure 3-20: Positioning the Push Bit and Puck
1. Lever
2. Push bit
3. Puck cover
4. Press down on the lever until the puck separates partially from the puck
cover.
5. Lift and move the lever into the open position.
6. Lift the puck out of the puck holding station.
7. Pull the puck free from the puck cover.

Maintenance
Puck Maintenance Procedures
Cleaning the Puck Covers
WARNING
Do not handle pucks without wearing safety glasses or a protective face
shield, gloves, and protective clothing. Handle pucks as if capable of
transmitting infectious diseases. Exercise extreme caution when
handling pucks because broken glass from sample tubes and
contaminated fluid may be in or on the puck and puck cover.
WARNING
1. Pour 10% bleach solution into a basin.

2. Place the puck covers in the basin and soak for 30 minutes.
Note Only place the puck covers in the bleach solution. Do not place
the pucks into the bleach solution.
3. Rinse the puck covers with fresh water to remove the bleach residue.
4. Set the puck covers aside to air dry.
Cleaning the Pucks

1. Hand wipe the pucks with 10% bleach solution.
2. Hand wipe the pucks with distilled water.
3. Set the pucks aside to air dry.
4. Inspect the pucks for damage.
a. Inspect the O-rings for cracks and damage.
b. Check that the 3 support fingers move freely.
5. If a puck is damaged, repair the O-rings or replace the puck with a new
puck.
Replacing the O-Rings

1. Inspect the small O-ring of a given puck to determine whether its
spring force is sufficient to keep a sample tube vertical.
a. Place a 33 mm diameter x 100 mm long sample tube into the puck.

Maintenance
b. Push the sample tube to one side.

c. Release the sample tube.
d. Ensure that the O-ring has sufficient spring force to bring the
sample tube to the vertical position.
Figure 3-21: Checking O-ring with Sample Tube
1. Sample tube
2. Puck
2. If necessary, remove the small O-ring.

a. Using a straight blade, cut through the O-ring.
b. Remove the O-ring.
3. Inspect the large O-ring for cracks and corrosion.
4. If necessary, remove the large O-ring:
a. Using a straight blade, cut through the O-ring.
b. Remove the O-ring.

Maintenance
5. Install new O-rings:

a. Place the O-ring guide over the base of the puck.
b. Slide the appropriate O-ring over the guide and into the correct O-
ring position on the puck.
Figure 3-22: Installing New O-rings
1. O-ring guide
2. Small O-ring
3. Large O-ring
Re-assembling the Pucks

Re-assembling a puck consists of 2 procedures:
• Ensuring that the push bit is removed from the push bit mount and
removing it if necessary
• Replacing the puck into its cover
Removing the Push Bit from the Push Bit Mount

1. Position the lever in the open position away from the base.
2. Grasp the lever with one hand.
3. Slide the push bit off the push bit mount.

Maintenance
Replacing the Puck into the Cover

1. Put the puck into the puck cover.
2. Place the partially assembled puck in the base well with the base of the
puck facing up.
3. Position the push bit mount over the base of the puck.
Figure 3-23: Replacing the Puck into the Cover
1. Lever
2. Push bit mount
3. Puck
4. Puck cover
4. Press down on the lever until the puck pushes completely into the puck
cover.
5. Lift the lever to its open position.
6. Remove the puck from the base well.
7. Place a sample tube in the puck and ensure that the puck holds the
sample tube upright.
If the puck does not hold the sample tube upright, do not use the puck.
Cleaning the Puck Maintenance Tool

Use mild soap and water to clean the puck maintenance tool. Do not use
bleach when cleaning the puck maintenance tool.

Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance Procedures — Software

Managing the Total Puck Count
Robotic modules such as the Sample Manager, the Centrifuge module, the
ADVIA Hematology interface module, the Stago STA-R Interface, and the
SIQ station require empty pucks to operate efficiently. As such, a
percentage of empty pucks is required on the track at any given time.
The Router software regulates the number of empty pucks on the track. At
the Puck Management tab of the Global Router Settings screen, you define
the percentage of empty pucks and the total number of pucks that
physically exist on the system. The value in the Total Pucks field is critical.
The number of pucks that physically exist on the system must match the
value in the Total Pucks field. The Filling Pucks and Total Filled Pucks fields
are automatically populated by the Router software.
The Empty Pucks (%) value should allow for 10-20 empty pucks on the
track at any given time. Calculate this percentage based on the number of
pucks that you physically count on the automation system. Based on
sample management observations and the frequency of puck
management events, you can modify this empty puck percentage value.
Define the puck count values:
1. Manually count the total number of pucks on the track.
2. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then select Global
Router Settings (F6) or press F6.
Figure 3-24: Puck Management Screen

Maintenance
3. At the Puck Management tab of the Global Router Settings screen,

select Edit.
4. At the Empty Puck (%) field, type the empty puck percentage.
This field value is particularly important for the Centrifuge module. This
value is typically 20% of the total number of pucks that exist on the
track.
5. At the Total Pucks field, enter the number of pucks that physically exist
on the track.
Performing a Manual System Data Backup

After completing a system data backup, you have all of the data needed to
restore the system in the event of a system crash. System data includes the
following:
• System configuration file (Config.mdb)
• Router configuration files (pfb001.2bf, pfb001.bss)
• Robot Teach Point files for the Sample Manager, ADVIA Hematology
interface module, Stago STA-R interface module, URI, Clinitek Atlas
interface module, and Centrifuge module
• LineMaster test lists
• Tracking data:
• Patient information
• Sample location information
• Cold Storage information
• Sample Manager tray definitions
• SIQ data
System data backups can be scheduled as tasks to run automatically or
they can be initiated and run manually. For information on configuring
system data backups to run automatically as scheduled tasks, see
Configuring Automatic System Data Backups‚ page 275. The
recommendation is to run this manual system data backup each month.
You should also initiate a manual system data backup after system
configuration changes such as adding new tests and changing test
priorities and system upgrades.
Note Only initiate a system data backup during times of slow system
activity when a limited number of sample tubes are on the track.

Maintenance
Perform a manual system data backup:

1. Insert a blank CD-RW in the LineMaster computer CD drive.
2. At the LineMaster workspace, select Control.
3. Ensure that all interfaces are in the shutdown state.
4. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then select Backup
(Ctrl F5) or press Ctrl F5.
The Backup screen displays.
5. At the Backup tab, select Perform Manual Backup.
Figure 3-25: Backup Tab
6. Select Start.
The Backup dialog box displays the following message: “Backup in
Progress.”
When the backup is complete, the Backup dialog box displays the
following message: “Backup complete.”
7. Remove the CD from the LineMaster computer CD drive.
8. Label the CD “System Data Backup” and include the current date and
time.
9. Store the CD in a secure location.

Maintenance
As-Needed Maintenance Procedures — Hardware

Materials needed:
• Paper towels
• Vacuum cleaner
• Cleaning cloths
• SJ-27 oil
• Wrench
• 3-mm Allen wrench
• 2.5-mm Allen wrench
Note In cases where an oil filled compressor is used, the material
accumulated in the waste container collects water condensation and waste
compressor oil. The Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) issued on 7/8/2002
on compressor oil SJ 27 by JUN-AIR International A/S indicates this product
is not classified as dangerous according to directive 1999/45/EC. For
further information, a copy of the MSDS for this compressor oil can be
obtained by contacting your technical support provider.
Emptying the Oil-Less Air Compressor Waste Bottle

Note This procedure only applies to sites that have an oil-less air
compressor. Do not follow this procedure if you have an oil air compressor.
If you have an oil compressor, refer to Emptying the Oil Compressor Waste
Bottle‚ page 175.
1. Using the power switch located on the front panel of the oil-less air
compressor, turn the compressor off.

Maintenance
2. Locate the waste bottle.
Figure 3-26: Oil-Less Air Compressor Waste Bottle
1. Waste bottle cover

2. Waste bottle container
3. With one hand, push in the clamps on either side of the waste bottle
cover.
4. With the other hand, pull down on the waste bottle container until it is
free of the cover.
5. Dispose of the waste by taking the proper precautions and following
the regulations observed at your facility.
6. Below the waste bottle cover, reposition the waste bottle container.
7. With your free hand, push in the clamps on either side of the waste
bottle cover.
8. Push the waste bottle container up until it moves into place within the
clamps.

Maintenance
Emptying the Oil Compressor Waste Bottle

Note This procedure only applies to sites that have an oil compressor. Do
not follow this procedure if you have an oil-less air compressor.
If you have an oil compressor, see Emptying the Oil-Less Air Compressor
Waste Bottle‚ page 173.
2. Locate the waste bottle.
3. Lift the bottle straight up and out of the holder.
Do not tip the bottle. If the bottle is tipped and the filter becomes wet,
the filter could get clogged.
The filter is located where the waste lines enter the lid. The waste
bottle contains oil and water.
4. Set the bottle on the floor and spread paper towels next to the bottle.
Ensure that the compressor is turned off before you empty the waste
bottle.
5. Unscrew the lid by rotating the lid counterclockwise.
Figure 3-27: Waste Bottle – Removing the Lid
6. Place the lid on the paper towels.

7. Dispose of the waste by taking the proper precautions and following
the regulations observed at your facility.
8. Put the lid on the bottle and rotate the lid clockwise to tighten it.

Maintenance
9. Place the bottle in the bottle holder with the waste label on the bottle
facing forward.
10. Turn the compressor on
Adding Oil to the Compressor

CAUTION
Do not add oil while the compressor is on. This can cause damage to the
compressor.
2. Use the wrench to loosen the fill plug on top of the compressor.
3. Unscrew the fill plug from the compressor with your fingers and
remove the plug.
4. Add compressor oil (part number 040-0207-01) to the compressor
until the sight gauges are at mid-level.
5. Replace the fill plug and tighten it by hand.
6. Use the wrench to secure the fill plug.
Emptying the Air Prep Unit Waste Container

1. Detach the air prep unit waste container from the system.
The waste container unit is held against the side of the system with a
magnet. Do not remove the tubing from the housing.
2. Place the housing and waste bottle over an absorbent material to catch
any water and oil that may come out during maintenance.
3. Remove the waste bottle from the housing by pushing the 2 tabs in
towards each other and pull the waste bottle away from the housing.
4. Empty the waste bottle into an appropriate receptacle.
If an oil filled compressor is used, dispose of the waste in accordance
with local laws governing the disposal of waste oil.
5. Reinstall the waste bottle to the housing and mount the air prep unit
waste container to its original location.
6. Record that this procedure was performed in your maintenance log
book.

Maintenance
Cleaning the Main Track

Clean the track when the automation system is not processing samples and
no pucks are on the track. The track must be disinfected when body fluids
are spilled on the track.
BIOHAZARD
WARNING
Remove a track cover at a section where the track is conveniently accessed,

such as at the end of the track that is opposite the drive end.
1. Vacuum the track and drip trays 1 section at a time to remove dust.
2. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and lightly press the cleaning
cloth against the track to remove dirt from the track.
3. If necessary, disinfect the track with bleach:
a. Dampen a cleaning cloth with the bleach solution and lightly press
the cleaning cloth against the track to remove spilled body fluids.
b. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and lightly press the cleaning
cloth against the track to remove the bleach residue.
5. Clean the drip trays with water or bleach as necessary.
6. Clean the track covers:
a. Remove a track cover.
b. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and wipe the inside and
outside of the cover to remove dirt.
c. To disinfect the cover, dampen a cleaning cloth with the bleach
solution and wipe the inside and the outside of the cover.

Maintenance
d. Dampen a cleaning cloth with water and wipe the cover to remove
the bleach residue.
e. Replace the track cover.
f. Repeat these steps for each cover.
Cleaning the Side Tracks

Clean the track when the automation system is not processing samples and
no pucks are on the track. The track must be disinfected when body fluids
are spilled on the track.
BIOHAZARD
WARNING
1. Remove the track cover that is between the divert gate and the
interface gate.
2. Vacuum the side track and gates to remove dust.
3. Dampen a cloth with water and lightly press the cloth against the track
to remove dirt.
4. If necessary, disinfect the track:
a. Dampen a cloth with the bleach solution and lightly press the cloth
against the track to remove spilled body fluids.
b. Dampen a cloth with water and lightly press the cloth against the
track to remove the bleach residue.
6. Repeat these steps for each of the side tracks.

Maintenance
Replacing the Robot Gripper Fingers

The procedure for replacing the robot gripper fingers is the same for the
Sample Manager and for the Universal Robot Interface (URI).
1. Ensure that the interface is offline.
If the station contains a then

Sample Manager 1. At the LineMaster workspace,
select the Sample Manager
station button.
2. Select Offline.
Wait for the Offline button to
turn white.
URI 1. At the LineMaster workspace,
select the station button that
corresponds to the station
connected to the universal robot
and then select Offline.
Wait for the Offline button to
turn white.
2. Verify that the front panel of the module is open.

If the front panel is not open, open the front panel with a screwdriver
to access the gripper fingers.
3. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench, loosen and remove the 2 screws holding
the gripper finger to the gripper assembly.
4. Using a 2.5-mm Allen wrench, loosen and remove the screw holding
the jaw to the gripper finger.
5. Attach the jaw to a new gripper finger and secure it using the 2.5-mm
screw.
6. Attach the new gripper finger to the gripper assembly.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for the other gripper finger.
8. Replace the front panel and secure it with the screwdriver.
9. Bring the interface online.
b. Select Online.

Maintenance
As-Needed Software Maintenance Procedures

Restoring System Data
In the event of a catastrophic system failure, your technical support
provider may instruct you to restore system data. Do not attempt to restore
system data without the assistance of your technical support provider.
Note If the data on the system backup CD was saved more than 7 days
earlier than the day you want to restore the system data, do not restore the
Tracking table data. Tracking table data is stored for 7 days on the
LineMaster computer.
1. At the LineMaster desktop, select Bring Router to Desktop.
2. Close all Router software.
3. Insert the appropriate System Data Backup CD in the LineMaster
computer CD drive.
4. On the LineMaster taskbar, select Start > Programs >
ADVIA Automatic System Restore.
5. At the Restore Logon screen, type field_service in both the User Name
and Password fields.
The user name and password fields are case sensitive. The values must
be typed in lower case letters.
6. At the ADVIA Automation System Restore screen, select Restore the
Manual Backup from the CD.
7. To restore the saved data from the CD, ensure that Keep Tracking Table
Information is selected.
If this checkbox in not selected, the data from the CD is not restored to
the hard drive.
8. To accept the default restore list and initiate the restore process, select
Start.
9. At the ADVIA Automation System Restore dialog box, select Yes.
When the system data restore is complete, the ADVIA Automation
System Restore screen displays.
10. Select OK.

Maintenance
11. Review the completion messages displayed in the Status area of the
ADVIA Automation System Restore screen, to ensure that all system
data is restored successfully.
If any system data is not restored, contact your technical support
provider.
12. Launch the Router software and LineMaster software.
13. Verify that the system data is restored successfully:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, verify that each interface is online.
b. Verify that the global test list and instrument test list match the
current system configuration.
c. Run a batch of 25 samples with workorders containing a
combination of tests for each interface.
d. Ensure that these samples are processed completely without
generating events.

Maintenance

4 Troubleshooting
Identifying Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Managing Events Using the Events Screens. . . . . . . . . . . 186
Acknowledging an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Identifying and Resolving SIQ Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Accessing Event Messages through the SIQ (F5) Screen . . . . . . 190
Common SIQ Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Duplicate Sample ID Event Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Two Sample Tubes with Identical Sample ID Checked-in . . . . . . . . . 196
Accessing Workorders through the SIQ (F5) Screen . . . . 198
Recovering from a Conveyor E-stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Recovering after Pulling Conveyor E-stop Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Recovering after Pushing Conveyor E-stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Resetting and Transitioning Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Restarting a Side Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Recovering from a Station E-stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
General Recovery Requirements for Any Station E-stop . . . . . . . 206
or Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Recovering from an Unresponsive Interface Error . . . . . 209
Communication with LineMaster Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Shutting Down Stations and Exiting the LineMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Manually Restarting the Sample Manager Station from the
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Reintroducing Sample Tubes from Destination Trays
of the Sample Manager to the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Sample Tube in Robot Grippers after Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Removing Sample Tubes from Robot Gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Check In Sample Tube Removed from Gripper to the Track . . . . . . . 221
Routing Samples from a Disabled Sample Manager . . . . 221
Recovering from a LineMaster Power Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Empty Puck Percentage Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Resolving Workorder Transmission Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Resetting the Order Server on the Router Computer . . . . . . . . . 224
183
Resolving Inlabbing Transmission Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Resetting the Comm Server on the Router Computer. . . . . . . . . 227
Observed Problems: Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Observed Problems: Robot and Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Observed Problems: Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Observed Problems: Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Observed Problems: Sample Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
184
Troubleshooting
4 Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting chapter provides you with the tools to problem solve
events and conditions on the automation system.
Identifying Events
ADVIA Automation Solutions have several features that help in identifying
and correcting events:
• Visual indicators – Changes in the color of the lights over the system
and station buttons on the LineMaster workspace and on the light
tower identify the existence and severity of the event.
Color Indication
Red System Fatal or Station Fatal.
Under this event condition, the affected
station or the track transitions offline or to the
shutdown state. If the gate condition is not
fatal and depending on station specifications,
the station might continue to process onboard
samples. An example of a red system or station
fatal event is an E-stop.
Yellow Operator required.
Under this event condition, the affected
station transitions offline. While the station
continues to process onboard sample tubes,
the station may not be capable of processing
all tests. An example of a yellow operator
required event is reagent empty.
White A warning condition exists.
Under this warning condition, the affected
station remains online. The station continues
to process onboard sample tubes and is
capable of processing all tests at this point in
time. An example of a white warning condition
is reagent low.
ADVIA Automation Operator’s Guide 185

Troubleshooting
• Event logs–Event logs display the date and time the event message
was posted, the station on which it occurred, the severity of the event,
and the text of the event message.
Five types of event conditions exist:
Event Condition System Behavior

System fatal The tracks or gates, or both, shutdown and
stop running. An event is generated and the
system does not run.
Station fatal A station transitions offline. Depending on
the problem, the station may continue to
process onboard samples.
Operator required Under this event condition, the affected
station transitions offline. While the station
continues to process onboard sample tubes,
the station may not be capable of processing
all tests. An example of a yellow operator
required event is reagent empty.
Warning Under this warning condition, the affected
station remains online. The station continues
to process onboard sample tubes and is
capable of processing all tests at this point in
time. An example of a white warning
condition is reagent low.
General event A general system message that describes a
normal operating system activity: log on,
start initiated, check in.
Managing Events Using the Events Screens

To identify and resolve events, you can access the Event Log screen and
the instrument- specific Events screens:
• The system Event Log screen displays events applicable to the
automation system and across all stations.
• The Events screen for each station displays events only for that station.
186 ADVIA Automation Operator’s Guide

Troubleshooting
Access the system Event Log (F2) screen:

1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Event Log (F2)
or press F2.
Figure 4-1: Event Log
Access the station-specific Events screen for a given station:

1. At the LineMaster workspace, select the station button that
corresponds to the station for which you are managing events.
2. In the Operations area, select Events.
Figure 4-2: Station-Specific Events Screen

Troubleshooting
Event details provide a full description on the meaning and causes of the
event as well as corrective actions when applicable.
Acknowledging an Event
Event conditions on the system must be resolved before you attempt to
eliminate the corresponding event message display in the Message column
of the Event Log screen.
Upon resolving the event condition, you can acknowledge the event.
Acknowledging the event message changes the event condition from an
active event in the event log to an inactive event.
Upon acknowledging the event, the event message on the screen no
longer displays. In addition, the color that indicates the severity of the
problem and that displays on the system button and light tower is
eliminated.
If you acknowledge the event without correcting the event condition on
the system, however, the event message redisplays on the log.
Acknowledge an event after resolving the event condition:
1. At the Event Log screen, select the appropriate event.
2. Select Acknowledge.
Acknowledge All events after resolving all event conditions:
Note When initiated from the system Event Log screen, Acknowledge All is
a global system event. Upon selecting Acknowledge All, all of the system-
wide event messages are eliminated from the log; simultaneously, all
station-specific events are eliminated. When initiated from a station-
specific Events screen, however, Acknowledge All is specific to the station
for which you are acknowledging all of the events. Upon selecting
Acknowledge All, all of the station-specific event messages are eliminated
from the log; however, all system-wide event messages are not eliminated.
1. At the Event Log screen, select Acknowledge All.
Archiving the Event Log

The archival process creates a backup copy of the event log which displays
via the Event Log (F2) screen. The automation system automatically
archives the event log daily. After the log is archived, the system deletes
the current messages in the event log.
Although the event log is automatically archived daily, you have the option
of manually archiving the event log prior to a troubleshooting session.

Troubleshooting
Note Archive the event log when the stations are not processing samples
and when sample tubes are not in route on the track.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then select
Event Log (F2).
2. Ensure that all events are acknowledged.
3. Select Archive Log.
Identifying and Resolving SIQ Events

The SIQ (F5) screen displays events associated with a sample, that is,
reasons that caused the sample to route to the SIQ station as well as
workorder details and sample status. For more information, see Using the
SIQ (F5) Screen‚ page 122.
Note Depending on the configuration of the automation system, an SIQ
station is defined in 1 of 2 ways: a manual SIQ station or an SIQ tray
defined within the Sample Manager. If you have a manual SIQ station, you
cannot have an SIQ tray defined within the Sample Manager. Throughout
this document, the term SIQ station is used interchangeably for
installations that have either a manual SIQ station or an SIQ tray in the
Sample Manager.
Samples route to the SIQ station for the following reasons:
• duplicate Sample IDs
• no workorder downloaded from the LIS or the ADVIA CentraLink system
to the Router software of the automation system
• damaged or defective barcode labels
• improperly placed barcode labels which are too high, too low, or
incorrectly aligned
• sample that was tested manually at a station, but the test was not set
to Route Complete
• cap status cannot be determined
• sample returned to the track from an analyzer with sampling errors
Sampling errors suggest some type of integrity error with the sample;
for example, Insufficient Volume or Clot Detected.
• sample generated barcode read errors at the interface or divert gate of
the Sample Manager or the SIQ station
Barcode read errors can reflect problems at a gate, with pucks, or
barcode labels. A barcode read error may be generated when a divert
gate is not properly aligned or a puck is dirty.

Troubleshooting
Use the Events tab at the SIQ (F5) screen to help determine why a sample
was routed to the SIQ station. You can query sample event information
based on Sample ID or Tray ID.
Accessing Event Messages through the SIQ (F5) Screen

Access the event messages associated with a given sample:
or press F5.
2. At the SID field, type the Sample ID of the sample tube in question, and
press Enter.
Figure 4-3: Event Messages

Troubleshooting
Common SIQ Events

As a troubleshooting guideline, consider some of the event messages that
display in the Event Message column of the SIQ (F5) screen along with
their probable causes and solutions.
Event Message Probable Cause and Solution

Sample not All samples must be properly checked into the
checked in system and on the track from either the
interface gate at the Sample Manager or at the
SIQ station.
If a sample tube is introduced manually to the
track; that is, placed on the track without being
read at the interface gate at either the Sample
Manager or the SIQ station, a Sample Not
Checked In message is generated.
Other possible causes of this event include the
following:
• Barcode misread
• No workorder downloaded from the LIS or
ADVIA CentraLink system for this Sample
ID.
Determine whether a workorder exists for the
sample:
1. Access the SIQ (F5) screen.
2. Type the Sample ID.
3. Review the event messages and any
corrective actions.
4. Select the Workorders tab.
• If a workorder exists for this Sample ID, the
workorder was downloaded from the LIS or
ADVIA CentraLink system. As the
workorder exists, the barcode label may
not have been read successfully. Verify that
the barcode label is placed properly on the
sample tube. Adjust the label or replace it.
• If a workorder does not exist for this
Sample ID, download the workorder from
the LIS or from the
ADVIA CentraLink system.

Troubleshooting

Duplicate Sample ID Two sample tubes with identical Sample IDs are
checked into the system.
For more information, see Duplicate Sample ID
Event Conditions‚ page 194.
No sort group Sort groups serve as the destination location for
samples that must be sent out for offline
analysis, offline processing, or both.
After a sort group is defined, you must do the
following:
• Assign a test or tests from the global test
list to the sort group.
• Assign the sort group to a tray location
within the Sample Manager.
If you do not assign the appropriate tests to a
sort group and you do not assign a sort group to
a tray location in the Sample Manager, sample
tubes continue to route around the track
indefinitely.
When a sort group is deleted, the Sort tray to
which the sort group was assigned is redefined
automatically in the Sample Manager Details
screen as “Unknown.” Samples on the main
track or on the Sample Manager side track that
have a route to the deleted sort group are
routed to the Partial Processed tray.
Test code not defined All tests that are recognized by the automation
on global test list system must be defined as tests on the global
test list.
After an online test is defined, the test must be
added to the global test list so that the test can
be assigned to the instrument test list of the
instrument on which the test processes:
• Add the test code to global test list. For
more information, see Adding a Test to the
Global Test List‚ page 253.
• Add the test to the instrument test list if
required. For more information, see
Assigning Global Test List Tests to an
Instrument‚ page 257.

Troubleshooting

No Read A No-Read event condition is generated under
several different conditions:
• Defective or misaligned barcode label.
Replace or reposition the barcode label.
• Problems at the interface or divert gates.
For problem resolution, see Inspecting the
Gates‚ page 142 and Cleaning the Gates‚
page 150.
• Improperly maintained pucks. For problem
resolution, see Cleaning and Inspecting the
Pucks‚ page 161.
Cap detected after The sample is not successfully decapped. The
decapping operation sample is routed to SIQ.
At SIQ, ensure that the sample tube is not
capped. At the SIQ screen, select Cap Off. Check
the sample back in to the system.
Cap status is unknown The cap status of this sample cannot be
determined by the Decapper. The sample is
routed to SIQ.
At SIQ, ensure that the sample tube is not
capped. At the SIQ screen, select Cap Off. Check
the sample back in to the system.
The sample was placed For samples routing to an undefined load tray,
in the Partial Processed you may see this message, and in some cases,
tray. no message. The message does not indicate
that the selected tray was not available.
Ensure that the selected tray is defined and the
tray is present in an online Sample Manager. If
the tray is full, remove the tray and replace it
with an empty tray.
In some cases, there is a conflict between the
Rerun or Rerun Dilutions property set for the
instrument that last processed this sample.
At the ADVIA CentraLink workspace, verify that
the reruns are complete and the sample is fully
processed.

Troubleshooting
Duplicate Sample ID Event Conditions

A Duplicate Sample ID is an event condition that is identified when a
sample tube with a given Sample ID is checked into the system and the
same Sample ID already exists in memory.
This event condition occurs in these ways:
• When a sample tube is incorrectly removed from the track, and then
checked in without being reset.
• When 2 sample tubes with an identical Sample ID are checked into the
system.
Duplicate samples are handled based upon the duplicate sample handling
features enabled on your system.
When samples have the same Sample ID for the same patient, the optional
Duplicate SID Management feature enables the original sample to continue
processing and the duplicate samples to move to a Duplicate tray or zone
in the Sample Manager. This feature requires the Direct Sample Return
feature to be enabled and a Duplicate zone or tray to be available in the
loading Sample Manager.
If the Duplicate SID Management feature is not enabled, both samples
route to SIQ.
WARNING
Do not use the Duplicate SID Management feature unless you routinely
process 2 tubes from the same patient using the same Sample ID. If the
duplicate samples are from 2 different patients, the use of this feature
could cause incorrect results.
Only 1 Sample tube Checked into the System, but the Identical
Sample ID is Stored in Memory
As only 1 sample tube exists with the given Sample ID and the system
generates an event because the identical Sample ID is still stored in
memory, this condition is often referred to as a “false” duplicate.
Note You can prove the existence of a false duplicate on the system when
a second sample tube with the identical Sample ID does not arrive at the
Duplicate or SIQ station 30 minutes after the generation of the Duplicate
Sample ID event.
Duplicate Sample ID events can be generated from false duplicates in the
following ways:
• A sample tube is removed from the track without being checked out
from the system.

Troubleshooting
• A sample tube is routed for checkout, but a No-Read event is generated

at the interface gate at the Sample Manager or SIQ station preventing a
checkout event.
A sample tube is removed from the track without being checked out
from the system
Under standard routing procedures, when a sample tube completes the
routes of its workorder and checks out from the pick position of the
interface gate at the Sample Manager or SIQ station, a checkout event is
triggered. The checkout event initiates a database save, which writes the
updated route complete information from the Router software to the
database and then clears the Sample ID from memory.
Note Although the Sample ID of the sample tube is cleared from memory,
the Sample ID and all other associated sample tube information is still
saved to the database.
When a sample tube is physically removed from the track without being
checked out from the system at the interface gate of the Sample Manager
or SIQ station, the Sample ID for the removed sample tube still remains in
memory.
If this same sample tube is then checked back into the system at the
interface gate of either the Sample Manager or the SIQ station, a duplicate
event is generated because the Sample ID for this sample still exists in
memory. The sample tube routes to the SIQ station.
To eliminate the Duplicate Sample ID event:
3. Review the event messages.
4. Select Reset Sample.
The Reset Sample function clears all routing information for the given
Sample ID from memory.
5. At the interface gate of the SIQ or Sample Manager, check in the
sample tube.
A sample tube is routed for checkout, but a No-Read event is

generated at the interface gate at the Sample Manager or SIQ station
preventing a checkout event
As per standard routing procedures, a sample tube that has completed the
routes of its workorder and routes to the interface gate of the Sample
Manager or SIQ station for checkout.

Troubleshooting
If a problem exists at the interface gate of the Sample Manager or SIQ

station, however, a No-Read event generates and the checkout event is not
triggered. As the checkout event does not occur, the database save is not
initiated, the updated route complete information from the Router
software is not written to the database, and the Sample ID for this sample
tube is not cleared from memory.
If this same sample tube is then checked back into the system at the
interface gate of either the Sample Manager or the SIQ station, a duplicate
event is generated because the Sample ID for this sample still exists in
memory.
To eliminate the Duplicate Sample ID event:
4. Ensure that the problem at the interface gate at the Sample Manager or
SIQ station that generated the No-Read event was addressed and fixed.
sample tube.
Two Sample Tubes with Identical Sample ID Checked-in

Many facilities require that 2 samples are drawn for a given patient.
Inadvertently, both of these sample tubes having the identical Sample ID
could be checked into the system.
The Duplicate Sample ID event is identified when the barcode label of the
second sample tube is read at the interface gate of the Sample Manager or
SIQ station after the first sample tube is checked into the system.
When samples have the same Sample ID for the same patient, the optional
Duplicate SID Management enables the original sample to continue
processing and the duplicate samples to move to a Duplicate tray or zone
in the Sample Manager. This feature requires the Direct Sample Return
feature and a Duplicate zone or tray.

Troubleshooting
Condition 1 – Second sample tube is checked into the system before

the first sample tube aspirates. (Duplicate SID Management feature
and Direct Sample Return feature are disabled.)
If the second sample tube is checked into the system before the first
sample tube aspirates at a station or is contained within a module, like the
Centrifuge module, both sample tubes route directly to SIQ.
When the second sample tube is checked into the system and is identified
as a duplicate, both sample tubes with this Sample ID are flagged as
duplicates, are blocked from diverting at any of the stations to complete
the current routes of its workorder, and route back to the SIQ station.
4. Determine which sample tube should be checked back into the system.
Note Before initiating the Reset Sample function, ensure that both
sample tubes route back to the SIQ station. If only 1 sample tube with
the duplicate Sample ID is at the SIQ station, wait at least 30 minutes
before initiating the Reset Sample function. The arrival of the second
sample tube indicates that the duplicate Sample ID exists. As such, the
duplicate Sample ID event is not a false duplicate.
appropriate sample tube.
7. Store the second sample tube according to the laboratory’s
requirements.
Condition 2 – Second sample tube is checked into the system after the
first sample tube aspirates. (Duplicate SID Management feature and
Direct Sample Return feature are disabled.)
If the second sample tube is checked into the system and the first sample
tube already routed to a station, where it is aspirating or completed
aspiration or is contained within a module, the second sample tube routes
directly to the SIQ at this point in time. The first sample tube that is
aspirating or contained within the module completes processing at this
station.

Troubleshooting
Upon process completion of the first sample tube at its station, the sample
tube is placed in a pick position at the at the interface gate of the station,
flagged as a duplicate, blocked from diverting at any of the stations to
complete the current routes of its workorder, and routes back to the SIQ
station.
4. On the Workorders tab of the SIQ (F5) screen, determine whether the
route status for the test of the workorder associated with the first
sample tube is in line with the test results that are uploaded to the
ADVIA CentraLink system for this test.
5. Follow lab procedures in determining which sample tube should be
checked back into the system.
Note Before initiating the Reset Sample function, ensure that both
sample tubes route back to the SIQ station. If only 1 sample tube with
the duplicate Sample ID is at the SIQ station, wait at least 30 minutes
before initiating the Reset Sample function. This provides ample time
for a sample tube with a duplicate Sample ID to route back to the SIQ
station from a station on which it was processing or was held.
appropriate sample tubes.
8. Store the second sample tube according to the laboratory’s
requirements.
Accessing Workorders through the SIQ (F5) Screen

Access the workorder information associated with a given sample and
change the route status:
or press F5.
The Workorders tab of the SIQ (F5) screen displays.

Troubleshooting
3. At the SID field, type the SID of the sample tube in question and press
Enter.
Note After you enter an SID value in the SID field, you must press Enter
in order for this SID to populate the Current Sample field and to update
the sample details which display in the Event and Workorder tabs.
Patient information and associated workorder information displays.
4. To change the route status of a test or tests on the workorder, select
the appropriate button.
If you select then

Set Routed and at least 1 the Sample ID is flagged for rescheduling,
of the remaining tests on which prevents the sample tube from
a workorder is not Routed diverting at any of the gates of its current
route. When the sample tube arrives at the
divert gate of the SIQ station, a check-in
event is triggered and refreshed routing
information is retrieved for the remaining
tests of the workorder, which do not have a
route complete status. The sample tube
routes to the next available station where the
Unrouted test of the workorder runs.
For more information, see Managing Load
Zones‚ page 269.
Set Routed and all of the the Sample ID is flagged for rescheduling,
remaining tests on a which prevents the sample tube from
workorder are Routed diverting at any of the gates of its current
information is retrieved. As all of the tests of
the workorder have a route complete status,
the sample tube routes to an Unload tray in
the Sample Manager.
For more information, see Set Routed and Set
All Routed Functions‚ page 298.

Troubleshooting
If you select then

Set All Routed the Sample ID is flagged for rescheduling and
all of the tests on the workorder are set to
Routed. When the sample tube arrives at the
the workorder have a route complete status,
the sample tube routes to an Unload tray in
the Sample Manager.
For more information, see Set Routed and Set
All Routed Functions‚ page 298.
Set Unrouted and the the sample checks in at the Sample Manager
sample tube is located in interface gate, where it receives refreshed
an Unload tray in the routing information, and routes to the
Sample Manager appropriate station where it runs the selected
test.
For more information, see Set Unrouted and
Set All Unrouted Functions‚ page 299.

Troubleshooting
If you select then

Set Unrouted and is on the Sample ID is flagged for rescheduling,
the track or at a station which prevents the sample tube from
diverting at any of the gates of its current
information is retrieved for the unrouted test
or tests of the workorder. The sample tube
routes to the next available station where the
Unrouted test or tests of the workorder runs.
Set All Unrouted the Sample ID is flagged for rescheduling,
which prevents the sample tube from
diverting at any of the gates of its current
the workorder has an Unrouted status, the
sample tube routes to the next available
station where the unrouted tests of the
workorder run.
Recovering from a Conveyor E-stop

You can manually initiate a conveyor E-stop as follows:
• pulling 1 of the E-stop cords
• pushing the E-stop button
Note Stations on the track can also initiate an E-stop automatically when
attempts to transition from a given state are unsuccessful. For more
information, see Recovering from a Station E-stop‚ page 206.
When a conveyor E-stop initiates, the following occurs:
• Main track and the side tracks stop immediately.
• Event posts to the event log.

Troubleshooting
• On the LineMaster workspace, the status bars over the Utilities button
and station buttons turn red.
• On the track light tower, the red light illuminates.
Recovering after Pulling Conveyor E-stop Cord

After pulling 1 of the E-stop cords on either side of the conveyor, recover as
follows:
1. Resolve the problem that led to pulling the E-stop cord.
2. Pause the analyzers on the track.
Figure 4-4: Conveyor E-stop Cord
1. Conveyor
2. E-stop cord
3. Locate the E-stop reset lever.

• On the ADVIA WorkCell CDX system, the Reset Lever is on either
side of the conveyor.

Troubleshooting
Figure 4-5: ADVIA WorkCell CDX System E-stop Reset Lever
1. E-stop Reset Lever
• The ADVIA LabCell E-stop Reset is in the left door of the Utilities
Cabinet.
Figure 4-6: ADVIA LabCell E-stop Reset in Utilities Cabinet
1. E-stop Reset Lever

2. E-stop Reset (An E-stop reset exits for each E-stop Cord.

Troubleshooting
4. Turn the E-stop reset lever until it is parallel to the ground.

5. Continue by following the steps in procedure Resetting and
Transitioning Online‚ page 204.
Recovering after Pushing Conveyor E-stop Button

After pushing the E-stop button on the Utilities Cabinet for ADVIA LabCell
systems and on the side of the conveyor for ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems,
recover as follows:
Note All of the stations with robots have an E-stop button that you can
press to manually initiate an E-stop.
1. Resolve the problem that led to pushing the E-stop button.
2. Pull out the E-stop button.
3. Continue by following the steps in procedure Resetting and
Transitioning Online‚ page 204.
Resetting and Transitioning Online

1. Locate the motor start box.
System Motor Starter Box Location

ADVIA WorkCell CDX As you face the drive end of the conveyor,
system the motor starter box cut out is in the first
skirt on the right of the first 2 meter
section.
ADVIA LabCell system In the left door of the Utilities Cabinet.
2. On the motor starter box, press the Reset button.
1. Reset button

Troubleshooting
3. Acknowledge the event:

a. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Event Log.
b. Select the event.
c. Select Acknowledge.
4. Recover each of the stations from the E-stop event and transition each
station online.
For more information, see Recovering from a Station E-stop‚ page 206.
5. After each of the stations are online, transition the conveyor online:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select Utilities Cabinet.
b. Select Online.
6. If the track does not start, press the Reset button on the motor starter
box again.
7. If a side track does not start, ensure that the Gate Control button is
pulled up and illuminated.
When the Gate Control button is illuminated, communication is
established between the interface and divert gates and the Router
software.
1. Gate Control button
8. If the Gate Control button is not pulled up or illuminated, see

Restarting a Side Track‚ page 206.
Note When a side track starts and the gates are on, the sample tubes on
the side track index through the interface gate and onto the main track
without processing at the instrument. The sample tubes route back to the
instrument for processing.

Troubleshooting
Restarting a Side Track

Restarting a side track resets the gates to their original, home positions.
1. Push the Gate Control button down and then pull it back up.
corresponds to the station where the side track is stopped.
3. At the Details screen for that station, select Offline.
4. Ensure that the Gate Control button is pulled up or illuminates.
Recovering from a Station E-stop

E-stops can be initiated automatically by the stations on the track under
the following circumstances:
• For stations with a robot, a robot error can cause an E-stop shutdown.
Note All of the stations with robots have an E-stop button that you can
press to manually initiate an E-stop.
• For all stations on the track, E-stops can be initiated when a station
attempts to transition from 1 state to another state unsuccessfully. This
unsuccessful transition causes the station’s interface computer to hang
indefinitely.
When a station E-stop initiates, the following occurs:
• Robots stop immediately.
• Event posts to the event log.
• On the LineMaster workspace, the status bar over the appropriate
station button turns red.
• On the track light tower, the red light illuminates.
General Recovery Requirements for Any Station E-stop

Requirements for recovering a station from an E-stop:
1. Resolve the problem that led to the E-stop.
Inspect the station for jammed or misplaced sample tubes. Review the
event log for event messages.
2. If the station has a robot, remove any sample tubes or racks from the
gripper fingers of the robot.
Each robot has a release button on the arm that opens the gripper
fingers so you can remove the sample tube or rack.

Troubleshooting
3. Transition the station from the red shutdown state to offline.

If the station does not transition offline, an event condition still exists
that you must resolve.
4. Acknowledge the event generated from the E-stop.
You can acknowledge the event at the system Event Log screen or the
Event Log screen for the station.
5. Transition the station from offline to online.
6. If you removed sample tubes from the gripper fingers, determine the
status of tests on the sample workorder at the SIQ.
If the status of tests is not complete, when the sample tube is
introduced to the track, the sample tube routes to the appropriate
stations for processing.
If the status of tests are complete when the sample tube is introduced
to the track, the sample tube routes to an Unload tray in the Sample
Manager.

or Fatal Error
1. Resolve the problem that led to the Sample Manager E-stop or fatal
error.
2. If a sample tube exists in the robot gripper fingers, remove the sample
tube.
For more information, see Removing Sample Tubes from Robot
Gripper‚ page 220.
Note At this point in the recovery process, do not select the red
Shutdown button. Currently the station exists in the red shutdown
state. In the red shutdown state, the Sample Manager program
executable continues to run, the Sample Manager memory remains
unaltered, and the sample tube mapping for all of the trays of the
Sample Manager is retained.You are instructed to select Offline, which
gives the system the opportunity to reset. In most cases, selecting
Offline enables the system to transition offline. The Sample Manager
memory and sample tube mappings for all trays remain unchanged. If
the red Shutdown button is selected, all sample and tray mapping
information is lost.
3. Transition the Sample Manager station from the red shutdown state to
offline:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select Sample Manager.

Troubleshooting
b. Select Offline.
If the Sample Manager does not transition to white offline, an
event condition still exists.
Note In the event the Sample Manager does not transition offline, you
must select Shutdown in an attempt to bring the Sample Manager
interface computer to a white shutdown state. When you select
Shutdown, however, the Sample Manager program executable
terminates, the Sample Manager memory is cleared, and the sample
tube mapping for all of the trays of the Sample Manager is eliminated.
As such, all of the sample tubes in the destination trays of the Sample
Manager must be checked back as load trays into the system at the
interface gate of the Sample Manager and reintroduced to the track to
reroute and receive new position assignments. Depending on the
number of sample tubes in the trays of the Sample Manager, this can
be a time consuming process. Alternately, trays that have completed
processing can be assigned to cold storage locations.
If the Sample Manager Then...

does not...
transition offline after Select Shutdown.
selecting the Offline Upon transition to white shutdown, you lose
button the sample tube mapping for all of the trays
of the Sample Manager and must reintroduce
the sample tubes from the destination trays
to the track. For more information, see
Reintroducing Sample Tubes from
Destination Trays of the Sample Manager to
the Track‚ page 214.
transition to the white Attempt to restart the Sample Manager
shutdown state after interface computer using Symantec
selecting the Shutdown pcAnywhere. For more information, see
button Restarting an Interface Computer and
Reestablishing Communication with
LineMaster Software‚ page 209.
4. When the Sample Manager is offline, acknowledge the event

generated from the E-stop or fatal error:
a. At the LineMaster workspace, select Sample Manager and then
select Events.
b. Select the event.
c. Select Acknowledge or Acknowledge All.

Troubleshooting
5. Transition the Sample Manager station from offline to online:

b. Select Online.
6. If you removed a sample tube from the robot gripper fingers, check the
sample tube back into the system.
For more information, see Check In Sample Tube Removed from
Gripper to the Track‚ page 221.
Recovering from an Unresponsive Interface Error

A unresponsive interface condition, formerly referred to as a server busy
error condition, is a communication error that occurs when the LineMaster
computer cannot establish contact with the corresponding interface
computer of 1 or more stations on the automation track.
An unresponsive interface condition exists when the States buttons are
unresponsive and navigation to other stations is delayed. The errors
associated with this condition are generally computer errors 3, 13, and 20.
To restore communication between the LineMaster computer and the
unresponsive interface computer:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select Event Log (F2).
2. Review the event message associated with the unresponsive interface
condition.
3. Follow the steps provided in the message to recover from the
condition.
Note Do not exit the LineMaster software.
4. To restart the interface computer with the unresponsive interface
error, initiate the Symantec pcAnywhere software.
For more information, see Restarting an Interface Computer and
Reestablishing Communication with LineMaster Software‚ page 209.

Communication with LineMaster Software
From the LineMaster computer, the Symantec pcAnywhere software is
used to access and control all computers on the automation network.
Using pcAnywhere allows you to access a network computer interface
station as if you plugged in a monitor, keyboard, and mouse directly into
the interface computer. At the LineMaster computer, initiate the
pcAnywhere software to restart an interface computer.

Troubleshooting
Restart the interface computer and establish communication with the

LineMaster software:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select the Windows Start menu.
2. Select Remote Control Network.
The pcAnywhere software initiates.
3. At the pcAnywhere Waiting... window, select the interface computer
with the unresponsive interface error.
4. Select OK.
After approximately 30 seconds, the Symantec pcAnywhere Remote
window displays.
5. In the Remote Control area of the Symantec pcAnywhere Remote
window, select Restart Host Computer to restart the interface
computer.
Note When the interface computer restarts, the program executable
that corresponds to and runs the station terminates. Stopping the
station program executable forces the station to a white shutdown
state.
6. At the small window display, select Yes.
As the interface computer restarts, the LineMaster workspace displays.
7. While the interface computer restarts, wait 5 minutes.
8. At the LineMaster workspace, select the Windows Start menu.
9. Select Remote Control Network.
The pcAnywhere software reinitiates.

Troubleshooting
10. At the pcAnywhere Waiting window, determine whether the name of

the interface computer that you attempted to restart displays.
If the interface computer name Then

does not display 1. Select Cancel.
The attempted restart using
pcAnywhere was not successful.
Manually restart the interface
computer:
1. At the interface computer, turn
the power off.
2. Wait 5 seconds.
3. Turn the power on again.
Note If you are attempting to
restart the Sample Manager
interface computer to eliminate
the unresponsive interface errors
and bring the Sample Manager to
a white shutdown, an alternate
method of manually shutting
down the Sample Manager
module exists. For more
information, see Manually
Restarting the Sample Manager
Station from the Operation Panel‚
page 213.
does display 1. Select Cancel.
The interface computer successfully
restarted. The LineMaster
workspace displays.

Troubleshooting
11. Determine whether the interface computer restarts and

communication is reestablished with the LineMaster software:
If Then
the Sample Manager 1. At the LineMaster workspace, select the
interface computer Sample Manager station button.
restarts 2. Verify that the Sample Manager is offline.
3. If the Sample Manager is not offline, select
Offline in the States area.
4. At the Sample Manager module,
reintroduce the sample tubes from the
destination trays to the track. Complete
the steps outlined in the following section:
Reintroducing Sample Tubes from
Destination Trays of the Sample Manager
to the Track‚ page 214.
any interface computer Note Refer to the station-specific Operating
other than the Sample Notes before restarting the station.
Manager interface Depending on the station, you may be
computer restarts required to follow additional steps before
bringing the station online.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select the
station button that corresponds to the
interface computer that you restarted.
2. In the States area, select Offline.
3. Select Online.
the interface computer see Shutting Down Stations and Exiting the
does not restart LineMaster‚ page 212.
Shutting Down Stations and Exiting the LineMaster

Note At the LineMaster workspace, do not select the station button
that corresponds to the interface computer with the unresponsive
interface condition. If you select this station button, the LineMaster
slows and does not respond in 30 second intervals. An event message
is not generated initially.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select any station button that does not
correspond to the station with the unresponsive interface error.

Troubleshooting
2. Wait until the screen display changes.

The LineMaster computer can communicate with the interface
computers of other stations while the interface computer of a given
station has a unresponsive interface error.
3. To transition this station to the shutdown state, select Shutdown.
4. Repeat these steps to shutdown each station on the automation track
— except the station with the unresponsive interface error.
5. Ensure that all the stations on the automation track — with the
exception of the station with the unresponsive interface error — are in
the shutdown state.
6. At the LineMaster workspace, select Exit and then select Yes.
Due to the unresponsive interface condition, the LineMaster software
may take several minutes to exit.
7. Wait until the LineMaster computer desktop displays.
8. Start the LineMaster software.
corresponds to a station on the automation track.
10. In the States area, select Online.
11. Repeat these steps to transition each station on the track to online.
Manually Restarting the Sample Manager Station from the

Operation Panel
When attempting to eliminate unresponsive interface errors with the
interface computer of the Sample Manager and bring the Sample Manager
station to a white shutdown state, several options exist:
• Initiate pcAnywhere to initiate a Sample Manager interface computer
restart.
• If the restart through pcAnywhere is not successful, manually
shutdown and restart the Sample Manager interface computer.
• An alternate method to manually shutting down the interface
computer is to manually restart the Sample Manager module.
Manually restart the Sample Manager module:
1. On the Operation panel at the Sample Manager module, press the
E-stop button.

Troubleshooting
2. Restart the Sample Manager interface computer:

a. At the Sample Manager module, open the E-stop panel door to gain
access to the computer.
b. Turn off the computer power switch, CB3, and then CB2.
c. Wait 1 minute.
d. Turn on the computer power switch.
e. Before continuing, wait 5 minutes.
f. Turn on CB2 and CB3.
3. On the Operation panel at the Sample Manager module, pull out the
E-stop button.
4. At the Sample Manager module, reintroduce the sample tubes from the
destination trays to the track
5. Complete the steps complete the steps outlined in the following
section: Reintroducing Sample Tubes from Destination Trays of the
Sample Manager to the Track‚ page 214.
Reintroducing Sample Tubes from Destination Trays of

the Sample Manager to the Track
When the Sample Manager is brought to the white shutdown state, the
Sample Manager program executable terminates, the Sample Manager
memory is cleared, and the sample tube mapping for all of the trays of the
Sample Manager is eliminated. As such, the sample tubes in the load trays
must be repositioned to start at the first position of the tray. In addition, all
of the sample tubes in the destination trays of the Sample Manager must
be checked back into the system at the interface gate of the Sample
Manager and reintroduced to the track.
When a sample tube is checked into the system, a database query initiates
and routing information is retrieved. These sample tubes route back to the
appropriate tray in the Sample Manager where they are placed and receive
new position assignments within the appropriate destination trays.
Depending on the number of sample tubes in the trays of the Sample
Manager, this can be a time consuming process.
Remove all of the trays of the Sample Manager and check the sample tubes
back into the system as specified:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select Sample Manager.
2. Ensure that the Sample Manager is offline.

Troubleshooting
3. Access all of the input trays of the Sample Manager, which include
Load Mixed, Autoswitch Load, Centrifuge Override, and STAT trays,
that contain sample tubes as follows:
a. Remove a STAT tray from the Sample Manager and close the
drawer.
b. Remove a Load Mixed tray from the Sample Manager and close the
drawer.
c. Move and rearrange the existing sample tubes of the Load Mixed
tray so that you can place a sample tube from the STAT input tray
into the first position of the Load Mixed tray, position A1, and
continue placing the STAT sample tubes sequentially leaving no
spaces between sample tubes.
Note If you have an automation system with 1 or more Decappers,
you may have defined STAT, Load Mixed, and AutoSwitch
trays to accommodate a mixture of capped and uncapped
sample tubes in separate predefined sections. As you are
moving and rearranging the sample tubes of the tray,
ensure that capped and uncapped sample tubes are placed
in the correct sections of the tray.
d. If another STAT tray exists, remove this input tray from the
Sample Manager and close the drawer.
e. Move the sample tubes from this STAT input tray to the next
available position of the Load Mixed tray.
f. Repeat this process of removing the remaining STAT input trays,
transferring the sample tubes to the next available position in the
Load Mixed tray, and replacing the empty input tray into the
appropriate drawer of the Sample Manager.
g. Continue moving and rearranging the existing sample tubes of the
Load Mixed tray so that they follow the STAT sample tubes
sequentially and no spaces exist between sample tubes.
h. Repeat this process of removing the remaining Load Mixed input
trays, transferring the sample tubes to the next available position in
the Load Mixed tray, and replacing the empty input tray into the
i. Remove an Autoswitch Load tray from the Sample Manager and
close the drawer.
j. Move the sample tubes from this input tray to the next available
position of the Load Mixed tray.
k. When this input tray is empty, replace it into the appropriate
drawer of the Sample Manager, and close the drawer.

Troubleshooting
l. Repeat this process of removing the remaining Autoswitch Load

the Load Mixed tray, and replacing the empty input tray into the
m. When all of the sample tubes from the input trays are positioned
within the Load Mixed tray, replace the Load Mixed tray into the
n. Remove a Centrifuge Override tray from the Sample Manager and
close the drawer.
o. Move and rearrange the existing sample tubes of the Centrifuge
Override tray so that you place a Centrifuge Override sample tube
in the first position of the Centrifuge Override tray, position A1, and
continue placing the Centrifuge Override sample tubes sequentially
leaving no spaces between sample tubes.
p. Repeat this process of removing the remaining Centrifuge Override
the current Centrifuge Override tray, and replacing the empty input
tray into the appropriate drawer of the Sample Manager.
4. Access all of the destination trays, which include Unload, Sort,
MultiZone Sort, Autoswitch Unload, Partial Processed, Duplicate,
Buffer, and SIQ, that contain sample tubes as follows:
a. Remove 1 of the destination trays — Unload, Sort, MultiZone Sort,
Autoswitch Unload, Partial Processed, Duplicate, Buffer, and SIQ —
from the Sample Manager.
b. Replace an empty tray into the open drawer of the Sample Manager
and close the drawer of the Sample Manager.
Note Load all new samples before loading samples that are in a
destination tray.
c. Take the following action on the sample tubes of the removed
destination trays:
If the samples Then

are removed
from
Unload tray 1. Replace the entire tray into an empty load drawer
in the Sample Manager.
2. Close the drawer of the Sample Manager.

Troubleshooting
If the samples Then

are removed
from
3. After you transition the Sample Manager online,
the sample tubes are checked into the system at
the interface gate of the Sample Manager and the
refreshed route is retrieved.
• If reruns were requested for a given sample, the
sample tube routes to the appropriate
instruments for processing.
• If no reruns are requested, the sample tubes
route to an Unload tray in the Sample Manager,
and receive new position assignments within this
destination tray. Upon removal of the Unload
tray from the Sample Manager, the LineMaster
software automatically creates a Cold Storage
entry by tray barcode for this Unload tray. For
more information, see Using the Cold Storage
(F4) Screen‚ page 130.
SIQ,Buffer, and 1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and
Partial Processed then select SIQ (F5) or press F5.
tray 2. To access event and routing information on the
sample tubes of the tray, type the Tray ID in the
Tray ID field.
A list of the Sample IDs for each sample in the
tray displays in the left, topmost area of the
window.
3. To access the associated event information for
each sample within the tray, select a Sample ID
within this window.
4. Resolve the specified events.
For more information, see Common SIQ Events‚
page 191.
Note Any time a duplicate Sample ID is identified as
an event, you must select the Reset Sample button
before reintroducing the sample to the track. For
more information, see Duplicate Sample ID Event
Conditions‚ page 194.
5. Upon problem resolution, return the sample tube
to the SIQ destination tray.

Troubleshooting
If the samples Then

are removed
from
Note If you have an automation systems with 1 or
more Decappers, you may have defined STAT, Load
Mixed, and AutoSwitch trays to accommodate a
mixture of capped and uncapped sample tubes in
separate predefined sections. As you are moving and
rearranging the sample tubes of the tray, ensure that
capped and uncapped sample tubes are placed in the
correct sections of the tray.
6. Continue this troubleshooting process for each
Sample ID listed in the window.
7. When all of the problems are resolved, replace the
tray into an empty load drawer in the Sample
Manager.
8. Close the drawer of the Sample Manager.
9. After you transition the Sample Manager online,
the sample tubes are checked into the system at
the interface gate of the Sample Manager, the
refreshed route is retrieved, and the sample tubes
route to the appropriate instruments for
processing.

Troubleshooting
If the samples Then

are removed
from
Sort or As per the laboratory’s offline processing
MultiZone Sort requirements for sample tubes routed to this type of
tray Sort tray, remove the sample tubes of this Sort tray for
the applicable offline processing.
If upon offline process completion, the sample tubes
must reside in for Cold Storage for a period of time,
return these samples to a load tray in the Sample
Manager. When the sample tubes are checked into the
system, the sample tubes route around the track and
return to an Unload tray. When full, you remove this
Unload tray from the Sample Manager and to a Cold
Storage location. Upon removal of the Unload tray
from the Sample Manager, the LineMaster software
automatically creates a Cold Storage entry by tray
barcode for this Unload tray. For more information,
see Assigning a Location to a Tray in Cold Storage‚
page 131.
Duplicate tray Investigate the Sample ID. Do not reset the Sample ID.
Do not check these sample tubes back into the
system. Follow your laboratory’s process for handling
duplicate samples.
d. Repeat these steps of removing the destination trays, replacing an

empty tray into the open drawer of the Sample Manager, and
acting upon the sample tubes of the removed destination trays for
each destination tray in the Sample Manager.
5. If a sample tube exists in the robot gripper fingers, remove the sample
tube and check the sample tube back into the system.
For more information, see Sample Tube in Robot Grippers after
Shutdown‚ page 220.
6. Transition the Sample Manager from offline to online:
b. Select Online.
Ensure that the interface transitions to a white online state.

Troubleshooting
Sample Tube in Robot Grippers after Shutdown

In the event that the Sample Manager undergoes an E-stop or is brought to
a white shutdown in response to a unresponsive interface error, a sample
tube may be held in the robot gripper fingers. When this occurs, you must
remove the sample tube from the robot gripper and later check in the
sample tube to the track.
Removing Sample Tubes from Robot Gripper

1. On the Sample Manager operation panel, push in the E-stop button.
2. Use a screwdriver to open the panel in front of the robot gripper.
3. Hold the sample tube with 1 hand and press the sample tube release
button with the other hand.
Figure 4-7: Robot Gripper
1. Sample tube release button
4. Set the sample tube aside in a sample rack.

5. Close the panel and secure it with the screwdriver.
6. On the Sample Manager E-stop panel, pull out the E-stop button.
7. Transition the Sample Manager to online.

Troubleshooting
Check In Sample Tube Removed from Gripper to the Track

1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then select SIQ (F5).
3. In the SID field, type the Sample ID.
4. In the Status column, consider the routing statuses of the tests on the
sample workorder.
5. For this SID, select the Reset button.
6. Verify that the barcode label on the sample tube is undamaged and
properly placed.
7. Reintroduce the sample tube to the track through a load tray at the
Sample Manager or manual SIQ station.
8. Depending on the routing status of the tests, the sample routes as
follows:
If the status of the then

tests of the sample
workorder are
Unrouted At the interface gate, a database query
initiates and a refreshed route is retrieved.
The sample tube routes to the appropriate
instruments to complete the tests of the
workorder.
Route complete At the interface gate, a database query
initiates. As the status of the tests are route
complete, the sample tube routes to an
Unload tray in the Sample Manager.
Routing Samples from a Disabled Sample Manager

At check-in, the system defines a target Sample Manager as the final
destination for a sample. If that Sample Manager cannot be brought online
or is disabled, the samples that are in route to that Sample Manager
perpetually circle the track. To route these samples to another Sample
Manager, perform the following procedure.
1. At the Router workspace, select the stack light of the disabled Sample
Manager.
2. At the function bar, select Show Queue.
All samples in route to that Sample Manager display.

Troubleshooting
3. Record each SID.

If necessary, scroll through the list to see all the samples.
4. Close the window.
5. Select Main.
6. Switch to the LineMaster computer.
7. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select SIQ (F5).
8. For each sample, enter the SID and press Enter.
9. Reset each sample.
If then
your system does not Select Reset Sample.
have a Decapper or The sample routes to another online Sample
Centrifuge Override tray, Manager.
your system has a 1. Select Bring to SIQ.
Decapper, uncapped tray, The sample routes to SIQ.
or Centrifuge Override
2. Select the correct cap status for the target
tray,
instrument.
10. Process the samples at SIQ.
If then
samples route to an SIQ 1. Enter the Tray ID of the SIQ tray.
tray, 2. Select each SID.
3. For the target instrument, select the
correct cap status.
4. For each sample, select Reset Sample.
5. At the Sample Manager, check in the
samples.
samples route to an SIQ 1. Recover the samples.
gate, 2. For each sample, enter the SID.
3. For the target instrument, select the
correct cap status.
4. For each sample, select Reset Sample.
5. At the SIQ gate or Sample Manager, check
in the samples.

Troubleshooting
Recovering from a LineMaster Power Loss

If the LineMaster experiences a loss of power, which could occur
unexpectedly from a UPS malfunction or unplugged power cord, Windows
attempts to restart the system when power is restored.
1. When power is restored, Windows attempts to restart the system.
A Logon Message window displays, which specifies that the system
cannot log you on.
2. Select OK.
3. At the Log On to Windows window, type Linemaster in both the User
Name and Password fields and select OK.
The value Linemaster is case sensitive.
4. At the Shutdown Event Tracker window, select Power Failure: Cord
Unplugged from the list box and select OK.
5. Ensure that the LineMaster desktop displays.
Empty Puck Percentage Threshold

When the empty puck percentage threshold for the number of pucks on
the automation track is reached, this condition is identified by the system
as follows:
• Sample Manager stops introducing new sample tubes to the track.
• At the Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6) screen, the value No populates
the Filling Pucks field of the Puck Management tab. The progress bar at
the bottom of the screen turns from green to red. For more
information, see Managing the Total Puck Count‚ page 170.
• Event posts to the LineMaster Event Log: “Puck management stopped
the Sample Manager(s) from loading samples because the minimum
number of empty pucks has been reached.”
When the Sample Manager removes sufficient sample tubes from the
track, the value in the Filling Pucks field changes to Yes. The progress bar at
the bottom of the screen turns from red to green. The Sample Manager
starts to reintroduce samples to the track.
For information on puck maintenance, see Cleaning and Inspecting the
Pucks‚ page 161.

Troubleshooting
Resolving Workorder Transmission Errors

In the event that you are not receiving workorders at the LAS from the
ADVIA CentraLink system, a transmission error may have occurred
between the LAS and the ADVIA CentraLink system.
Under many circumstances, stopping and restarting the Order Server on
the Router computer reestablishes communication and enables automatic
workorder download from the ADVIA CentraLink system to the LAS.
Resetting the Order Server on the Router Computer

Stop the Order Server
1. At the Router computer, right-select on the Order Server icon, which is
located in the lower right side of the task bar.
2. Select Close.
The Exit Order Server window displays.
3. At the confirmation prompt to stop the order server, select Yes.
Start the Order Server

1. Select the Windows button on the lower left hand side of the
keyboard.
1. At the Windows Start tab on the Router computer, select Start >
ADVIA Automation Order Server.
2. Right-select on the Order Server icon and select Status.
The Order Server Status window displays.
3. Verify that the Transfer Status field value is OK.
4. Verify that the protocol transfer server status value is Connected.
Determine whether Workorders Download to the LAS

1. At the left side of the Order Server Status window, verify that the value
in the Total Files Processed and Total Orders Processed fields are
incrementing.

Troubleshooting
2. Verify that the value in the Total Order Error field is 0.
If the Total Files then

Processed and Total
Orders Processed fields
are incrementing and no the workorder transmission problem is
order errors exist resolved. No further action is required.
are not incrementing the transmission error may have occurred
due to a stopped ADVIA CentraLink order
service or translator.
Continue with the remaining procedures in
this section starting with Determine
whether the ADVIA CentraLink LAS Service
Stopped‚ page 225.
Determine whether the ADVIA CentraLink LAS Service Stopped

Note Only execute the steps in this procedure if ADVIA CentraLink
workorders are still not downloading to the LAS.
1. At the ADVIA CentraLink system, select Start > System Management >
Services > Services or select the Services icon.
2. At the Services window, right-select LAS_Service and select Check
Activity.
A message dialog box displays.
If then
LAS_Service is active 1. Select Cancel.
2. Close the Services window.
LAS_Service is not active 1. Select Cancel.
2. At the Services window, right-select
LAS_Service and select Start.
Determine whether the ADVIA CentraLink LAS Order Translator

Stopped
Services > Translators or select the Translators icon.

Troubleshooting
2. At the Translators window, right-select LAS_Order and select Check

Activity.
If then
LAS_Order is active 1. Select Cancel.
2. Close the Translators window.
LAS_Order is not active 1. Select Cancel.
2. At the Translators window, right-select
LAS_Order and select Start.
Verify Workorder Transmission Status

2. Right-select on the Order Server icon and select Status.
3. At the left side of the Order Server Status window, determine whether
the value in the Total Files Processed and Total Orders Processed fields
are incrementing and whether the value in the Total Order Error field
is 0.
If these values are then

incrementing and no the workorder transmission error is resolved.
order errors exist No further action is required
not incrementing or the transmission error still exists.
order errors exist Contact your technical support provider.
Resolving Inlabbing Transmission Errors

In the event that LAS outbound messages are not uploading from the LAS
to the ADVIA CentraLink system or that LAS inbound messages are not
downloading from the ADVIA CentraLink system to the LAS, a transmission
error may have occurred between the LAS and the
ADVIA CentraLink system. For more information, see the ADVIA CentraLink
System‚ page 74.
Under many circumstances, stopping and restarting the Comm Server on
the Router computer reestablishes communication and enables automatic
upload of LAS outbound messages from the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink
system and enables automatic download of LAS inbound messages from
the ADVIA CentraLink system to the LAS.

Troubleshooting
Resetting the Comm Server on the Router Computer

Note Automation system performance can deteriorate if inlabbing
messages are not being processed. Always ensure that the Comm Server is
active and functioning.
Stop the Comm Server

1. At the Router computer, right-select on the Comm Server icon, which
is located in the lower right side of the task bar.
2. Select Close.
The Exit Comm Server window displays.
3. At the confirmation prompt to stop the Comm Server, select Yes.
Start the Comm Server

1. At the Windows Start tab on the Router computer, select Start > Comm
Server.
2. Right-select on the Comm Server icon and select Status.
The Comm Server Status window displays
The XML_LAS_Update is the translator that uploads LAS Outbound
messages, which include inlabbing messages, from the LAS to the
ADVIA CentraLink system.
The LAS_Query is the translator that downloads solicited LAS Inbound
messages from the ADVIA CentraLink system to the LAS.
Note When the transmission problem is resolved , the indicator arrows
to the right of the XML_LAS_Update or LAS_Query translator fields are
green. The value that follows the translator names is Connected.
Determine whether Transmission is Reestablished between LAS and

ADVIA CentraLink System
1. Determine whether the indicator arrows to the right of the
XML_LAS_Update or LAS_Query translator fields are green and that
value that follows the translator names is Connected.

Troubleshooting
Note Close the Comm Server status window after verifying Comm
server status.
Figure 4-8: Comm Server Status Display
If both of the arrow then

indicators are
green the transmission error is resolved.
When available, LAS outbound messages,
which include inlabbing messages, upload
from the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink system
and LAS inbound messages download from
No further action is required.
red or if only one of the the transmission error may have occurred due
arrow indicators is red to a stopped ADVIA CentraLink translator.
Continue with the remaining procedures in
this section starting with Determine whether
the ADVIA CentraLink LAS Services Stopped‚
page 228.
Determine whether the ADVIA CentraLink LAS Services Stopped

Note Only execute the steps in this procedure if LAS outbound messages,
which include inlabbing messages, are not uploading from the LAS to the
ADVIA CentraLink system and LAS inbound messages are not downloading
from the ADVIA CentraLink system to the LAS.
Services > Services or select the Services icon.

Troubleshooting
2. At the Services window, right-select XML_LAS_Update and select

Check Activity.
If the then
XML_LAS_Update
service
is active 1. Select Cancel.
is not active 1. Select Cancel.
XML_LAS_Update service and select
Start.
3. At the Services window, right-select LAS_Service and select

Check Activity.
If the LAS_Service then

service
LAS_Service and select Start.
Determine whether the ADVIA CentraLink and LAS Translators

Stopped
Services > Translators or select the Translators icon.

Troubleshooting
2. At the Translators window, right-select XML_LAS_Update and select

Check Activity.
If the then
XML_LAS_Update
translator
XML_LAS_Update service and select
Start.
3. At the Translators window, right-select LAS_Query and select

Check Activity.
If the LAS_Query then

translator
LAS_Query translator and select Start.
Verify LAS Outbound and Inbound Message Transmission Status

2. At the Windows Start tab on the Router computer, select
Start > Comm Server.
3. Right-select on the Comm Server icon and select Status.

Troubleshooting
4. The Comm Server Status window displays.
If both of the arrow then

indicators are
green the transmission error is resolved.
When available, LAS outbound messages,
which include inlabbing messages, upload
from the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink system
and LAS inbound messages download from
No further action is required.
red or if only one of the the transmission error is not resolved.
arrow indicators is red Contact your technical support provider.

Troubleshooting
Observed Problems: Conveyor

Observed Problem Probable Cause and Solution
Main track fails to start E-stop relays are engaged.
Motor starter box relays are not set.
Resolve the problem:
1. Turn E-stop reset lever until it is parallel to
the ground.
1. E-stop reset lever

2. Repeat for other E-stop cord.
3. On the motor starter box, press the Reset
button.
• ADVIA WorkCell CDX system: As you face
the drive end of the conveyor, the motor
starter box cut out is in the first skirt on
the right or the first 2m section.
• ADVIA LabCell system: The motor starter
box is in the left door of the Utilities
Cabinet.
1. Reset Button
Unresponsive interface See Recovering from an Unresponsive
message at LineMaster Interface Error‚ page 209.
computer.

Troubleshooting
Observed Problems: Robot and Gate

Robot is stopped Resolve:
1. At the LineMaster, go to the Events
window and read the event messages.
2. Observe the events for the effected
module.
3. If the event is a Robot servo error or
motion error:
At the LineMaster, bring the robot online
or at the station press the Start button.
Robot fails to start The Robot Control Cabinet (RCC) relays are off.
Control cabinet UPS is off or drained.
Resolve the issue:
1. Open the RCC panel for the robot.
2. Open the power drawer on the RCC.
3. On the RCC power drawer, press the main
reset button.
4. Ensure that all panels, doors, and drawers
are closed.
5. Ensure that the 3 circuit breakers display
red tops.
6. If the problem persists, contact your
Samples spin out of No detect by the pick sample tube sensor.
interface gate; no sample A detect of the sample tube at pick from the
tube detected at the place sensor.
interface gate
Resolve the issue:
1. Clean the sensors and the barcode reader.
For more information, see Cleaning the
Gates‚ page 150.
2. Ensure that all necessary trays are
assigned in the Sample Manager.

Troubleshooting

Robot fails to initialize Robot does not move.
Resolve the issue:
1. Ensure that the pressure at the air prep
unit is 75 psi.
2. Ensure that the connector to air
distribution is connected.
3. Determine which axis is not moving.
4. Determine how much of the initialization
process, homing, occurred.
Consider the correct sequence of robot
initialization, Homing steps:
The grippers open and close.
The robot moves in the Z axis, up and
down.
The robot moves the theta axis, rotating
side to side.
The robot moves in the x axis, towards
the track and away from the track.
5. Contact your technical support provider.
Pucks do not rotate at the The puck rotator does not have enough
divert gate friction to rotate the pucks.
Resolve the issue:
1. Clean the puck rotator. For more
information, see Cleaning the Gates‚ page
150.
2. Ensure that the singulators do not have
pieces of barcode label on the edges.
3. Dampen a cleaning cloth with distilled
water.
4. While the puck rotator is rotating, press
the cloth against the puck rotator until the
wheel is clean.

Troubleshooting

Spinning Sample Tubes If a divert gate is out of alignment, a sample
Stuck at the Divert Gate. tube could get stuck between the stop finger
and singulator finger resulting in the sample
tube spinning round so that the barcode
reader scans the same sample multiple times.
1. Singulator Finger
2. Stop Finger
3. Puck
Push back on the divert gate, which relieves

pressure from the puck rotator and divert gate
fingers.
While additional instrument-specific steps for
the ADVIA Centaur and ADVIA Chemistry exist,
all interfaces ultimately require that you press
the gate control button down to turn the
gates off and then pull the gate control button
up to turn the gates on.
See the instrument specific Operators Notes
for procedures on clearing sample tubes stuck
at the divert gate.
If the sample tubes continue to get stuck at
this divert gate, the divert gate could require
mechanical re-alignment. Contact your

Troubleshooting

No barcode is read at the Dirty puck rotator or poor barcode label
divert gate. quality.
Resolve the issue:
1. Clean the puck rotator and the barcode
reader lens. For more information, see
Cleaning the Gates‚ page 150.
2. Verify that the barcode label on the
sample tube is intact and positioned
correctly.
Interface gate does not The 4 fingers of the interface gate should be
initialize. pointing either to the instrument, north and
south, or to the main track, east and west.
If the gate fingers are not correctly aligned in
these directions, the gate spacers could block
the outlet sensor.
The main conveyor backup sensor is blocked
at the divert gate.
Resolve the issue:
1. Manually rotate the gate so the gate
begins to home.
2. Press the gate control button down to turn
the gates off.
3. Manually rotate the gate so the flag lines
up with the sensor.
4. Pull the gate control button up to turn the
gates on.

Troubleshooting
Observed Problems: Compressor

Compressor does not Ensure that the power switch is turned to the
start. On position.
If this does not resolve the problem, contact
your technical support provider.
Compressor operates, but Pressure removed from the system.
pressure does not Resolve the problem:
increase correctly
1. For oil compressors, check the oil level in
or the compressor. For more information,
compressor gets very hot, see Check the Oil Level in the Oil
or uses a large quantity of Compressor‚ page 140.
oil, or both 2. Check the air prep unit waste container.
See Emptying the Air Prep Unit Waste
Container‚ page 176.
3. Check for leaks:
Prepare a solution with water and soap or
detergent.
Using a small brush or gauze, brush this
solution around all air joints.
If bubbling is observed, remove and
replace the air tubing.

Troubleshooting
Observed Problems: Samples

Samples with no For systems with a Decapper that is overridden,
workorders are rerouted samples are rerouted to SIQ after being auto-
to SIQ after auto-retrieval retrieved when a new workorder is received.
when the Decapper is When you check in a capped sample tube with
overridden a cap off workorder from a capped section of a
Load tray, the system routes the sample tube
to SIQ. When a workorder is received, the
sample tube is auto-retrieved and placed on
the track. Because the Decapper is overridden,
the system assumes that the sample tube is
capped and the sample tube is rerouted to SIQ.
1. Remove the SIQ tray from the Sample
Manager.
2. Remove the caps from all sample tubes.
3. Check the samples back into the system
from an uncapped section of Load tray.
Samples with workorders route to their
instruments. Samples without workorders
reroute to SIQ.
Samples perpetually circle If a destination tray is not available, samples
the main track are diverted and enter the interface gate, the
barcode is read, and they are routed back to
the main track. This behavior persists until the
correct destination tray is available.
Ensure that all destination trays are defined
and can receive additional samples
For more information, see Routing Samples
from a Disabled Sample Manager‚ page 221.

Troubleshooting

Samples may not be Samples that receive a rerun or add-on test
automatically retrieved for while on the track are routed to an unload or
rerun sort tray and are not automatically retrieved.
1. At the ADVIA CentraLink Review and Edit
screen, right-select the pending test and
select Dispatch to LAS.
2. At the Dispatch to LAS window, select
Resend and then select OK.
3. To ensure that the Automatic Unschedule
feature is enabled, contact your technical
support provider.
Samples without Samples without workorders that receive
workorders are not workorders while on the track are routed to SIQ
automatically retrieved and are not automatically retrieved.
from SIQ 1. At the ADVIA CentraLink Review and Edit
screen, right-select the pending sample
and select Dispatch to LAS.
2. At the Dispatch to LAS window, select
Resend and then select OK.
3. To ensure that the Automatic Unschedule
feature is enabled, contact your technical
support provider.

Troubleshooting
Observed Problems: Sample Manager

Sample Manager Details When samples are retrieved from a Partial
screen not dynamic for Processed or SIQ tray, the Sample Manager
Partial Processed or SIQ Details screen does not reflect the change
trays dynamically. On the screen, tray positions
may appear to contain samples when in fact
they are empty.
1. At the Sample Manager, visually confirm
the status of the Partial Processed or SIQ
tray.
2. At the LineMaster SIQ screen, enter the
Partial Processed or SIQ tray ID and press
Enter.
The list of SIDs and their positions display on
the left.
Sample Manager Details From the LineMaster Sample Manager Details
screen and the F2 key screen, the F2 key may not function.
Press F2 or navigate to the Event Log screen
by selecting System > Event Log.
Confirmation window When starting the software or changing
display feature settings or configurations, a
confirmation window displays in the lower
left corner of the workspace. If you do not
acknowledge the window, the Sample
Manager will not process sample tubes, may
be unresponsive, or may not function
correctly.
Always acknowledge Confirmation windows
and perform the recommended actions
displayed.

Troubleshooting

Sample Manager drawer Drawer was not opened to its fully extended
does not close position.
Unexpired tray or an output tray is in an input
drawer position.
1. Ensure that the labels on the tray are in
good condition and clean.
2. Ensure that the barcode reader is turned
on by checking for the red barcode beam,
which displays when the drawer is
opened.
3. Open the drawer to its fully extended
position and then slowly close the
drawer.
4. Check the LineMaster computer for
events.
5. If the event cannot be resolved, push in
the E-stop button on the Operation panel,
close the drawer ensuring that it latches,
and then pull out the E-stop button.
Contact your technical support provider.

Troubleshooting

Samples return to the The station that was assigned to process the
Partial Processed tray in sample was unavailable to process the
the Sample Manager sample.
The station may have been offline for longer
than the time out period. This timeout period
is configured by your technical support
provider.
1. Through the SIQ screen, access the event
messages associated with the given
sample.
2. Take the appropriate corrective action.
3. Depending on whether the automated
retrieval from Partial Processed tray
feature is activated, the sample tube is
checked into the system as follows:
• When the automated retrieval from
Partial Processed tray feature is not
activated, the sample tube must be
manually transferred from the Partial
Processed tray to a load tray in the
Sample Manager. From the load tray,
the sample tube is checked into the
system and routes to an instrument for
processing.
• When the automated retrieval from
Partial Processed tray feature is
activated, the sample tube is
automatically retrieved from the Partial
Process tray, checked into the system
and routes to an instrument for
processing.

Troubleshooting

White attention event The Empty Puck percentage threshold is
raised above the Sample reached and the Sample Manager is not
Manager station button introducing new sample tubes on the track.
on LineMaster workspace This problem also manifests as follows:
• Event in the LineMaster Event Log: “Puck
management stopped the Sample
Manager(s) from loading samples
because the minimum number of empty
pucks have been reached.”
• At the Global Router Systems screen, the
value No populates the Filling Pucks field
of the Puck Management tab.
When the Sample Manager removes
sufficient sample tubes from the track, the
value in the Filling Pucks field changes to Yes.
The Sample Manager starts to reload samples
onto the track.
Defining or undefining If you define or undefine an SIQ, Centrifuge
SIQ, Centrifuge Override, Override, or STAT tray while the system is
or STAT trays while the running, and it is the last tray of its type, the
system is running gates reset and the station buttons turn red.
This could damage instrument probes, cause
the LineMaster and Router software to
terminate, and cause the divert gate fingers
to remain extended.
NOTE: Do not define or undefine an SIQ,
Centrifuge Override, or STAT tray while the
system is running.
1. When no samples are on the track, define
or undefine an SIQ, Centrifuge Override,
or STAT tray only.
2. Restart the LineMaster computer.
3. Shut down the Router to power off and
restart the Router computer.
NOTE: When undefining these tray types, exit
and restart the LineMaster software.

Troubleshooting

Sample Manager goes If 3 consecutive capped sample tubes with
offline when 3 Cap Off tests are checked in and the Decapper
consecutive capped is not present or the confirmation gate is off,
sample tubes with Cap the Sample Manager goes offline and an
Off tests are checked in event message displays.
from a capped section of Ensure that capped sections of all Load trays
a tray and the Decapper is contain only capped tubes with Cap On tests.
overridden, not present, Bring the Sample Manager online.
the confirmation gate is
off.
Sample Manager goes If 3 consecutive sample tubes with Cap On
offline when 3 tests are checked in from an uncapped
consecutive sample tubes section of a tray, the Sample Manager goes
with Cap On tests are offline and an event message displays.
checked in from an Ensure that uncapped sections of all Load
uncapped section of a trays contain only uncapped tubes with Cap
tray. Off tests. Bring the Sample Manager online.

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Defining User Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Maintaining Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-248
Maintaining the Global Test List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Test Types Defined on the Global Test List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-249
Adding a Test to the Global Test List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-253
Deleting a Test from the Global Test List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-256
Assigning Global Test List Tests to an Instrument . . . . . . 257
Adding a Test to an Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-257
Deleting a Test from an Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-259
Assigning Pre, Post, and EOL Test Activities to Tests. . . . 259
Assigning Pre, Post, EOL Test Activities by LIS Code . . . . . . . . . .-259
Assigning Pre, Post, EOL Test Activities by Sample Type . . . . . .-261
Assigning EOL Test Activities By Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-262
Overriding Test Activities by Location Override . . . . . . . . . . . . .-263
Viewing the Summary of Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-264
Defining Sort Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Creating a Sort Group and Adding a Test to the Sort Group. . . .-266
Assigning a Sort Group to a Sample Manager Tray . . . . . . . . . .-268
Deleting a Sort Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-269
Renaming a Sort Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-269
Managing Load Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Configuring Scheduled Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Enable the Purge Event Log Archive Files Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Configuring Automatic System Data Backups . . . . . . . . . 275
Configuring Automatic LineMaster Database
Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Enabling the Centrifuge Override Feature Globally . . . . 280
Activating the Automated Retrieval Feature . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automated Retrieval From Partial Processed Tray. . . . . . . . . . . .-281
Automated Retrieval From SIQ Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-282
Enabling the Centrifuge Override Feature
by Sample ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Enabling the Cap Status Confirmation Feature . . . . . . . . 284
245
Using Excess Sample Tube Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Enabling a Preferred STAT Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Enabling the ADVIA CentraLink Test Status Feature . . . . 287
Using STAT Sample Processing Delay Notification . . . . . . 287
Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Direct Sample Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -288
Duplicate SID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -288
246
System Configuration
Overview
The System Configuration chapter outlines the tasks that a user with
System Administrator privileges can perform on an as-needed basis.
Defining User Access

There are 2 types of system users: operator and system administrator. Each
type of system user is able to perform certain tasks.

Administrator
Reviewing event messages Yes Yes
Acknowledging events Yes Yes
Performing diagnostics Yes Yes
Archiving events Yes Yes
Maintaining operator privileges No Yes
(adding, deleting, editing)
Maintaining global test lists Yes Yes
Using cold storage Yes Yes
Using the pick list Yes Yes
Maintaining sort groups Yes Yes
Assigning pre, post, and end of line Yes Yes
tests
Modifying the instrument test list No Yes
Scheduling tasks No Yes
Changing global router settings Yes Yes
Using the daily log Yes Yes
Shutting down the system Yes Yes
Teaching robot coordinates No Yes
Activating CentraLink Test Status No Yes
Changing Gate Information No Yes


Administrator
Changing Preferred STAT Instrument Yes Yes
status
Changing Maximum In Route Queue No Yes
Adding, Modifying, Deleting Load No Yes
Zone Lists
Maintaining Users
You must have system administrator privileges to add, edit, or delete users
from the system. To log on with system administrator privileges, log on
with username siemens and password siemens.
CAUTION
Do not delete the Siemens username or password. Deleting the siemens
username or password could prevent your system from being serviced by
your technical support provider
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and then select Users

(Shift F2) or press Shift F2.
Figure 5-1: Users (Shift F2) Screen
2. Select Add User.

The Details dialog window displays.
Note You can also Edit and Delete existing user information.

3. In the Details dialog window, type the user name, password, and
access level.
4. Select Save.
Maintaining the Global Test List

All tests that are recognized by the automation system must be defined as
tests on the global test list.
The majority of tests defined on the global tests list is established for you
upon software installation of the automation system.This global test list
along with other configuration data such as sample types, Sort trays, and
instrument assignments, is exported from the ADVIA CentraLink system
and imported to tables accessed by the Router and LineMaster software.
This export and import process is designed to save time and eliminate
errors in manually typing in the data. After initial setup, you can add and
delete tests to the global test list.
Tests of the global test list include online tests, which are tests run on
stations connected to the automation system, and offline tests, which are
tests routed to Sort trays in the Sample Manager so that they can be taken
from the automation system for offline analysis, or processing, or both.
Tests of the global test list that are identified as Cap On are those that will
route to and run on Cap On instruments; tests of the global test list that are
identified as Cap Off are those that will route to and run on Cap Off
instruments.
Test Types Defined on the Global Test List

Tests of type LIS Code correspond to those tests that originate from the LIS,
that are defined in the ADVIA CentraLink system, and that are performed
on instruments.
Pre-tests and post tests may not originate from the LIS and are not always
defined in the ADVIA CentraLink system. Pre-tests and post tests are
internal, automation system activities that are defined for the purpose of
internal routing.
After pre-tests and post tests activities are defined, they are assigned to
tests of type LIS code to ensure that the activity is performed before or
after the LIS code test is run at the station.
End of line tests may originate from the LIS and may be defined in the
CentraLink system. They may also be assigned by LIS code, Location, or by
Sample Type as a post test. The tray or manual station to which an end of
line test is always the final destination for a sample tube.

Note If there is more than 1 end of line tests associated with a sample
tube, the used end-of-line test is retained in the following order based on
the method to which they were added to the workorder:
• end of line tests downloaded from ADVIA CentraLink
• LIS code
• Location
• Sample Type
• Unused end-of-line tests are marked as deleted on the SIQ screen.

The types of tests and activities that are defined on the global test list
include the following:
Test Type Description

LIS Code The majority of tests on the global test list are
of type LIS Code. Tests of this type correspond
to those tests that originate from the LIS, are
defined in the ADVIA CentraLink system, and
that are performed on instruments. When
adding a test of type LIS Code, you must
ensure that this Test ID is identical to the test
code from the LIS and the test code in the
ADVIA CentraLink system. A 1-digit
discrepancy among the test codes defined at
the LIS, the ADVIA CentraLink system, or on
the global test list prevents the test from
running.
NOTE: Analyzer test codes for some
instruments also require an exact match on
the global test list.
Pre-Test An action or activity that must be performed
before a LIS code test can run.
Pre-tests are internal, system activities that
are defined for the purpose of internal
routing.
Pre-tests are assigned to tests of type LIS code
to ensure that the pre activity is performed
before the LIS code test is run at the station.
A laboratory’s requirements typically dictate
the conditions under which a pre-test must
run. Centrifuge is an example of a pre-test.
For information on assigning a pre-test
activity to a test, see Assigning Pre, Post, EOL
Test Activities by LIS Code‚ page 5-259.
For information on routing priority, see
Routing Priority with Pre-Tests‚ page 6-301.


Post Test An action or activity that serves as a
destination route to a Sort tray or manual
station, never to an instrument.
An action or activity that must be performed
after a LIS code test runs.
Post tests are internal, system activities that
are defined for the purpose of internal
routing.
Post tests are assigned to tests of type LIS
code to ensure that the post activity is
performed after the LIS code test is run at the
station.
the conditions under which a post test must
run. Slide making is an example of a post test.
For information on assigning a post test
For information on routing priority, see
Routing Priority with Post Tests‚ page 6-302.


End of Line An action or activity that serves as a
destination route to a Sort tray or manual
station, never to an instrument.
End of line tests are internal, system activities
that are defined for the purpose of internal
routing.
End of line tests are assigned to tests of type
LIS code to ensure that they are routed to the
appropriate Sort tray or manual station after
the LIS code test is run at the station.
End of line tests are never assigned to or
performed on instruments. An end of line test
always returns to the end of line destination,
that is, the Sort tray or manual station to
which it is assigned, even in the cases where
retesting is performed at another station. End
of line tests allow for you to route similar
tests, for example all hematology or micro
urine tests, to the same destination location.
the conditions under which an end of line test
must be run.
For information on assigning an end of line
Once defined as a test on the global test list, a test of type LIS Code, pre-
test, and post test can be assigned to a station’s instrument test list. The
instrument test list is a subset of the global test list and contains only those
tests that are processed at the specified station.
Adding a Test to the Global Test List

When adding a test to the global test list, which corresponds to a test code
that originates from the LIS, ensure that the Test ID that you enter is
identical to the test code from the LIS and the test code in the
ADVIA CentraLink system and on instruments. A 1-digit discrepancy among
these test codes prevents the test from running and generates errors. The
sample does not route to the appropriate station or Sort tray. Instead, the
sample routes to the defined SIQ station.

Test priorities are established on the global test list and should be reserved
for critical tests. The higher the assigned number the greater the priority of
the test. Higher priority test are processed first.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Global Test List
(F3) or press F3.
Figure 5-2: Global Test List Screen
2. Select Add.
Figure 5-3: Details Dialog Box

3. In the ID field, type a test code.

If this Test ID value corresponds to a test code that originates from the
LIS, ensure that the value that you enter is identical to the test code
from the LIS and the test code defined in the ADVIA CentraLink system
and on instruments. A 1 digit discrepancy among these test codes
prevents the test from running and generates errors.
4. In the Name field, type the name of the test.
This name value, which can contain a maximum of twenty
alphanumeric characters, displays throughout the system.
5. Type a numerical priority value.
As you increase the numerical value from 0, you increase the priority of
the test with other tests. The higher the assigned priority number, the
greater the priority of the test. At a given instrument, higher priority
tests are run before tests with a lower priority.
When all of the tests of a workorder are of equal priority, the order of
the stations around the track and the check-in point of the sample tube
influence the routing sequence and processing stops of the sample
tube. See Test Priority Determines Routing Priority on the Track‚ page 6-
301.
6. At the Type field, select the appropriate test type: LIS Code, Pre Test,
Post Test, End of Line.
7. Based on the type of instrument the instrument will be processed on,
select Cap On or Cap Off.
If your automation system uses a Decapper, verify that each interfaced
instrument is correctly defined as a Cap On or Cap Off instrument.
Instrument Type
ADVIA 120 system Cap On
ADVIA Centaur system Cap Off
ADVIA Chemistry system Cap Off
AIA-1800 system Cap Off
Centrifuge Module Cap On
CLINITEK Atlas system Cap Off
Dimension RxL system Cap Off
Dimension Vista systems Cap Off

Instrument Type
IMMULITE systems Cap Off
Stago STA-R system Cap Off
Note You can run the
Stago STA-R as a Cap On
instrument only if your
technical support provider
makes specific hardware and
software changes.
8. Select Save.
Deleting a Test from the Global Test List

If active workorders exist against a test, you cannot delete the test from
the global test list. Samples on the track must complete the routes
specified by the tests of their workorder before you can delete 1 of the
corresponding tests from the global test list.
Note When deleting a test from the Global Test List, you must delete the
corresponding test from any instrument test list on which it may be
defined. When you delete a test from an instrument test list, however, you
are not required to remove the test from the Global Test List.In addition, if
the test to be deleted is configured for either the Set Routed or Set
Unrouted property from a user-defined load zone, the user-defined load
zone must be deleted and the LineMaster restarted prior to deleting the
test from the Global Test List. If you need assistance in deleting a test,
contact your technical support provider.
1. Ensure that no active workorders exist that include the test that you
want to delete.
2. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Global Test List
3. Select the test.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select Yes.

Assigning Global Test List Tests to an Instrument

Once defined as a test on the global test list, a test can be assigned to a
station’s instrument test list. The instrument test list is a subset of the
global test list and contains only those tests that are processed at the
assigned station connected to the track. The Router software references
the instrument test list when determining the sample tube routes and
when load balancing among stations when 2 or more stations can perform
the same test.
Typically, tests lists are established for you upon software installation of
the automation system. If you are a system user of type system
administrator, you can manually add to or delete tests from the instrument
test list of the majority of instrument stations.
The instrument test list for some systems, such as the ADVIA Centaur
system, however, is automatically updated when the ADVIA Centaur
system transitions from the shutdown state to online and when reagents
are added to or depleted from the system. You cannot manually add or
delete tests to the instrument test list of the ADVIA Centaur system.
Note System users of type operator cannot add or delete tests to an
instrument test list.
Adding a Test to an Instrument

After tests are added to the global test list, you can assign tests to
instruments.
Note Only add Cap On tests to Cap On instruments; only add Cap Off tests
to Cap Off instruments.
For an instrument to run a test, the test must be selected and enabled on
the instrument test list.
corresponds to the station to which you want to add the test.
Although you can access the instrument test list of some instruments
such as the ADVIA Centaur system, you cannot manually add tests to
this station. The ADVIA Centaur system instrument test list is
automatically updated based on reagent availability and when the
system transitions online.

2. From the Operations area at the left side of the screen, select Test List.
Figure 5-4: Test List Screen
3. Above the Selected column at the Test List screen, select the dropdown
menu and select the unselected checkbox.
All of the tests of the global test list display.
4. In the Selected column, select the checkboxes that correspond to the
tests that you want assigned to this station.
menu and select the selected checkbox.
The tests that you chose by selecting the corresponding checkbox in
the Selected column display. This instrument test list is a subset of the
global test list and represents those tests that you want to assign to this
station.
6. In the Enabled column, select the checkboxes that correspond to the
assigned tests that you want enabled and active on the instrument.
Note Assigned tests must be enabled before samples that include this
test on their workorder are routed to the station for processing.
When a test is enabled, samples that include this test on their
workorder are routed to this instrument for processing.
When a test is assigned to the instrument test list but is not enabled,
samples that include this test on their workorder are not routed to this
station for processing.

Deleting a Test from an Instrument

If active workorders exist against a test, you cannot delete the test from
the instrument test list. Samples on the track must complete the routes
specified by the tests of their workorder before you can delete 1 of the
corresponding tests from the instrument test list.
Note When you delete a test from an instrument test list, you are not
required to remove the test from the global test list. When deleting a test
from the global test list, however, you must delete the corresponding test
from any instrument test list on which it may be defined. If you need
assistance in deleting a test, contact your technical support provider.
1. Ensure that no active workorders exist that include the test that you
want to delete.
corresponds to the station from which you want to delete the test.
Although you can access the instrument test list of instruments such as
the ADVIA Centaur system, you cannot manually delete tests from this
station. The ADVIA Centaur system instrument test list is automatically
updated based on reagent availability and when the system transitions
online.
3. From the Operations area at the left side of the screen, select Test List.
The tests that are assigned to the instrument test list display.
5. In the Selected column, unselect the checkboxes that correspond to
the tests that you want to delete from this station.
Assigning Pre, Post, and EOL Test Activities to Tests

You can assign pre, post, and end of line test activities to LIS code tests of
the global test list on the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen. Assigning
these pre, post, and end of line activities to tests of type LIS code ensures
that the activity is performed before or after the LIS code test is run at the
station. You can assign these activities by LIS code, sample type, location,
location override, or usage.
Assigning Pre, Post, EOL Test Activities by LIS Code

Through the By LIS Code tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen, you
can assign a pre-test, post test, end of line test activity to individual tests of
type LIS Code.

The By LIS Code tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen, consists of 2
areas:
• In the Test List area on the right, all of the global test list tests of type
LIS Code display.
• In the Pre and Post Test area on the left, all of the global test list test
activities of type pre-test, post test, or end of line display.
Assign a test activity by LIS Code:
1. In the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Pre And Post
Tests (Shift F5) or press Shift F5.
Figure 5-5: Pre and Post Tests Screen:By LIS Code
2. In the Test List area on the right, select a test of type LIS code, to which
you are assigning the pre, post, or end of line test activity.
3. In the Selected column of the Pre and Post Test area on the left, select
the checkbox that corresponds to the activity that you are assigning to
the test of type LIS Code.
Pre-test activities are performed before the test is run at a station.
Post test and end of line activities are performed after the test in run at
a station.
Note To remove a pre, post, or end of line test activity from a test of
type LIS Code, select the appropriate test code from the Test List area
on the right and unselect the checkbox in the Selected column of the
Pre and Post Test area that corresponds to the activity.

Assigning Pre, Post, EOL Test Activities by Sample Type

Through the By Sample Type tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen,
you can assign a pre-test, post test, end of line test (EOL) activity to all of
the tests that are run on samples of a certain Sample type. Depending on
your laboratory’s requirements, you might, for example, choose to assign a
Centrifuge pre-test activity to all samples of sample type Serum.
The By Sample Type tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen, consists
of 2 areas:
• In the Sample Type area on the right, all of the sample types currently
defined in the automation system display. You can add, edit, and
delete sample types to the automation system through this area.
Sample types are defined at the LIS. If you add a Sample Type ensure
that it matches the sample type defined at the LIS. The sample types
that display in the Sample Type area on the right also display in the
Sample Type field at the SIQ (F5) screen.
activities of type pre-test, post test, or end of line display.
Assign a test activity by sample type:
Figure 5-6: Pre and Post Tests Screen: By Sample Type screen
2. Select the By Sample Type tab.

3. In the Sample Type area on the right, select a sample type, to which
you are assigning the pre, post, or end of line test activity.

the checkbox that corresponds to the activity that you are assigning to
the sample type.
Note To remove a pre, post, or end of line test activity from a sample
type, select the appropriate sample type from the Sample Type area on
the right and unselect the checkbox in the Selected column of the Pre
and Post Test area that corresponds to the activity.
Assigning EOL Test Activities By Location

Through the By Location tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen, you
can assign End of Line tests to all samples that are from a specific location.
For example, you can assign an end of line test to all samples from the
emergency room.
The By Location tab consists of 2 areas:
• In the End of Line Test area on the left, all of the global test list test
activities of type end of line display.
• In the Location area on the right, all of the location areas currently
delete locations through this area.
Assign a End of Line test:
1. In the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Pre, Post and
End of Line Tests (Shift F5) or press Shift F5.
Figure 5-7: Pre and Post Test Screen: By Location
2. Select the By Location Tab.

3. In the Location area on the right, select an ID and Name, to which you
are assigning the end of line test activity.
4. In the Selected column of the End of Line Test area on the left, select
the checkbox that corresponds to the ID that you are assigning to the
Location.
Note You only can assign 1 End of Line Test to a Location.
Adding, editing, or deleting a Location on the By Location tab also updates
this location in the Location Override tab.
Note To remove an end of line test select the appropriate ID from the
Location area on the right and unselect the checkbox in the Selected
column of the End of Line Test area that corresponds to the ID.
Overriding Test Activities by Location Override

Through the Location Override tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5)
screen, you can bypass a test activity that is normally performed on a
sample. If a Location Override is defined for a location, samples from that
location bypass the associated pre, post, or end of line test activity or the
LIS code test normally assigned to them.
For example, 1 outpatient facility always sends a given sample type to the
automation system already centrifuged. Other locations send samples of
this same sample type, but these samples require Centrifuge processing
and are assigned a Centrifuge pre-test. Under these circumstances, you
could define a Location Override to bypass the Centrifuge pre-test for
samples coming from this outpatient facility.
The Location Override tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen,
consists of 2 areas:
• In the Location area on the right, the override locations currently
delete locations to the automation system through this area.
activities of type pre-test, post test, or end of line display as well as the
global test list LIS code tests.

Override a test activity by location:

Figure 5-8: Pre and Post Tests Screen: Location Override Tab
2. Select the Location Override tab.

3. In the Location area on the right, select a location, for which you are
overriding the test activity.
the checkbox that corresponds to the test activity that you are
overriding for this location.
Note To remove the location override for a test activity, select the
appropriate location from the Location area on the right and unselect
the checkbox in the Selected column of the Pre and Post Test area that
corresponds to the test activity.
Note Adding, editing, or deleting a Location on the Location Override
tab also updates this location in the By Location tab.
Viewing the Summary of Assignments

Through the Usage tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen, you can
view a summary of the assignments by LIS code, by sample type, and by
location override to pre-test, post test, and end of line test activities.
The Usage tab of the Pre And Post Tests (Shift F5) screen, consists of 2
areas:

• In the Source area on the right, the assignments by LIS code, by sample
type, and by location override associated with the selected test type
activity in the Pre and Post Test area on the left display.
You can remove the displayed assignments through this area.
• In the Pre and Post Test area on the left, pre-test, post test, or end of
line activities display.
Figure 5-9: Pre And Post Tests Screen: Usage Tab
2. Select the Usage tab.

3. In the Pre and Post Tests area on the left, select the test ID associated
with the pre, post, or end of line test activity for which you want to
display the summary list of assignments.
Defining Sort Groups

Sort groups serve as the destination location for samples that must be sent
out for offline analysis, offline processing, or both.
After a sort group is defined, you must do the following:
• Assign a test or tests from the global test list to the sort group.
• Assign the sort group to a tray location within the Sample Manager.
You define sort groups through the Sort Groups (Shift F4) screen.

Note If the destination tray to which a sort group is assigned is either not
physically located in the Sample Manager or is full and a sample tube that
is routing to it moves to the pick position at the interface gate of the
Sample Manager, the interface gate indexes and the sample tube returns
to the main track. The sample tube circles around the main track until you
place the appropriate, empty destination tray, which could be an Unload,
Partial Processed, SIQ, or Sort tray, in the applicable drawer of the Sample
Manager.
Creating a Sort Group and Adding a Test to the Sort

Group
You must be a system user of type system administrator to create a sort
group. Before you can assign a test to a sort group, the test must be
defined on the global test list.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Sort Groups
2. Select Add.
The Details dialog box displays.
Note Each sort group must have a unique name.
3. At the Name field, type a unique name for the sort group.
4. At the Priority field, if appropriate, type a priority value.
Note While you can assign a priority to a sort group, you must ensure
that the priority is not higher than the priority of a test that is assigned
to this sort group. If the priority of a sort group is higher than the
priority of 1 of its assigned tests, a sample that includes this test on its
workorder does not route to the appropriate instrument and continues
directly to the Sort tray without processing.

5. Select Save.
Figure 5-10: Sort Groups
In the Sort Group screen, the newly created sort group name displays.
menu and select the unselected checkbox.
All of the tests of the global test list display.
Note Do not assign the same test code to an instrument and to a sort
group. If a single test code is assigned to both an instrument and a sort
group, the sample travels around the track continually never arriving at
a destination. Before assigning the test code, verify that the test code
does not already exist on an instrument test list or in a sort group. A
unique test code must be assigned to the test when it is assigned to an
instrument test list and when the test is assigned to a sort group.
Note Do not assign the same test code to multiple sort groups. Before
assigning the test code, verify that the test code does not already exist
in other sort groups.
7. In the Selected column, select the checkboxes that correspond to the
tests that you want assigned to this sort group.
The tests that you chose by selecting the corresponding checkbox in
the Selected column display.
Note Now that the sort group is created and the tests from the global
test list are assigned, you must assign the sort group to a physical Sort
tray in the Sample Manager.

9. Assign the sort group to a tray in the Sample Manager.

See Assigning a Sort Group to a Sample Manager Tray‚ page 5-268.
Assigning a Sort Group to a Sample Manager Tray

1. At the LineMaster workspace, select Sample Manager and select
Details.
The trays within the drawers of the Sample Manager display.
2. Select Offline.
Wait until the Offline button turns white.
3. Open the appropriate drawer of the Sample Manager that corresponds
to the tray that you selected at the LineMaster workspace.
You can open a drawer of the Sample Manager at the Sample Manager
station or through the LineMaster workspace.
If you open the drawer then

at the
Sample Manager Press the release button on the appropriate
drawer.
Note Press only 1 drawer release button at a
time. The system only allows for 1 drawer to
be open at any given time
LineMaster workspace 1. Select the Sample Manager station.
2. Select the drawer number, located below
the tray positions of the of the appropriate
drawer: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
3. The LineMaster station button transitions
to offline.
4. At the LineMaster workspace, select the pulldown menu that

corresponds to the tray to which you are assigning the sort group.
A list of the available tray types and defined sort groups display.
5. Select the sort group that you are assigning to this tray.
Note You must pull the drawer open until it is fully extended. If you do
not open the drawer to the fully extended length, the drawer does not
7. Load an empty tray into the tray position of the open drawer.

Note Ensure that the tray is loaded with the barcode located on the
left-hand side of the tray.
Note If the drawer does not close, open the drawer until it is fully
extended and then slowly close it again. Go to the LineMaster
workspace and go to Events for additional information on why the
drawer is not closing.
Deleting a Sort Group

You can delete sort groups. When a sort group is deleted, the Sort tray to
which the sort group was assigned is redefined automatically in the
Sample Manager Details screen as “Unknown.” Samples on the main track
or on the Sample Manager side track that have a route to the deleted sort
group are routed to the Partial Processed tray. For more information, see
Defining Sort Groups‚ page 5-265.
(Shift F4).
2. Select the sort group that you want to delete.
3. Select Delete and select Yes.
Renaming a Sort Group

Each sort group must have a unique name. Renaming the sort group does
not change the contents of the sort group.
(Shift F4).
2. Select the sort group that you want to rename.
3. Select Rename.
The Details dialog window displays.
4. At the Name field, type a unique name for the sort group
5. Select Save.

Managing Load Zones

You can define Load Zones to assign selected properties to sample tubes
loaded from that zone by the Sample Manager. You can add, edit, or delete
user-defined Load Zones. User-defined Load Zone properties include:
• ID – The ID generates automatically. If there are no Sort or user-defined
Load Zones in use, the first auto generated ID is 102.
• Name – The name of the Load Zone. This is a unique name. The name
field cannot be left blank.
• Cap Status – Values are Capped, Uncapped, or Unknown. If a Decapper
module is present, the default value is Capped. If there is not Decapper
present, the default is Unknown.
• Priority – The values are Routine or STAT. The default value is Routine.
• Centrifuge Override – The default value is unselected.
• Preferred Instrument (optional) – Select the preferred instrument for
sample processing.
• Set Tests (optional) – Select specific or all tests in the workorder to
Routed or Unrouted.
• Notes (optional) – Enter information to describe this Load Zone.
Note If a sample is checked in from a user-defined load zone without a
workorder, the Load Zone properties apply when the workorder is
eventually received.
Note If a Load Zone with Set Routed, Set Unrouted, Set All Tests Routed, or
Set All Tests Unrouted is defined in a Sample Manager, check in at the SIQ
divert gate is disabled.

Adding a Load Zone List

If you are adding a new Load Zone List, select Add to display the Load Zone
List screen with default values.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Load Zone List
(Shift F6) or press Shift and F6.
Figure 5-11: Load Zone List Screen
2. Select Add.
Figure 5-12: Load Zone Details Screen

3. At the Name field, type a unique name for the Load Zone. The name
field cannot be left blank.
4. At the Cap Status field, select a status.
If a Decapper module is present, the cap status must be Capped or
Uncapped. Otherwise, the user-defined Load zone cannot be assigned
to a Sample Manager.
If a Decapper module is not present, the cap status must be Unknown.
Otherwise, the user-defined Load Zone cannot be assigned to a Sample
Manager.
Note If you select Uncapped, the Centrifuge Override checkbox
automatically selects.
5. At the Priority field, select a priority value.
6. At the Override field, select the Centrifuge Override status.
If you want the Centrifuge property to apply, select the checkbox. If
you do not want the Centrifuge property to apply, the Centrifuge
Override checkbox should be unselected.
Note If you select a cap status property of uncapped, the Centrifuge
Override checkbox automatically selects.
7. At the Preferred Instrument, select the instrument from the list.
The system attempts to route a sample to the selected instrument over
other instruments that can also perform the same tests in the
workorder. More than one system from the instrument list may be
designated a Preferred Instrument for a Load Zone. The Preferred
Instrument property is not strictly enforced. If the Preferred Instrument
is not available, all other instruments that can process the same tests in
the workorder are considered for processing the sample. This property
is optional
8. At the Set Test field, select specific tests, or all tests in the workorder to
Routed or Unrouted.
To set specific test to Routed:
a. Select the Routed radio button.
b. Select all appropriate checkboxes in the Routed column.
To set all test in the workorder to Routed:
a. Select the Routed radio button.

b. Select the Set All Test Routed checkbox.

To set specific test to Unrouted:
a. Select the Unrouted radio button.
b. Select all appropriate checkboxes in the Unrouted column.
To set all test in the workorder to Unrouted:
a. Select the Unrouted radio button.
b. Select the Set All Test Routed checkbox.
If a test is set to Routed, at check in the test is updated to Route
Complete for all instruments that have the test selected. More than 1
test may be set to Routed for a Load Zone. If a test is set to Unrouted, at
check in the test is updated to Unrouted for all instruments that have
the test selected. More than 1 test can be set to Unrouted for a Load
Zone.
If all tests are set to Routed, at check in all the test in the workorder,
except Cold Storage or EOL test, are updated to Route Complete for all
instruments that have the test selected. If all test are set to Unrouted,
at check in, all the tests in the workorder are updated to Unrouted for
all instruments that have the test selected.
Note If using the Set Tests property, only 1 set Routed or Unrouted can
be configured for a Load Zone.
Note Do not check in samples pending reruns to Route Complete.
When the Route Complete feature is enabled, ensure that all reruns
and add-ons for that test for any samples you are sending t the Route
Complete tray are, in fact, complete. Otherwise, if there is a sample in
route, the rerun will not be done. If there is a potential for a change
order, then that change order cannot be honored.
9. Select Save.
If you do not want to save the new Load Zone, select Cancel.
Editing a Load Zone

The Load Zone screen displays.
2. Select the Load Zone.

3. Select Edit.
You can edit these fields: Name, Notes, Preferred Instrument, and Set
Tests (Routed, Unrouted, Set All Tests Routed, and Set All Test
Unrouted).
If the Load Zone is not defined in the Sample Manager or it is defined
only on a Sample Manager in White Shutdown, you can edit the Cap
Status, Priority and Overrides fields. Otherwise, these fields are not
accessible.
If you do not want to save the changes, select Cancel.
Deleting a Load Zone

You can delete a Load Zone by selecting Delete from the Load Zone screen.
The Load Zone screen displays.
2. Select the ID of the Load Zone.
3. Select Delete.
4. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Note You cannot delete a Load Zone if it is defined in the Sample
Manager or if the Sample Manager is not in White Shutdown.
If you do not want to delete the Load Zone, select No.
Configuring Scheduled Tasks

Enable the Purge Event Log Archive Files Feature
The purge event log archive files function should be configured to run
automatically with the archive event log scheduled task.
Each time the archive event log scheduled task runs, expired archives are
deleted.

Configure the purge event log archive files function:

1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Scheduled
Tasks (Ctrl F2) or press Ctrl F2.
Figure 5-13: Scheduled Tasks Screen
2. At the Scheduled Tasks screen, select the Archive Log entry and select
Edit.
The Details window displays.
3. At the bottom of the Details window, select the Purge archived files
older than checkbox.
4. Specify the numerical time value and the time frame after which
archive event log files are deleted:
Note At minimum, archive event log files should be purged monthly.
a. From the scroll list, select the number that corresponds to the
amount of time.
b. From the drop down list, select Day(s), Week(s), or Month(s).
5. Select Save.

Configuring Automatic System Data Backups

You can automatically back up system data at a pre-scheduled time and
frequency. Automatic system data backups can be scheduled daily, weekly,
or monthly. The recommendation is to execute this automatic backup daily
after the last scheduled task runs.
Note While the option of scheduling the automatic system data backups
as tasks exists, you should also manually initiate the system data backup
once a month, see Performing a Manual System Data Backup‚ page 3-171.
From the CD backup that you have after completion of the system data
backup, you have all of the data needed to restore the system in the event
of a system crash. System data includes the following:
• System configuration file (Config.mdb)
• Router configuration files (pfb001.2bf, pfb001.bss)
• Robot Teach Point files for the Sample Manager, ADVIA Hematology
interface module, Stago STA-R interface module, URI, CLINITEK Atlas
interface module, and Centrifuge module
• Tracking data:
• SIQ data
Note Only initiate a system data backup during times of slow system
activity when a limited number of tubes are on the track.
Prior to configuring the system for automatic backup, verify the following:
• Ensure that a CD-RW diskette is in the LineMaster computer CD drive
prior to the initiation of an automatic backup.
NOTE: If the CD-RW diskette were not in the CD drive, event messages
would be logged in the Event Log indicating that the backup could not
be initiated.
• The LineMaster software must be running when the scheduled backup
is initiated.
Configure automatic system data backups:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Backup
(Ctrl F5) or press Ctrl F5.
The Backup screen displays.

2. At the Backup tab of the Backup (Ctrl F5) screen, select Enhanced
Manual Backup Configuration.
Figure 5-14: Enhanced Manual Backup
Note Do not schedule backups during times of high sample activity on

the track.
3. In the Occurs area of the Backup screen, select the appropriate
frequency at which the automatic backup is performed: Daily, Weekly,
or Monthly.
If you select... then...

Daily in the Daily area, enter the frequency, every n
days, in which the backup is scheduled to run.
Weekly in the Weekly area, enter the frequency,
every n weeks, and select the day of the week
in which the backup is scheduled to run.
Monthly in the Monthly area, enter the numerical
value for the day of the month and the
frequency, every n months, in which the
backup is scheduled to run.
Note System data backups should be
scheduled monthly.
4. In the Daily Frequency area, select Occurs once at and specify the time
of day in which the backup is initiated.

Note Do not select Occurs every. This is a troubleshooting and support

feature.
5. At the Reminder Message radio buttons, either select Disable
Reminder Message or select Display Reminder Message:
If you select the... then...

Disable Reminder a reminder message does not display prior to
Message radio button the start of the system backup.
Note The recommendation is to select the
Disable Reminder Message radio button if
you are scheduling automatic system data
backups.
Display Reminder you must specify the number of times the
Message radio button reminder message displays.
This option serves as a safeguard as it allows
you to cancel a scheduled backup in the event
that samples are still processing at the time
the backup is scheduled to run.
Note An operator must be present at the
system to respond to the reminder message.
If a response is not provided, the backup
does not execute.
The reminder message provides the following
options:
• To proceed with the backup, select Yes.
• To cancel the backup, select No.
• To delay the backup for 15 minutes,
select Wait.
If the value specified for the number of times
the reminder message displays is greater than
1, the reminder message redisplays up to that
number of specified times in 15 minutes
intervals.
6. Select any area within the title bar of the Backup screen.
The Backup screen closes. The settings are saved.

Configuring Automatic LineMaster Database Backups

LineMaster database backups must be performed to store LineMaster data
on the Router computer in the event of a LineMaster failure. LineMaster
database backups copy the following data to the C:\Backup directory of the
Router computer:
• Tracking data:
• SIQ data
Note The following data is not stored with the LineMaster Database
backup: System configuration file (Config.mdb), Router configuration files
(pfb001.2bf, pfb001.bss), and robot teach point files. For information on
the System backup procedure in which these files are saved, see
Performing a Manual System Data Backup‚ page 3-171.
You can schedule the automatic back up of LineMaster databases at a pre-
scheduled time and frequency. While database back ups can be scheduled
daily, weekly, or monthly, the recommendation is to schedule these
backups daily.
Note Only initiate LineMaster Database backups during times of slow
system activity when a limited number of tubes are on the track.
Configure an automatic LineMaster Database backup:
1. At the Router workspace, select Control.
2. At the Router computer task bar, select Start > Settings >
Control Panel.
3. At the Control Panel screen, double-select Scheduled Tasks.
4. At the Scheduled Tasks screen, double-select Backup Linemaster.
5. At the Backup Linemaster screen, select the Task tab.
6. Verify that Enabled (scheduled task runs a specified time) is selected.
Clearing this checkbox disables the backup.
7. At the Backup Linemaster screen, select the Schedule tab.
8. At the Scheduled Task dropdown menu, select Daily.
Note The LineMaster databases should be backed up daily.

Note Do not schedule database backups during times of high sample

activity on the track.
9. At the Start Time field, specify a start time.
10. At the Every... day field of the In the Schedule Task Daily area, enter 1.
11. At the Backup LineMaster screen, select the Settings tab.
12. In the Scheduled Tasks Completed area, select Stop the task if it runs
for: checkbox specify the duration of time after which you would stop
the task as 1 hour and 0 minutes.
13. In the Idle Time area, ensure that neither of the 2 checkboxes is
selected.
14. In the Power Management area, select Dont start the task if the
computer is running on batteries and Stop the task if battery mode
begins checkboxes.
15. At the Backup LineMaster screen, select OK.
Note The first time that this LineMaster database backups scheduled task
is defined, the password for this scheduled task must be defined. Defining
the password for this scheduled task on the Set Account Information
screen is not required when subsequent updates to the LineMaster
database backups schedule task are made.
16. If this is the first time configuration, define the password for the
LineMaster database backups schedule task:
a. Double-select the Backup LineMaster icon.
b. Select the Task tab.
c. Select Set Password.
d. Ensure that the Set Account Information screen displays.
e. In both the Password and Confirm Password fields, enter
Linemaster.
The Linemaster value is case sensitive.
Enabling the Centrifuge Override Feature Globally

When you enable the global Centrifuge Override feature, you prevent all
sample tubes that are checked into the system from routing to the
Centrifuge module. The default value for this feature is Off.
The global Centrifuge Override feature should only be used if the
Centrifuge module is not available.

For information on Centrifuge Override by Sample ID, see Enabling the

Centrifuge Override Feature by Sample ID‚ page 5-283.
Activate the global Centrifuge Override feature as follows:
Figure 5-15: Centrifuge Override Feature
2. At the Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6), select the Overrides tab.
3. At the Centrifuge Override area of the screen, select On.
Activating the Automated Retrieval Feature

Automated Retrieval From Partial Processed Tray
Sample tubes route to the Partial Processed tray when the tests of the
workorder cannot complete at the instrument to which the sample tube
routes.
When the automated retrieval feature is activated and sample tubes are in
the Partial Processed tray, sample tubes are retrieved from the Partial
Processed tray automatically when the instrument or tests that were
unavailable become available.
This feature should only be activated or deactivated when sample tubes
are not on the track. You must exit the LineMaster software and restart the
LineMaster software when activating or deactivating this feature.
For sample management and retrieval priority information, see Automated
Retrieval from the Partial Processed Tray‚ page 6-304.

Automated Retrieval From SIQ Tray

The automated retrieval from SIQ tray feature is only available if your SIQ is
a SIQ tray in the Sample Manager. This feature is not available if your SIQ is
a gate at the SIQ station.
Sample tubes route to the SIQ tray when they have duplicate SIDs, no
workorder, defective barcodes, or integrity errors.
When the automated retrieval from the SIQ tray feature is activated and a
sample tube with no workorder is in the SIQ tray, this sample tube is
automatically retrieved from the SIQ tray when a workorder is received.
Sample tubes with integrity errors, short samples, or clots would not be
retrieved from the SIQ tray when the Auto Retrieval Feature is activated.
This feature should only be activated or deactivated when sample tubes
are not on the track. You must exit the LineMaster software and restart the
LineMaster software when activating or deactivating this feature.
For sample management and retrieval priority information, see Automated
Retrieval from the SIQ Tray‚ page 6-305.
Activate the automated retrieval from Partial Processed tray and SIQ tray
features:
Figure 5-16: Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6) Screen
2. At the Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6), select the Automated Retrieval
tab.
3. At the Partial Processed area of the screen, select On.

4. At the displayed message that prompts you for whether you want to
turn on the automated retrieval feature, select Yes.
5. At the Automated Retrieval On dialog box, select OK.
6. At the SIQ area of the screen, select On.
7. At the displayed message that prompts you for whether you want to
turn on the automated retrieval feature, select Yes.
8. At the Automated Retrieval On dialog box, select OK.
9. Exit the LineMaster software and restart the LineMaster software.
Enabling the Centrifuge Override Feature by Sample ID

When you enable the Override by SID feature, you prevent individual
sample tubes based on Sample ID from routing to the Centrifuge module.
For information on global Centrifuge Override, see Enabling the Centrifuge
Override Feature Globally‚ page 5-280.
Activate the Override by SID feature as follows:
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Override by
SID (Ctrl F7). or press Ctrl F7.
The Override by SID (Ctrl F7) screen displays.
2. At the SID field, type the Sample ID of the sample that will be prevented
from routing to the Centrifuge module.
3. At the Override pulldown menu, ensure that Centrifuge displays.
4. Select Apply.

Enabling the Cap Status Confirmation Feature

The Cap Status Confirmation feature verifies the correct cap status for
sample tubes sent to a confirmation gate. A confirmation gate is a cap
detection gate designated to verify the cap status of sample tubes after
they are processed at a Decapper. This feature is used only for automation
systems with a Decapper. Once enabled, the confirmation gate fingers
cycle continuously.
If all confirmation gates are disabled, sample tubes are checked in from the
Sample Manager, route to SIQ, and are not decapped. If your system uses a
Decapper, it must include at least 1 enabled confirmation gate.
Note Do not move or turn off the confirmation gate without discussing
this change with your technical support provider. Moving the confirmation
gate to a location that is not prepared to accept the confirmation gate
could degrade system performance.
Enable a cap status confirmation gate.
1. At the LineMaster workspace, select System and select Gate
Information (Ctrl F8) or press Ctrl F8.
2. Select the confirmation gate and select the Cap Status Confirmation
checkbox.
To prevent the degradation of system performance, ensure that you
select the checkbox that corresponds to the correct gate.
3. At the displayed confirmation gate enabled message, select OK.
The Cap Status Confirmation checkbox is enabled; a message displays
in the Message Log.

Using Excess Sample Tube Management

You can define the maximum number of samples allows to be in route to
an instrument or module. This features makes more pucks available to
route samples to other instruments.
Note This feature cannot be used for Sample Managers.
For each instrument or module, this maximum threshold value cannot
exceed the total puck count on the track. When a routine sample is
checked in, if the number of samples currently in route equals or exceeds
the threshold for an instrument, the instrument is not considered as a
potential destination for the sample, and the system attempts to route the
sample to other instruments that can perform the tests in the workorder. If
routing rules prohibit sending the sample to other instruments, the routine
sample is routed to the Buffer tray in a Sample Manager. When the number
of samples currently in route to the instrument drops below the maximum
threshold, or when any other instrument becomes available to process the
routine sample in the Buffer tray, the routine sample is retrieved and
checked back in to the system. Samples eligible for retrieval are retrieved
from the Buffer in the order they were initially checked in to the system.
Note STAT samples and samples that received change orders are not
restricted by the established maximum threshold value and may be routed
to an instrument even when the number of samples currently in route
equals or exceeds the maximum threshold value.
2. In the Gates field, select a gate.
3. In the Maximum In Route Queue field, enter the maximum number of
samples allowed to be in route to an instrument.
The maximum number allowed is the total puck count that is
configured on the track.
4. Select Apply.
Note If the Maximum In Route Queue field is set to 0 by the operator, no
new routine samples are route to the selected instrument. You can use this
to empty an instrument.

Enabling a Preferred STAT Instrument

When a Preferred STAT Instrument is enabled, a routine sample is
prevented from being routed to the specified instrument when there is at
least 1 STAT sample currently in route to it (either on the main track or side
track). The system attempts to send the routine sample to other
instruments that can perform the tests in the workorder. If routing rules
prohibit sending the sample to other instruments, the routine sample is
routed to the Partial Processed tray in a Sample Manager. When STAT
samples are no longer in route to the Preferred STAT Instrument, or when
any other instrument becomes available to process the routine sample in
the Partial Processed tray, the routine sample is retrieved and checked back
in to the system.
Note This feature cannot be used for Sample Managers or SIQ stations.
If a routine sample on the main track is in route to a Preferred STAT
Instrument without any STAT samples currently in route to it, and a STAT
sample is checked in and routed to the Preferred STAT Instrument, the
routine sample becomes Unrouted to the Preferred STAT Instrument. The
system attempts to send the sample to other instruments that can perform
the tests in the workorder. If routing rules prohibit sending the sample to
other instruments, the routine sample is routed to the Partial Processed
tray in a Sample Manager.
If a routine sample is in the side track of a Preferred STAT Instrument, and a
STAT sample is checked in and routed to the Preferred STAT Instrument,
the routine sample already in the side track is still processed at the current
instrument.
2. In the Gates field, select a gate.
3. Select the Preferred STAT Instrument checkbox.
To remove the STAT only designation, deselect the Preferred STAT
Instrument checkbox.
Note If you change the status of the instrument, samples on the track are
not affected by the change.
You can designate more than 1 Preferred STAT Instrument on an
automation system.

Enabling the ADVIA CentraLink Test Status Feature

When an instrument communicates a test status (enabled or disabled) to
the LAS, the LAS automatically communicates this information to the
ADVIA CentraLink system. If the sample is in the Sample Manager or on the
main track, the sample routing can adjust to the new test status on the
instrument. However, if the sample is on the side track or completing
aspiration, the sample routing does not consider the instrument’s new test
status.
If you manually enable or disable a test on the automation Interface Test
List screen, the LAS automatically communicates this information to the
ADVIA CentraLink system. Additionally, if you manually enable or disable a
test on the ADVIA CentraLink system, the ADVIA CentraLink system
automatically communicates this information to the automation interface.
To enable the ADVIA CentraLink Test Status feature:
2. Select the CentraLink Test Status tab.
a. Select On to activate the feature.
b. Select Off to deactivate the feature.
These instruments do not communicate test status to the
ADVIA Automation system:
• CLINITEK Atlas system
• IMMULITE systems
• ADVIA 12/2120 systems
• Stago STA-R system
• ADVIA 1650 systems
Using STAT Sample Processing Delay Notification

If a STAT sample has been in route to its next destination for more than 30
minutes, warnings are logged to notify you of the delay. To configure the
amount of time before notification of a delayed STAT sample, contact your


Management
Direct Sample Return
Direct Sample Return prevents samples from leaving the Sample Manager
station if the next destination for that sample is an available tray (SIQ,
Partial Processed, Buffer, Sort, or Unload) in that Sample Manager. This
feature ensures efficient use of pucks and routing time as a sample is
immediately returned to the appropriate tray in the Sample Manager.
The Direct Sample Return feature is optional and requires a hardware
modification.
If Direct Sample Return is enabled, before bringing the Sample Manager
out of shutdown or powering on the Sample Manager’s divert gate,
physically examine the Sample Manager’s interface gate and robot gripper
for sample tubes. If sample tubes are in the interface gate or robot gripper,
manually remove these sample tubes. At the SIQ screen, check the status
of any sample tube you removed. If the sample tube is not already
processing on the track, reset and reload the sample tube. If the sample
tube is on the track, then the sample tube you removed is a duplicate.
Handle the duplicated sample according to your laboratories standard
practices for duplicate samples.
Duplicate SID Management

Duplicate SID Management prevents a duplicate sample from leaving the
Sample Manager station, while allowing the original sample to continue
processing. Whether the original sample is on the track or in the Sample
Manager, processing of that sample is not interrupted.
If you remove an original sample tube from an unload-type tray in the
Sample Manager, you must reset the sample before returning the sample
to the track.
If the original sample is in an Unload tray (SIQ, Partial Processed, Buffer,
Sort, or Unload) and an auto-retrieval is requested, only the original sample
is processed. The duplicate is not retrieved. This includes samples in SIQ
with no work order.
This optional feature requires the Direct Sample Return feature to be
enabled and a Duplicate zone or tray to be available in the loading Sample
Manager. Without an available Duplicate tray, the Sample Manager will not
come online.

When Enhanced Duplicate SID Management is enabled, check-in at the SIQ

divert gate is disabled for these reasons:
• A Decapper is present in the configuration
• A Centrifuge OVerride zone is defined in the Sample Manager
• Set All Routed or Set All Unrouted is defined in the Sample Manager
The following table provides the sample routing based upon the status
(enabled or disabled) of the Duplicate SID Management feature and Direct
Sample Return feature.
WARNING
Do not use the Duplicate SID Management feature unless you routinely
process 2 tubes from the same patient using the same Sample ID. If the
duplicate samples are from 2 different patients, the use of this feature
could cause incorrect results.
Table 5-1: Duplicate SID Management Sample Handling Summary
Duplicate SID Direct Handling for If the sample If the sample

Management Sample Duplicate is on the is in Sample
Feature Return Sample track: Manager
Feature
Duplicate Checked-in at Sample Manager:
Disabled Disabled Released from All samples with Not tracked
gate and routes to this ID route to
SIQ. SIQ.
Disabled Enabled Picked from Route all Not tracked
Interface gate and samples with
returned to SIQ. this ID to SIQ.
Enabled Disabled Released from Routes all Prevent auto-
gate and routes to samples with retrieval
SIQ. this ID to SIQ.
Enabled Enabled If a Duplicate tray Sample Auto-retrieval
is available, pick continues from all zones/
sample from processing. trays except
Interface gate and Duplicate tray.
return to
Duplicate tray.
Note If the Duplicate SID Management feature is enabled, check in at the

SIQ Divert gate is disabled.


6 Sample Management
Sample Tube Check-in Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Reruns, Reflex, Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Changes to Instrument State and Turning Gates Off and On . . . . . . 295
Reset Sample Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Reset All Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Set Routed and Set All Routed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Set Unrouted and Set All Unrouted Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Test Priority Determines Routing Priority on the Track . . . . . . . . 301
Routing Priority Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
The offline tests are processed according to priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Routing Priority with Pre-Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Pre-Test Assigned To Tests by LIS Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Pre-Test Assigned by Sample Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Routing Priority with Post Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Post Test Assigned to Tests by LIS Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Post Test Assigned by Sample Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Changes to Sort Groups Affect Sample Processing . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Automated Retrieval from the Partial Processed Tray . . . . . . . . 304
Automated Retrieval from the SIQ Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Numerical Priority Value Changes to Global Test List Tests . . . . 306
Routing Priorities for Reruns and Reruns with Dilutions . . . . . . 306
Advanced Rerun Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Sample Management
6 Sample Management
At check in events, the load balancing algorithm is applied to determine

the next destination for a sample. A number of factors play a role in
determining the route for a sample:
• the number of samples currently in route to an instrument or module
• the number of tests that an instrument or module can perform
• the amount of time since a sample was routed to an instrument or
module
• the location of an instrument or module on the track.
When processing completes at an instrument or module, sample routing
information updates at that interface gate for better distribution of
samples on the track.
When determining a route, the software looks at all the available
instruments and modules on the track that can perform at least one test
from a workorder, regardless of the instrument type. For an instrument or
module to be considered available, it needs to be online with the
appropriate tests from the workorder enabled.
Note Load balancing can be configured by your technical support provider
to support any unique requirements of your laboratory workflow.
For a Sample Manager SIQ, Partial Processed, Buffer, Unload, or Sort
unload zone to be considered available, it must be defined in an online
Sample Manager, a tray must be physically present, and the zone cannot
be filled to capacity. The software load balances samples among unload
zones that meet these requirements.
For samples destined for Buffer, Unload, or Sort trays, if these conditions
are not met, the samples are routed to the Partial Processed tray.
For samples destined for the Partial Processed tray, if these conditions are
not met, the software routes samples to the defined Partial Processed trays
on the system. If there is no Partial Processed tray defined on the system,
samples are routed to SIQ.
For samples destined for the SIQ tray, if these conditions are not met, the
software routes samples to the defined SIQ trays on the system. SIQ is
required to be defined on an ADVIA Automation System.

Sample Management
If a sample tube is in route to an SIQ, Partial Processed, Buffer, Unload, or

Sort tray in a Sample Manager, and that tray becomes unavailable or the
Sample Manager with the tray is no longer online, the system attempts to
route the sample tube to an identical tray that is available in an online
Sample Manager. If an identical tray is not available in an online Sample
Manager, the system sends the sample to a Partial Processed tray.
However, if a sample tube is in route to an available SIQ tray in a Sample
Manager, and that Sample Manager is brought offline, the sample will
remain in route to the offline Sample Manager. Bring the Sample Manager
back online to allow the sample tube to be routed to an available SIQ tray
in another Sample Manager.
Note Similar behavior exists for a sample tube in route to an SIQ manual
station that is no longer available. Enable the SIQ manual station to allow
the sample tube to continue processing.
The current route for a sample tube can be viewed by accessing the SIQ
screen and entering the Sample ID. For tests that are not Route Complete,
the status column displays In Route only for the instrument or module that
is the next destination for the sample. If not the next destination, the
status column remains Unrouted for an instrument or module.
Note The status column displays Unrouted for all tests not Route Complete
when samples tubes are routed to SIQ, Partial Processed, or Buffer trays in
Sample Managers or to a Decapper module.
If a Decapper module is present on the track, a mix of cap on and cap off
tests are not permitted in the same workorder. The exception is when the
cap on test is a Centrifuge test that is assigned by Sample Type or it is a
Centrifuge test that is assigned by LIS Code to all the LIS tests in the
workorder.
Sample Tube Check-in Events

Any event that changes a route is a check-in event. Sample tube check-in
events include the following:
• Reruns, reflex, add-ons
• Changes to instrument state and turning gates off and on
• Reset Sample function
• Reset All function
• Set Routed or Set All Routed functions
• Set Unrouted or Set All Unrouted functions

Sample Management
Reruns, Reflex, Add-Ons

When a rerun, reflex, or an additional test on a sample is requested
through the LIS or the ADVIA CentraLink software, the Router software
determines the location of the sample tube within the automation system.
If a sample tube exists in any tray in the Sample Manager, the sample tube
is automatically retrieved and checked in at the Sample Manager interface
gate. If sample tube exists in a tray in Cold Storage, you must locate the
tube and place it into a load tray in the Sample Manager or into a puck at
the interface gate of the SIQ station.
Note The location of samples within the automation system — on the
track, at an Instrument, in the Sample Manager, and in Cold Storage —
displays on the Sample Query and Pick List (F3). The location fields of the
Pick List area are populated automatically for sample tubes in Cold Storage.
For more information, see Pick List Area‚ page 119.
At the interface gate of the Sample Manager or SIQ station, the sample
tube barcode is read, the database query initiates, which returns a check-in
message to the Router software. The Router software determines the best
route for the Sample ID, at this point in time, based on the number of
sample tubes in route to the instruments and their online status.The
sample tube is checked into the track and routes to the instrument where
the rerun test is performed.
Changes to Instrument State and Turning Gates Off and On
Online State to Offline State

When an instrument transitions from the online state to the offline state
for a period of time that exceeds the time out period specified for the
instrument in LCConfig, the list of Sample IDs, which is stored in memory
for that divert gate, are flagged for rescheduling. When the sample tubes
for these flagged Sample IDs route to the divert gate at the SIQ station, the
flagged Sample IDs trigger a check-in event. The sample is then routed to
another like instrument, if one is available, or to a Partial Processed tray.
Note The divert gate at the SIQ station manages all exception handling.
The check-in event initiates a database query, from which the offline
station is excluded from consideration, and returns a check-in message to
the Router software. The Router software determines the best route for the
Sample ID, at this point in time, based on the number of sample tubes in
route to the instruments and their online status.

Sample Management
Offline State to Online State

When an instrument transitions from the offline state to an online state all
the sample tubes on the track are flagged for rescheduling.
Although the sample tubes on the track are flagged for rescheduling, they
are not blocked from the divert gates of stations on which they can
complete their current routes. As such, when flagged sample tubes can
complete their current routes at stations that are geographically positioned
before the divert gate at the SIQ station, these sample tubes divert at the
stations and complete their current routes. As these flagged sample tubes
do not pass the divert gate at the SIQ station, they do not initiate a check-in
event and as such do not receive a refreshed route.
If the flagged sample tubes cannot complete their current routes at
stations that are geographically positioned before the divert gate at the SIQ
station, then these sample tubes route to the divert gate at the SIQ station,
where they trigger a check-in event. The check-in event initiates a database
query, which returns a route string to the Router software. The Router
software determines the best route for the Sample ID, at this point in time,
based on the number of sample tubes in route to the instruments and their
online status.
Note When a station transitions online, any sample tube on route to a
Partial Processed tray in the Sample Manager is blocked from diverting at
the divert gate of the Sample Manager. When blocked, the sample tube
travels around the track and routes to the divert gate at the SIQ station,
where a check-in event is initiated. The check-in event initiates a database
query, in which the newly transitioned online station is included for
consideration, and returns a route string to the Router software. The new
check-in event determines whether the sample tube can take advantage of
the availability of the newly transitioned online station to process the test
or tests of its workorder.
Reset Sample Function

You initiate the Reset Sample function by selecting the Reset Sample
button on the SIQ (F5) screen. The Reset Sample function clears the
Sample ID and routing information for the given sample from memory.
Note While routing information is cleared from memory, all sample-
specific information remains stored in the database.
As the Sample ID and routing information for the sample is cleared from
memory, a refreshed route is retrieved when the sample tube is checked
into the system.

Sample Management
When the sample tube is placed at the interface gate of the Sample
Manager or SIQ station, the check-in event is triggered. The check-in event
initiates a database query, which returns a check-in message to the Router
software. The Router software determines the best route for the Sample ID,
at this point in time, based on the number of sample tubes in route to the
instruments and their online status.
Note Any time a duplicate Sample ID is identified as an event, you must
select the Reset Sample button before reintroducing the sample to the
track. The Reset Sample function clears the Sample ID and routing
information from memory which allows for a clean start and a successful
check-in event when the sample tube is placed at the interface gate of the
SIQ station. If you do not select the Reset Sample button, the duplicate
event remains associated with the Sample ID For additional information,
see Duplicate Sample ID Event Conditions‚ page 194.
Reset All Function

You initiate the system-wide Reset All function by selecting the Reset All
button on the Global Router Settings (F6) screen. As specified in the
Resetting the Routing and Puck Count‚ page 86, the Reset All function must
be initiated daily.
Note Before initiating a system-wide Reset All, ensure that sample tubes
are removed from the automation system. Ensure that all sample tubes are
removed from instruments, modules, the main track, and the side tracks.
Sample tubes must be eliminated from the side tracks to prevent probe
damage. As all sample tubes must be removed from the system, initiate
the system-wide Reset All at times of the slowest system activity.
The Reset All function clears all routing information from memory, which
includes Sample IDs, routing information from previous runs, and side
track queue counts, and indexes all the gates on the automation track.
As all Sample IDs and routing information are cleared from memory, a
check-in event is triggered for all sample tubes that are reintroduced to the
system:
• Sample tubes in input trays in the Sample Manager undergo a standard
check-in event when placed at the pick position at the interface gate of
the Sample Manager.
• Sample tubes at the SIQ station undergo a check-in event at the
interface gate of the SIQ station.

Sample Management
Note If Duplicate SID Management is enabled, the Reset All function does
not clear routing information for samples currently in the Sample Manager.
To clear routing information for these samples, physically remove the tray
from the Sample Manager, or use the Reset Sample function for the
appropriate samples.
Set Routed and Set All Routed Functions

You initiate the Set Routed or Set All Routed functions by selecting the Set
Routed or Set All Routed button on the SIQ (F5) screen. The Set Routed and
Set All Routed functions change the routing status of a single test or all of
the tests on a workorder to Route Complete, which indicates to the system
that processing for this test or tests is complete.
Most Common Use of the Set Routed and Set All Routed Functions
Typically Set Routed or Set All Routed is applied to the test or tests of a
workorder when the sample tube is manually removed from the track for
offline processing after receiving a route and being scheduled for online
processing.
With manual removal from the track after online work is scheduled, a
checkout event is not initiated automatically, the route status of the test is
not automatically changed to Route Complete and the Sample ID of the
sample tube remains in memory. The routing status of the sample remains
as In Route or Unrouted.
As such, upon process completion of the offline test, the following
activities must occur before the manually-removed sample tube is checked
back into the system at the Sample Manager or SIQ station:
• Select the Set Routed or Set All Routed button – Set Routed changes
the status of a test that was processed offline to Route Complete. Set
All Routed changes the status of all the tests of the workorder to Route
Complete.
• Select the Reset Sample button – Reset Sample clears the Sample ID
and routing information for the given sample from memory thereby
eliminating the generation of the duplicate Sample ID event when the
sample tube is checked into the system.
When a sample tube is checked into the system at the interface gate of the
Sample Manager or SIQ station, a database query initiates, which returns a
check-in message to the Router software.
After the Set Routed function is initiated, the Router software determines
the best route for the remaining tests of the workorder for this Sample ID,
at this point in time, based on the number of sample tubes in route to the

Sample Management
After the Set All Routed function is initiated and all of the tests of the
sample workorder are complete, the Router software determines that the
sample tube route directly to an Unload tray in the Sample Manager. With
this check-in, tracking information on the sample tube is maintained and
the location of the sample tube in the Unload tray in the Sample Manager
is stored. Upon removal of the Unload tray from the Sample Manager, the
sample tube location within Cold Storage is recorded.
Another Common Use of the Set Routed and Set All Routed Functions
Set Routed and Set All Routed can be used to change the route status of a
test or tests to Route Complete so that the route status reflects the status
of the test request that resides in the ADVIA CentraLink system. These
functions are typically performed when service is performed on the
automation system and samples are processed manually on the
instruments.
Other Uses of the Set Routed and Set All Routed Functions
In the event that Set Routed is applied to a test of a workorder that
remained online, the status of this test changes to Route Complete and this
Sample ID is flagged for rescheduling. When the sample tube arrives at the
divert gate of the SIQ station, the check-in event is triggered. The check-in
event initiates a database query, that considers the remaining tests of the
workorder that do not have the Route Complete status and returns a route
string to the Router software. The Router software determines the best
route for the Sample ID, at this point in time, based on the number of
sample tubes in route to the instruments and their online status.
In the event that Set All Routed is applied to a test of a workorder that
remained online, all of the tests of the sample workorder change to Route
Complete and this Sample ID is flagged for rescheduling. When the sample
tube arrives at the divert gate of the SIQ station, the check-in event is
triggered. The check-in event initiates a database query, which returns a
check-in message to the Router software. As all of the tests of the sample
workorder are complete, the Router software determines that the sample
tube route directly to an Unload tray in the Sample Manager.
Set Unrouted and Set All Unrouted Functions

The Set Unrouted and Set All Unrouted functions change the routing status
of a single test or all of the tests on a workorder to Unrouted, which
indicates to the system that processing for the test or tests is not complete.

Sample Management
Typical Use of Set Unrouted and Set All Unrouted Functions

Typically Set Unrouted or Set All Unrouted is applied to a test or to all of the
tests of a workorder that did not complete successfully at an instrument.
In the event that Set Unrouted or Set All Unrouted is applied to a test or
tests of a workorder, the status of the test or tests changes to Unrouted
and the Sample ID associated with this sample tube is flagged for
rescheduling, Which prevents the sample tube from diverting at any of the
gates of its current route.
When the sample tube arrives at the divert gate of the SIQ station, the
check-in event is triggered. The check-in event initiates a database query,
that considers the tests of the workorder that do not have a Route
Complete status and returns a check-in message to the Router software.
The Router software determines the best route for the Sample ID, at this
point in time, based on the number of sample tubes in route to the
Note Depending on your system’s configuration, workorders are
downloaded to an instrument directly from the ADVIA CentraLink software.
As installations use the ADVIA CentraLink system as a data management
solution, the term ADVIA CentraLink system is used when speaking to the
area from which workorder information is downloaded and to which test
results and status are uploaded.
When the sample tube routes back to the divert gate of an instrument on
which the newly Unrouted test or tests are scheduled to run, the
instrument sends a query to the ADVIA CentraLink system to determine the
work that is to be done at the instrument.
• If no result for this test was uploaded to the ADVIA CentraLink system
and the test remains in Pending status, the ADVIA CentraLink system
downloads a workorder or issues a rerun and processing for the newly
unrouted test or tests starts at the instrument.
• If a test result was uploaded to the ADVIA CentraLink system, however,
the ADVIA CentraLink system no longer has a pending workorder to
download and, as such, processing does not start at the instrument.
Instead the sample tube is indexed out of the interface gate, the
Sample ID is flagged, and the sample tube routes back to the SIQ
station.
Another Common Use of Set Unrouted and Set All Unrouted Functions
Set Unrouted or Set All Unrouted can be used to change the route status of
a test or tests to Unrouted so that the status reflects the status of the test
or test requests that resides in the ADVIA CentraLink system.

Sample Management
Test Priority Determines Routing Priority on the Track

Sample routing is strictly determined by the priorities assigned to tests.
Higher numeric priority tests route before lower priority tests. For example,
a test with a priority of 2 routes and is completed before a test with a
priority of 1.
Routing Priority Rules

Routing order for samples is determined by the following rules:
• Rule 1–Higher priority tests must route and complete processing before
lower priority tests route regardless of whether the test is an online or
offline test.
• Rule 2–When all of the tests of a workorder are of equal priority, load
balancing rules determine the next destination.
Note Offline tests are considered complete when they are removed from
the automation track to the Sort tray. As soon as the offline tests route to a
Sort tray, the Router software assigns a Route Complete status to these
offline tests. In terms of the actual test processing, however, these sample
tubes must still be removed from the Sort tray and processed offline.
Each of the offline tests must process before the lower priority online test.
The offline tests are processed according to priority.

When each of the offline tests finishes processing, the sample tube is
returned to a Load Mixed tray in the Sample Manager and is reintroduced
to the track. The sample tube routes to the appropriate instrument where
the lower priority online test processes.
Routing Priority with Pre-Tests

A pre-test is an action or activity assigned to a test that must route and
process to completion before the analytical test to which it is assigned can
begin processing.
Note The routing priority of a pre-test activity always takes precedence
over the test to which the pre-test activity is assigned. Pre-test routing
priority takes precedence regardless of the numerical value assigned to the
Priority field of the test on the global test list. Pre-tests route and complete
before the tests to which they are assigned.

Sample Management
Pre-Test Assigned To Tests by LIS Code

When a pre-test activity is assigned to a test and the test is listed on a
sample workorder, the pre-test activity is automatically added to the
workorder before the test. Regardless of the numerical value assigned to
the Priority field of the test, the pre-test activity always has routing priority
and routes, starts, and completes before the test to which it is assigned.
Pre-Test Assigned by Sample Type

When a pre-test is assigned to a sample type and a workorder exists for a
sample of the given sample type, the pre-test activity is automatically
added to the beginning of the workorder before the existing tests of the
workorder. Regardless of the numerical values assigned to the Priority
fields of the tests of the workorder, the pre-test activity assigned to this
sample type has routing priority and must route, start, and complete
before any of the tests on the workorder.
Routing Priority with Post Tests

A post test is an action or activity assigned to a test that must route and
begin processing after the analytical test to which it is assigned completes
processing.
Note The routing priority of a test always takes precedence over the post
test activity that is assigned to it. A test’s routing priority takes precedence
regardless of the numerical value assigned to the Priority field of the post
test on the global test list. Posts Tests route and begin processing after the
tests to which they are assigned.
Post Test Assigned to Tests by LIS Code

When a post test activity is assigned to a test and the test is listed on a
sample workorder, the post test activity is automatically added to the
workorder after the test. Regardless of the numerical value assigned to the
Priority field of the post test on the global test list, the test to which it is
assigned always has routing priority and routes, starts, and completes
before the post test that is assigned to it. If the workorder lists a test or
tests after the test to which this post test activity is assigned, the next test
on the workorder only routes after this post test activity successfully
completes.

Sample Management
Post Test Assigned by Sample Type

When a post test is assigned to a sample type and a workorder exists for a
sample of the given sample type, the post test activity is automatically
added to the end of the workorder after the existing tests of the workorder.
Regardless of the numerical values assigned to the Priority fields of the
post tests, the tests of the workorder have routing priority and must route,
start, and complete before any of the post tests that are assigned by
sample type.
Changes to Sort Groups Affect Sample Processing

Sort groups are affected by priority changes to the tests assigned to them
and by the addition or deletion of tests. Once defined, sort groups can be
deleted and thereby affect samples with tests routed to them.
Changes to sort groups affect sample processing:
• When the priority of a test that is assigned to a sort group changes, the
Sort tray to which the sort group is assigned remains active on the
Sample Manager Details screen.The only samples affected by the test
priority change are those checked into the system after the test priority
change.
• When a test code is added to a sort group, the Sort tray to which the
sort group is assigned remains active on the Sample Manager Details
screen.The only samples affected by the test priority change are those
checked into the system after the test is added.
• When 1 test code of many is removed from a sort group, the Sort tray
to which the sort group is assigned remains active on the Sample
Manager Details screen. If the last test code assigned to a sort group is
removed from the sort group, the Sort tray to which the sort group is
assigned is removed automatically from the Sample Manager Details
screen. Samples on the main track or on the Sample Manager side track
that have a test on their workorder that was removed from the sort
group are routed to the Partial Processed tray.
• When a sort group is deleted, the Sort tray to which the sort group was
assigned is redefined automatically in the Sample Manager Details
screen as “Unknown.” Samples on the main track or on the Sample
Manager side track that have a route to the deleted sort group are
routed to the Partial Processed tray.

Sample Management
Automated Retrieval from the Partial Processed Tray

Sample tubes route to the Partial Processed tray when the tests of the
workorder cannot complete at the instrument to which the sample tube
routes. When samples are placed in the Partial Processed tray, an event
message may not display. Several factors can contribute to why the sample
did not process at the instrument:
• Instrument is in the offline or pause state.
• Test ordered on a sample is not available at the instrument or a tray
type is not available in the Sample Manager.
• Operator disables the test for the instrument on the Test List screen.
• A routine sample that can only be processed on a preferred STAT
instrument that has a STAT sample currently in route.
• The Rerun or Rerun Dilutions settings for the instrument that originally
processed the sample restrict processing on the instruments currently
available.
A sample tube is retrieved from the Partial Processed tray under the
following conditions:
• Instrument transitions from the offline or pause state to the online
state.
• Test ordered on a sample is available at the instrument. or a tray type is
available in the Sample Manager.)
• Operator enables the test for the instrument on the Test List screen.
• Additional test is ordered on the sample.
• Rerun for an available test is ordered on the sample.
• At the ADVIA CentraLink system, a test or an entire workorder is set to
Unscheduled.
• A STAT sample is no longer in route to a preferred STAT instrument that
can process the routine sample.
• An instrument is available to perform the rerun that does not conflict
with the Rerun or Rerun Dilutions settings for the instruments that
originally processed the sample.
When the Partial Processed On option is not selected on the Automated
Retrieval tab of the Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6) screen, sample tubes
from the Partial Processed tray must be returned manually to a load tray in
the Sample Manager. The sample tube is checked into the system at the
interface gate of the Sample Manager and receives a refreshed route.

Sample Management
When the Partial Processed On option is selected on the Automated

Retrieval tab of the Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6) screen, sample tubes
are retrieved from the Partial Processed tray automatically. For more
information, see Activating the Automated Retrieval Feature‚ page 281.
Samples are loaded onto the track with this priority:
• STATs in unload trays that receive change orders
• STATs from Partial Processed
• STATs without workorders receiving a workorder
• Samples from STAT load trays
• Routine samples in unload trays that receive change orders
• Routine samples from Partial Processed or Buffer trays
• Routine samples without workorders receiving a workorder
• With equal priority, the Sample Manager robot alternates between
samples from Load Mixed and Centrifuge Override or AutoSwitch and
Centrifuge Override trays.
Automated Retrieval from the SIQ Tray

Sample tubes route to the SIQ tray when the sample has no workorder,
defective barcodes, integrity errors, among other reasons.
A sample tube is retrieved from the SIQ tray under the following
conditions:
• Sample tube was routed to the SIQ tray without a workorder.
• Workorder is received for the sample in question.
When the SIQ On option is not selected on the Automated Retrieval tab of
the Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6) screen, sample tubes from the SIQ tray
must be returned manually to a load tray in the Sample Manager after the
problems with the sample are addressed. The sample tube is checked into
the system at the interface gate of the Sample Manager and receives a
refreshed route.
When the SIQ On option is selected on the Automated Retrieval tab of the
Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6) screen and a workorder is received for a
sample tube that did not have a workorder, the sample tube is retrieved
from the SIQ tray automatically.
If a sample is in SIQ because the sample was not identified during its
original check in, upon downloading the workorder, the sample will not be
auto-retrieved when the following conditions are present on the track:
• A Decapper is present on the track

Sample Management
• A Centrifuge Override tray is defined in a Sample Manager

• A Load Zone with either Set Routed, Set Unrouted, Set All Routed, or
Set All Unrouted is defined in a Sample Manager.
• You must manually retrieve the sample from SIQ, locate the workorder,
and then check in the sample.
For more information, see Activating the Automated Retrieval Feature‚
page 281.
Numerical Priority Value Changes to Global Test List

Tests
Changes to the numerical value assigned to the Priority field of a test affect
the routing priority of those sample tubes whose workorders include this
test and that are checked into the system after the test priority change is
entered and saved.
Accordingly when associated changes to sample data are made and saved
to the database after a sample tube check-in, these changes do not affect
the sample tube on the track unless this sample tube undergoes another
check-in event.
Routing Priorities for Reruns and Reruns with Dilutions

Your technical support provider can change the gate properties of Rerun
and Rerun Dilutions, which enforces sample routing for reruns and reruns
with dilution when the workorder tests are defined on the instrument test
lists of 2 or more instruments. Based on the property settings, a sample can
be routed to the same instrument to which it was originally routed or to a
different instrument and this routing can be strictly or loosely enforced.
Note If you are working with infectious diseases, the track decisions must
be considered after the ADVIA Centaur system requirement to have a
sample return to the same instrument in order for automatic dilutions to be
performed.
Gate settings are configured by your technical support provider.
In order for the rerun with dilution feature to function on the automation
system, the LIS must be capable of downloading a dilution factor on the
workorder or you must specify the dilution coefficient or dilution condition
to be downloaded to the instrument within the ADVIA CentraLink system.

Sample Management
Gate Setting Rerun or Description of Caution

Rerun with Operation
Dilution
Behavior
NN The sample The sample If the sample
(Next Available) routes to the follows the rerun initiates
next available normal load as a result of
instrument balancing the ADVIA
capable of routing rules. As Centaur auto
performing the the sample dilution feature
requested test routes to the and the sample
for rerun. next available does not
instrument, it reroute to the
does not same
necessarily route ADVIA Centaur
to the same instrument, the
instrument on dilution
which the test requirement is
was previously not flagged on
run. the alternate
ADVIA Centaur
and the test is
rerun without
dilution.

Sample Management

Dilution
Behavior
SN The sample The sample If the sample
(Same Instrument, routes to the routes to the rerun initiates
Not Strictly same same instrument as a result of
Enforced) instrument on on which the the ADVIA
which the test test ran initially. Centaur auto
ran initially. If If this dilution feature
this instrument instrument is in and the sample
is in the offline the offline or does not
or shutdown shutdown state, reroute to the
state, the the sample same
sample routes routes to the ADVIA Centaur
to the next next available instrument, the
available instrument. dilution
instrument. requirement is
not flagged on
the alternate
ADVIA Centaur
and the test is
rerun without
dilution.

Sample Management

Dilution
Behavior
SS The sample The sample If the same
(Same Instrument, routes to the routes to the instrument is in
Strictly Enforced) same same instrument the offline or
instrument on on which the shutdown
which the test test ran initially. state, the
ran initially. sample routes
to the Partial
Processed tray
of the Sample
Manager.
When the same
instrument is
brought online,
the sample is
reintroduced to
the track and
routes to the
same
instrument for
rerun
processing.
If the sample
rerun initiates
as a result of
the
ADVIA Centaur
auto dilution
feature the
dilution is
performed.

Sample Management

Dilution
Behavior
DS (Different The sample As long as the If the alternate
Instrument, Strictly routes to a requested test is instrument is in
Enforced) different available on an the offline or
instrument alternate shutdown
from that on instrument, the state, the
which the test sample routes to sample routes
ran initially. a different to the Partial
instrument from Processed tray
that on which of the Sample
the test ran Manager.
initially. When the
alternate
instrument is
brought online,
the sample is
reintroduced to
the track and
routes to the
alternate
instrument for
rerun
processing.

Sample Management

Dilution
Behavior
DN (Different The sample As long as the If the requested
Instrument, Not routes to a requested test is test is not
Strictly Enforced) different available on an available on an
instrument alternate alternate
from that on instrument and instrument or
which the test this alternate is this alternate
ran initially. If in the online instrument is
this instrument state, the not online, the
is in the offline sample routes to sample routes
or shutdown this alternate to the
state, the instrument for instrument on
sample routes rerun which the test
to the next processing. ran initially.
available
instrument
even if that
instrument is
the one on
which the test
ran initially.

Advanced Rerun Feature
With the Advanced Rerun feature, the ADVIA CentraLink system enables
you to select a specific instrument in which to rerun a sample tube. The
instrument specified in the Advanced Rerun request overrides other
settings and preferences configured on the automation system. The
instrument specified in the Advanced Rerun request is strictly enforced.
Therefore, if the requested instrument is not available to process the rerun,
the sample is sent to the Partial Processed tray.

Sample Management

Safety Information
Appendix A: Safety Information
Protecting Yourself from Biohazards
BIOHAZARD
This information summarizes the established guidelines for handling

laboratory biohazards. This summary is based on the guidelines developed
by the Centers for Disease Control, the Clinical and Laboratory Standards
Institute, and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
Use this summary for general information only. It is not intended to replace
or supplement your laboratory or hospital biohazard control procedures.
By definition, a biohazardous condition is a situation involving infectious
agents biological in nature, such as the hepatitis B virus, the human
immunodeficiency virus, and the tuberculosis bacterium. These infectious
agents may be present in human blood and blood products and in other
body fluids.
The following are the major sources of contamination when handling
potentially infectious agents:
• needlesticks
• hand-to-mouth contact
• hand-to-eye contact
• splashes to or direct contact with mucous membranes, superficial cuts,
open wounds, and other skin conditions that may permit absorption
into subcutaneous skin layers
• splashes or aerosol contact with skin and eyes

Safety Information
To prevent accidental contamination in a clinical laboratory, strictly adhere

to the following procedures:
• Wear gloves while servicing parts of the instrument that have contact
with body fluids such as serum, plasma, urine, or whole blood.
• Wash your hands before going from a contaminated area to a
noncontaminated area, or when you remove or change gloves.
• Perform procedures carefully to minimize aerosol formation.
• Wear facial protection when splatter or aerosol formation are possible.
• Wear personal protective equipment such as safety glasses, gloves, lab
coats or aprons when working with possible biohazard contaminants.
• Keep your hands away from your face.
• Cover all superficial cuts and wounds before starting any work.
• Dispose of contaminated materials according to your laboratory’s
biohazard control procedures.
• Keep your work area disinfected.
• Disinfect tools and other items that have been near any part of the
instrument sample path or waste area with 10% v/v bleach.
• Do not eat, drink, smoke, or apply cosmetics or contact lenses while in
the laboratory.
• Do not mouth pipet any liquid, including water.
• Do not place tools or any other items in your mouth.
• Do not use the biohazard sink for personal cleaning such as rinsing
coffee cups or washing hands.
To prevent needlestick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely
bent, cut, broken, removed from disposable syringes, or otherwise
manipulated by hand.
References
1. Centers for Disease Control. Update: Universal precautions for
prevention of transmission of human immunodeficiency virus,
hepatitis B virus and other bloodborne pathogens in healthcare
settings. 1988. MMWR, 37:377–382, 387, 388.
2. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (formerly NCCLS).
Protection of Laboratory Workers from Occupationally Acquired
Infections; Approved Guideline - Third Edition. Wayne, PA: Clinical and
Laboratory Standards Institute; 2005. CLSI Document M29-A3. [ISBN 1-
56238-567-4].

Safety Information
3. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Bloodborne

Pathogens Standard. 29 CFR 1910. 1030.
Safety Guidelines
Consider the following sample tube guidelines:
• Ensure that all sample tubes are fully seated and are standing
completely upright in the sample tray.
• Ensure that the sample trays are not tilted or jostled as they are being
carried to and placed into the Sample Manager.
• Close the Sample Manager drawer gently and do not use excessive
force if the latch does not engage initially.
• Ensure that pour-off sample tubes are not overfilled. The air space
above the liquid in pour off sample tubes should be at least 1 times the
width of the sample tube.
Protective Covers, Doors, and Panels

The ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA WorkCell CDX covers, doors, and panels are
designed to protect you from potential injury from moving parts or
exposure to potential electrical or laser hazard.
WARNING
Do not attempt to move or remove the system without first contacting
your technical support provider. If you need to move or remove the
ADVIA LabCell or ADVIA WorkCell CDX system for any reason, contact
your technical support provider.
WARNING
Do not remove any covers from the conveyor, track, gates, or modules
during normal operation without first contacting your technical support
provider, unless instructed to do so in the Operator’s Guide or operating
instructions. Removing covers may expose you to mechanical, electrical,
biohazard, or laser hazards that could cause bodily injury to you or could
cause damage to the automation system.
Several types of conveyors, trays, and panels exist:

• track covers
• conveyor covers
• divert gate covers

Safety Information
• drip trays
1. Track Covers
2. Conveyor Covers
• probe covers
• front and back panels on the Sample Manager, Centrifuge module,
Dual ADVIA Hematology interface module, and the Stago STA-R
interface module
• doors to access the robot modules on the Sample Manager, Centrifuge
module, Dual ADVIA Hematology interface module, and the Stago
STA-R interface module

Safety Information
• RCC drawer covers on the Sample Manager, Centrifuge module, Dual

ADVIA Hematology interface module, and the Stago STA-R interface
module
Mechanical Safety
There are several primary areas on an ADVIA LabCell or
ADVIA WorkCell CDX system containing potential mechanical hazards:
• robots on the Sample Manager, Centrifuge module, Dual
ADVIA Hematology interface module, and the Stago STA-R interface
module, protected by module doors and covers
• divert and interface gates, protected by the track covers
• main track and side tracks, protected by the track covers
Instruct all operators working on the system to avoid removing the covers
that protect the operator from exposure to these areas while the
component is operable.
WARNING
Do not place your hands or fingers near the gate areas on the side track
where the moving Flex Link is exposed. This may cause pinching and
injury to your hands or fingers.

Safety Information
WARNING
Do not remove any of the above listed protective covers unless instructed
to do so in the Operator’s Guide, Operation Notes, or Special Operating
Procedures. Removing any of these covers without carefully following
the procedures in these documents will expose you to potentially
dangerous mechanical movement and could cause bodily injury. Do not
attempt to perform maintenance procedures in any of these areas of
potential mechanical hazard without first pressing the E-stop safety
button for the area being worked on or pulling the E-stop cord.
Electrical Safety
Do not remove the covers that protect you from exposure to the following
areas, which contain potential electrical hazards, on the ADVIA LabCell or
ADVIA WorkCell CDX system:
• main power control box, which is protected by the box cover provided
by the facility
• For the ADVIA LabCell systems only, Utilities Cabinet, which is
protected by the enclosure door and cabinet door
• For ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems only, Utilities Enclosure, which is
protected by the Plexiglas cover, enclosure door, and conveyor covers
• RCC power drawer, which is protected by the RCC drawer covers
• conveyor power outlet boxes, which are protected by the conveyor
covers
• PLC gate controllers, which are protected by the PLC covers and
conveyor covers
WARNING
Do not remove any of these protective covers. Removing any of these
covers will expose you to potentially dangerous electrical current and
cause bodily injury. In addition, compromising the integrity of the
electrical components or grounding of the system could create an
electrical shock hazard.

Safety Information
CAUTION
Do not attempt to service or maintain any of these areas of potential
electrical hazard. All service-related procedures involving these areas
should be performed by a fully trained technical service provider.
Compromising the integrity of the electrical components or grounding of
the system may cause damage to the system.
Laser Safety
LASER WARNING
Never look directly at the beam of a hand-held barcode scanner or point
the scanner at another person. Also, do not look at the reflection of the
beam from a shiny surface. Only trained field service personnel should
perform procedures related to laser assemblies.
Never point a hand-held barcode scanner at anyone.
Laser Safety Classification

All ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems are classified as CDRH
Class II and EN60825-1 Class 2 systems and comply with CDRH 1040.10
and IEC 60825-1: 1993+A1: 1997+A2: 2001.
Note These classifications are defined by the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA) Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH)
regulations 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11.
Particular caution should be taken when performing operating or
maintenance procedures near or around a divert gate, an interface gate, or
a Sample Manager (or Loader) with an open drawer.
Before operating the system, ensure that all safety covers are in place.

Safety Information
Locations of the Barcode Readers

Divert Gates and Interface Gates
ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA WorkCell systems contain barcode readers in
every divert gate and interface gate. The laser is activated at a gate when a
sample tube is detected and the station’s instrument is online.
WARNING
When performing your daily cleaning procedure of the gates, ensure that
the gate control button is pressed in. Performing these procedures while
the button is lifted and the gate is started may cause damage to the eyes.
The specifications for the barcode reader assemblies in the divert and
interface gates are summarized in the following table.
Characteristic Specification
Maximum Power Output 1.2 mW
Wavelength 670 nm
Pulse Duration 111 µs

Safety Information
Sample Manager
Stationary barcode readers are also present above every Sample Manager
drawer. Each Sample Manager has 5 drawers. The laser in the Sample
Manager activates when any of the drawers are opened.
The specifications for the barcode readers above the Sample Manager
drawers are summarized in the following table:
Wavelength 650 nm
Pulse Duration CW
Some field service procedures require the removal of the protective

housings that prevent human access to the laser radiation. The removal of
this protective housing may change the classification of the laser. All field
service procedures must be followed precisely. Only trained field service
personnel should perform procedures related to laser assemblies.

Safety Information

Warranty and Support Information
Appendix B: Warranty and Support

Information
Limited System Warranty and Service Delivery Policy

Siemens and its authorized distributors may provide customers who
acquire new Siemens instruments with a limited warranty either in a
specific agreement or in standard language on their invoices. This limited
warranty is designed to protect customers from the cost associated with
repairing instruments that exhibit malfunctions due to defects in materials
and/or workmanship during the warranty period.
Siemens, at its election, will provide warranty service either by providing
repair service of the instrument on site, or by exchanging the defective
instrument or component, subject to the limitations and exclusions set
forth in Replacement of Parts and Warranty and Service Exclusions below.
Repairs, replacements or exchanges of instruments or components
provided during the warranty or any additional service period, will not
extend the warranty or service period beyond the initially agreed upon
period.
When the customer calls for service, the Siemens representative or
authorized distributor will inform the customer of the type of service
available for the customer’s instrument, and will instruct the customer as
to how to obtain that service.
Warranty Period
The limited warranty period generally commences upon installation of the
original instrument at the customer’s location and extends for a period of
one year thereafter, unless otherwise specifically agreed to by and
between Siemens (or its authorized distributors) and customer in a writing
signed by duly authorized representatives of both parties (sales
representatives are generally not authorized representatives of Siemens for
these purposes).
Additional Service Period

The customers, with some exceptions, may purchase additional service
coverage beyond any initial warranty period as part of the original
instrument acquisition for second or subsequent years beyond the original
installation date. The customer’s original Purchase Invoice or appropriate
Agreement Addendum must indicate the term in months for additional
service coverage.

Service During Normal Hours

The customer may obtain service for instruments during normal business
hours by contacting the nearest Siemens location or authorized distributor.
Extent of a Service Call

Warranty or service calls generally include on-site repair or exchange of
instruments or components, travel to the location of the instrument, and
on-site labor during normal business hours. A warranty or service call is
initiated by the customer by following the instructions on how to obtain
service for the customer’s instrument. The service call is considered
complete when any defects in material or workmanship have been
corrected by repair or replacement and the instrument conforms to the
applicable specifications. When service is complete, the customer will
receive a copy of the documentation detailing all work performed by the
Siemens representative or authorized distributor.
Service Outside Normal Hours

Customers, with some exceptions, may also request service to be delivered
or an exchange to be initiated outside normal business hours, including
evenings, weekend days, or nationally observed holidays, by contacting
the nearest Siemens location or authorized distributor. Service performed
outside normal hours is subject to a surcharge unless the customer has in
place a service product option that provides service at the time requested.
Replacement of Parts
In performing service, Siemens or its authorized distributors will provide
appropriate parts to repair the instrument, or will arrange for the exchange
of the instrument or affected parts, at no charge with the exception of
certain parts or subassemblies that are considered Customer Maintenance
Items. Customer Maintenance Items include, but are not limited to, the
following items: lamps, electrodes or sensors (which are covered by a
separate warranty), reagents, calibrators, controls, paper, and pens.
Consult the appropriate system operator’s manuals for a complete list of
Customer Maintenance Items for any specific model of instrument.

Design Changes and Retrofitting of Instruments

Siemens reserves the right to change the design or construction of specific
models of instruments at any time without incurring any obligation to
make such changes available to individual customers or instruments. If
Siemens notifies customers of a change that improves the performance or
reliability of their instrument, and requests to retrofit that instrument, the
customer must agree to allow Siemens or an authorized distributor, at
Siemens’ expense, to retrofit components or make design changes, which
will not adversely affect the instrument’s performance characteristics.
Key Operator Designation

Each customer will designate a key operator who will be available to
Siemens representatives to describe instrument malfunctions by telephone
and/or to perform simple adjustments and corrections as requested. If a
key operator is not designated or is unavailable when the customer
requests service, the delivery of service may be delayed.
OSHA Requirements (US only)

When service is required at a customer location, the customer must
provide the Siemens representative with adequate facilities that comply
with the regulations of the Secretary of Labor under the Occupational
Safety and Health Act (OSHA) of 1970, as amended.
Warranty and Service Exclusions

The following exclusions are in addition to any exclusions provided for in
any written warranty or service agreement.
IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVENTS OCCUR, THE WARRANTY OR SERVICE
PROVISIONS DO NOT APPLY:
• Repairs or modifications have been made to the instrument by
someone other than an authorized Siemens representative.
• The instrument has been operated using accessories and supplies other
than Siemens brand accessories, or consumable supplies and/or
reagents not having the same grade, quality, and composition as
defined in the system operator’s manuals.
• Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics has notified customers of a change
that improves the performance or reliability of their instrument and
customer has not agreed to retrofit or make design changes to the
instrument.
• Customer did not purchase the instrument from
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics or one of its authorized distributors.

• The instrument has not been installed within 90 days of shipment to

the customer’s facility unless otherwise specified.
• The customer has not performed appropriate customer maintenance
procedures, as outlined in the system operator’s manuals.
• The instrument has been misused or used for a purpose for which it
was not intended.
• The instrument has been damaged in transit to the customer or
damaged by the customer while moving or relocating it without
supervision by a Siemens representative.
• Damage was caused by floods, earthquakes, tornadoes, hurricanes, or
other natural or man-made disasters.
• Damage was caused by Acts of War, vandalism, sabotage, arson, or civil
commotion.
• Damage was caused by electrical surges or voltages exceeding the
tolerances outlined in the system operator’s manuals.
• Damage was caused by water from any source external to the
instrument.
• The customer has purchased an alternative agreement whose terms of
warranty or service supersede these provisions.
Siemens or its authorized distributors will invoice customers, at current
standard labor and parts rates, for instruments repaired to correct damage
or malfunctions due to any of the reasons listed above.
Other than as stated above, there are no other warranties, express or
implied WITH RESPECT TO THE INSTRUMENT, ITS SALE TO THE CUSTOMER,
ITS LEASE TO THE CUSTOMER, OR THE sale OF THE INSTRUMENT to the
customer at the expiration or termination of THE LEASE agreement.
Siemens specifically disclaims any and all implied warranties of
merchantability OR fitness for a particular Use or purpose. Siemens liability
for breach of any warranty or service agreement shall be limited only to the
repair or replacement of defective equipment and shall not include any
damages of any kind, whether direct, indirect, incidental, contingent, or
consequential. Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics shall not be liable for delay
FROM ANY CAUSE in providing repair OR EXCHANGE service.
ANY LIMITATIONS OR OTHER PROVISIONS NOT CONSISTENT WITH
APPLICABLE LAW IN PARTICULAR JURISDICTIONS OR A SPECIFIC WRITTEN
AGREEMENT DO NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMERS IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS OR
SUBJECT TO THOSE AGREEMENTS.

Orderable Supplies
Appendix C: Orderable Supplies
Use this list to order supplies for the system.
Part Number Description

040-0003-01 Sample Tube Conveyor (Puck), 25 Pack
040-0598-01 Sample Tray Cover, 5 Pack
040-0002-02 Sample Tray, 5 Pack
040-0877-01 O-Ring Assy, Blk Interface Merge, 20 Pack
040-0011-04 Puck Rotator Assy, Divert Gate
040-B063-01 Divert Gate Conveyor
040-B064-03 Interface Gate Conveyor
040-0826-01 Guard, Track, 180 Degree
040-0827-01 Guard, Divert Gate
040-0828-01 Guard, Interface Gate
040-0829-01 Guard, 1 Meter
040-0319-01 O-Ring Repair Kit Coalescing Filter Air Prep
Unit Utilities Cabinet
040-0320-01 O-Ring and Drain Repair Kit Roughing Filter
Air Prep Unit Utilities Cabinet
040-0502-01 O-Ring Puck Small Dimension (.595 x .063)
Inches Material 70EP
040-0503-01 O-Ring Puck Large
040-B117-02 Tool Puck Assembly/Disassembly
040-B118-02 Assembly Mandrel Puck Tool
040-0207-01 Oil, Compressor, 1 liter size Utilities
Cabinet
040-K049-01 Waste Oil Collection Container Kit

Orderable Supplies

Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
ADVIA LabCell System

All of the following components are available for the system, but may not
be required by your installation. Integration of these components depends
upon the requirements of your system configuration.
System Available Components
ADVIA LabCell Utilities Cabinet
2-meter conveyor section
Conveyor end section
1-meter conveyor section with utility
connections
Controlling computer and software
Divert and interface gate pairs, maximum 16
pairs
Sample Manager
SIQ Gate
Sample Sorter/Rack Loader module
Universal Robotic Interface
Direct from Sample Tube Sampling
Connection to connect systems like the
ADVIA Centaur and ADVIA Chemistry Rack-
Building Robot to connect from 2 to 4
ADVIA Hematology systems
IMMULITE
Dimension RxL
ADVIA WorkCell CDX
Decapper
90° angle conveyor section
InstrumentName Operator’s Guide 329

Specifications
Conveyor
Component Power Requirement
Per each 2-meter 2.2 amps @ 220 volts
conveyor section for side
track drive motors and
gate power
Per each 2-meter 50 amps @ 220 volts
conveyor utility section for
instruments and modules
ADVIA WorkCell CDX

All of the following components are available for the system, but may not
be required by your installation. Integration of these components depends
upon the requirements of your system configuration.
System Available Components
ADVIA WorkCell CDX 2-meter conveyor section
Conveyor end section
Sample Manager
Controlling computer and software
SIQ Gate
Direct from Sample Tube Sampling Connection
to connect the ADVIA Centaur and
ADVIA Chemistry systems)
IMMULITE
ADVIA WorkCell CDX
Decapper
ADVIA CentraLink system
Air compressor
330 InstrumentName Operator’s Guide

Specifications
Sample Tubes
ADVIA Automation Solutions systems can process various sample tube
styles and sizes. Supported tubes for specific instruments and modules
may have different requirements. For more information about specific
sample tube requirements, see the Interface Operating Instructions for the
specific instrument or module.
Criteria Requirements
Diameters 11.5 mm to 16.2 mm
Height 75 mm to 100 mm (without cap)
75 mm to 130 mm (with cap)
Diameter 11.55 mm to 16.2 mm
Cap types Hemoguard
Classic Vacutainer / Stopper
Sarstedt
Screw Cap
No Cap
Bottoms Note Round
Flat and False bottom tubes are not
currently supported.
Composition Glass or plastic
Note You cannot use glass sample tubes in
the Centrifuge Module.
Sample Tray and Cover Dimensions

The following tables provide the requirements and dimensions of the
sample tray, the sample tray cover, and the sample tray with the cover on.

Specifications
Sample Tray Cover Criteria

Criteria Requirements
Stacking guides on top of 10 mm high
tray
Single covered tray clearance height of 142.5 mm (5.6 inches)
2 covered trays clearance height of 275 mm (10.8 inches)
Sample Tray Dimensions

(without cover)
Width 347.5 mm 13.7 inches
Depth 297.7 mm 11.7 inches
Height 58.5 mm 2.3 inches
Sample Tray Cover Dimensions

Width 354 mm 13.9 inches
Height 94 mm 3.7 inches
Sample Tray with Cover On

Dimensions
Width 354 mm 13.9 inches
Height 142.5 mm 5.6 inches
Barcode on Sample Tube

The following table contains a list of maximum characters allowed for each
code and sample tube type:
Code Sample Maximum

Tube Type Characters
Code 128 auto 75-mm 9 digits
100-mm 17 digits
Code 39 full ASCII with check digit 75-mm 5 digits

Specifications
Code Sample Maximum

Tube Type Characters
100-mm 9 digits
Code Interleaved 2 of 5 with auto 75-mm 10 digits
check digit
100-mm 20 digits
Code Codabar auto check digit 75-mm 6 digits
100-mm 13 digits
Barcode Reader Assemblies in the Divert and Interface

Gates
Wavelength 670 nm
Pulse Duration 111 µs
Barcode Reader Assemblies Above the Sample

Manager Drawers
Wavelength 650 nm
Pulse Duration CW
Field Field Required Direction Value

Name
M1 Record Type Y Outgoing
Barcode Guidelines
Before selecting a barcode format for use with your ADVIA LabCell or
ADVIA WorkCell CDX system, a number of factors need to be carefully
considered. A smooth transition to an automated environment can only be
made with barcodes that function correctly 100 percent of the time. A
barcode that functions correctly with your current instruments, however,
may not be the best choice for your automation system.

Specifications
During the early stages of planning for your automation system

installation, consult your technical support provider or distributor to
determine the correct barcode for use with your automation system.
Changing to a different barcode format may be required. Use the following
guidelines when reviewing or selecting a barcode format for use with your
automation system:
• For highest reliability, keep the number of characters per barcode to a
minimum. If you are using the barcode for data or date coding,
determine if you can capture the same information through some
other means.
• Never use human readable characters in or beyond the quiet zone of
the barcode label.
• Ensure that the barcode symbology is less than 25.4 mm (1 inch) in
length.
• A maximum of 20 characters is allowed. Depending on the selected
symbology and the sample tube/cap combination, this maximum
number of characters may only fit on 100-mm sample tubes and is only
possible with some code sets. Refer to Barcode on Sample Tube‚ page
332 for a list of maximum characters allowed for each code and sample
tube type.
• Define the contents of the barcode based on the dimensions of the
shortest sample tube to be used on the automation system (75 mm is
the shortest sample tube allowed with automation systems). All labels
should utilize the same barcode content.
• Use barcode labels that adhere securely to the sample tubes used in the
laboratory. Labels that lift off the sample tube under normal laboratory
temperature and humidity conditions (including refrigeration and re-
warming to room temperature) will adversely affect robot operation
and could result in dropped or damaged sample tubes.
• Use barcode labels that do not need to wrap around the bottom of the
sample tube or make contact with the puck springs.
• Use capped sample tubes when determining the usability of barcode
labels and barcode length.

Specifications
Barcode Symbology
In order of recommendation and reliability, the barcode symbologies
supported by ADVIA LabCell or ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems are listed.
Code Description
Code 128 Whenever possible, use Code 128c, which includes
a built-in check digit and is a proven robust
symbology. In addition, Code 128 contains
compression features that allow numerical data to
be encoded in a smaller barcode symbol.
Code 39 If you cannot use Code 128, use Code 39, which
supports check digits when the automation system
barcode readers are programmed appropriately.
Barcode labels with and without check digits
cannot be supported simultaneously. The barcode
reader must be programmed to support the format
with or without check digits by your technical
support provider or distributor. Use Code 39 Full
ASCII (which supports both alpha and numeric
characters) MOD 43 check digit with auto ratio.
Interleaved (I2/5) If you cannot use either Code 128 or Code 39, use
the Interleaved (I2/5) symbology. Set the code set
to “Auto” and the check digit to “MOD 10.”
Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology must be used with a
check digit. This code set does not support the use
of alpha characters and must always be used with
a check digit.
Codabar If possible, do not use Codabar symbology with
ADVIA LabCell or ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems.
Our research indicates that this symbology
produces an unacceptable level of unread barcode
labels, which requires frequent operator
intervention to manage sample tubes rejected due
to misreads. If, however, the laboratory must use
Codabar symbology, set the code set to “Auto.”
The Codabar symbology only supports the use of
numeric characters.
Note Specifications for all barcode symbologies are available at nominal

cost from the Automatic Identification Manufacturers Inc., 634 Alpha
Drive, Pittsburgh, PA 15238-2802.

Specifications
Barcode Requirements
Minimum X Element Width
ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems include barcode readers
capable of reading barcode labels with an X element width as small as
0.25 mm (~ 0.010 inch) – the X element being the nominal width of the
narrowest bars and spaces in a barcode symbol. For most thermal barcode
label printers in use today, the minimum X element width is 0.25 mm
(0.01 inch) and rarely exceeds 0.50 mm (0.02 inch). When selecting a
barcode label format, however, always use the largest X element width
available. The barcode X element width (both the bar and the space)
should not be smaller than 0.25 mm (.01 inch). Some barcode printer
drivers are inaccurate with respect to sizing the minimum X element.
Therefore, after printing test labels, the minimum X element should be
physically measured with an optical device or with a barcode analysis
device.
Maximum X Element Width

The maximum size of the X element is usually not an issue when using the
barcode readers that are supplied with your system. However, the size of
the label and the data content of the barcode may limit the size of the X
element. In most barcode symbology, the maximum element rarely
exceeds 4 times the minimum element width. This is well within the
reading ability of the barcode readers that are supplied with automation
systems. The maximum width of a barcode element, however, will have an
impact on the quiet zone requirement. As the maximum element
increases, the quiet zone will also need to be increased.
Space Width
For the highest quality label, the space width – i.e., the white areas
between bar elements – must match the proportions and ratios of the dark
elements or bars. Do not manipulate the ratios of the bars, which some
barcode generation software allows.
Optical Specifications
The barcode readers that are supplied with ADVIA LabCell and
ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems operate in the visible light spectrum at a
wavelength of approximately 670 nanometers (red light).

Specifications
Symbology Specifications
Barcodes must conform to the specific AIM Uniform Barcode specification
for the symbology used. This specification defines all barcode parameters,
including the use and calculation of check digits.
Barcode Label Requirements

Minimum Acceptable Print Contrast Signal
The print contrast signal on barcode labels should be equal to or greater
than 75%.
Quiet Zones
Barcode label quiet zones – i.e., clear spaces that contain no dark marks or
characters – must be free of any printing and must be at least 10 times the
bar width adjacent to the quiet zones of the label. For all code types,
5.1 mm (0.20 inch) is recommended.
Symbol Width
The symbol should be at least 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) wide, or a minimum of
15 percent of the symbol length. The barcode symbol should always be
made as wide as possible.
Barcode Printing Quality

The minimum acceptable symbol grade for ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA
WorkCell CDX systems is Grade B. The ANSI specification Barcode Print
Quality Guideline ANSI INCITS 182-1990 (R2000) (formerly ANSI X3.182-
1990), or the latest released version of that document, defines the printing
quality of barcode labels. This specification defines the parameters used to
determine whether a printed label is acceptable.
Printers
The barcode readers are only 1 part of your barcode identification system.
The barcode printer and the associated label stock are equally important.
Usually, on-site barcode label generation is accomplished using dedicated
barcode printers, which are specifically manufactured for this purpose. All
printer maintenance schedules must be followed. Make sure that any
change in label stock is compatible with both printer and reader
requirements. Contact the printer service representative or manufacturer if
the compatibility of label stock is in question.
Almost all barcode printers use either direct thermal or thermal transfer
technologies. When using these printers:

Specifications
• Make sure the heat control is properly set for the label stock being
used.
• Follow and perform thermal-head-cleaning maintenance procedures.
If you use a direct thermal printer, make sure that the thermal label stock is
properly stored and protected from direct exposure to ambient room light
or sunlight. Exposure of thermal label stock to any form of light for
prolonged periods will cause stock discoloration and result in a decrease in
barcode print contrast signal.
If you use a thermal transfer printer, use a high-quality, risen-type heat
transfer ribbon. This will produce a barcode label that can be handled and
inserted in sample racks without the barcode symbol smearing.
The use of barcode software with personal computers to print labels on
laser jet or ink jet printers is not recommended. While this method of label
generation is nearly equal to dedicated barcode label printers, application
of the label to a sample tube or touching the label may damage the print
quality and readability of the barcode.
Do not use dot matrix printers for barcode label printing. These printers do
not provide uniform bar elements with good edge formation. This can be
extremely important when higher density symbols with smaller X element
sizes are required. In addition, as the printer ribbon begins to wear out, the
barcode symbol contrast will decline, which can cause read failure or
substitution errors.
Ensure that the barcode labels are compliant with both the AIM symbology
specification and with the ANSI barcode print quality specification. These
specifications are used in the selection and qualification of system barcode
readers, and cannot guarantee high reliability performance with labels that
do not conform to these specifications.
Note The Barcode Print Quality Guideline is available at nominal cost from
the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York,
New York, 10018; (www.aimusa.org). Also for Code 128 Symbology
Specification see ISO/IEC 15417.
Printer Requirements
• Always use the lowest density or maximum X element possible.
• Always make sure the quiet zones are the proper size and free from
writing or marks.
• Always make sure that label stock matches the printing method
(thermal, thermal transfer) and will provide a print contrast signal of
75% or greater.

Specifications
• If you are using a thermal transfer printer, choose a high-quality,

smear-resistant ribbon to ensure that sample tubes can be handled
without smearing the barcode symbol.
• Never write over the barcode symbol with a pen.
• Always make sure that the barcode density matches the reader
requirements. A reader having 0.25 mm resolution may completely fail
to read barcodes with 0.20-mm elements or will generate a large
number of no-read events. ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA WorkCell CDX
systems will only support a minimum density of 0.25 mm (.01 inch).
Label Placement
Placing Barcode Labels on Sample Tubes
A critical element for ensuring successful barcode reading is the correct
placement of the barcode label onto the sample tube. The placement of
the label must take into consideration the space on the sample tube used
by the puck, the space taken by the cap on the sample tube, and the
sample tube detector.
• The sample puck takes up 25.4 mm (1 inch) of usable read space at the
bottom of the sample tube. This space is used equally on 75-mm and
100-mm sample tubes. The minimum label bottom quiet zone must
start from 25.4 mm (1 inch) from the bottom of the sample tube to at
least 5.1 mm (0.20 inch) or above the line of site from the top of the
puck.
Figure D-1: Minimum Label Bottom Quiet Zone

Specifications
Note Barcode labels should adhere securely to sample tubes and should
not be wrinkled. Labels that peel off the tube under normal laboratory
temperature and humidity conditions (including refrigeration and re-
warming to room temperature) will adversely affect robot operation and
could result in dropped or damaged tubes.
Note If barcode labels do not adhere securely, the glue on the barcode
label may be incompatible with sample tube material. Contact your
barcode vendor to ensure that labels are compatible with sample tubes.
Figure D-2: Improperly Adhering Label
• The sample tube detector is a visible sensor on the divert and interface
gates that detects the presence of a sample tube. Glass and plastic
sample tubes without a label in the sample tube detector beam do not
always reflect enough light back to the sensor for reliable detection.
The detection of the sample tubes is greatly improved if the label is
present at the point where the sample tube detector beam shines. This
point is 51 mm (~ 2 inch) from the bottom of the sample tube.
Therefore, it is important that some part of the label be placed in this
area. This is especially true with 100-mm sample tubes, where the label
should not be placed too high at the top of the sample tube.

Specifications
Figure D-3: Tube Detector Beam
Not Recommended Recommended
The following table and figures specify label positioning for the sample
tubes with Hemoguard or rubber stopper caps.
Cap Status Tube Cap Type Top of Label Position

Size
Capped 75 mm Hemoguard At least 1.0 mm below
bottom of the cap.
75 mm Rubber stopper At least 3 mm below
bottom of the cap.
Note A cap on a 75-mm tube lessens the
space available for proper label placement.
A hemoguard cap takes away the most
usable space oat 15 mm (0.6 inches).
Always place the label on a 75-mm tube
directly below the bottom of the cap.
100 mm Hemoguard At least 3 mm below
bottom of the cap.
100 mm Rubber stopper At least 3 mm below
bottom of the cap.

Specifications
Cap Status Tube Cap Type Top of Label Position

Size
Uncapped 75 mm At least 3 mm from top of
sample tube.
100 mm At least 15 mm from top
of sample tube.
Note The barcode label can be aligned with the manufacturer’s label,
which is typically a minimum of 3 mm from the cap.
Figure D-4: Label Positions for Capped 75 mm Sample Tubes
Capped 75-mm Sample Tube with Capped 75-mm Sample Tube with
Hemoguard Cap Rubber Stopper

Specifications
Figure D-5: Label Positions for Capped 100-mm Sample Tubes
Capped 100-mm Sample Tube with Capped 100-mm Sample Tube with
Hemoguard Cap Rubber Stopper
Note The top of a label should be aligned with the top of the
manufacturer’s label.

Specifications
Figure D-6: Label Positions for Uncapped Sample Tubes
Uncapped or Generic Pour Off Uncapped Generic Pour Off 75-mm

100-mm Sample Tube Sample Tube
Note You can use the width of a 16-mm sample tube to approximate a
measurement of 15 mm.
Maximum Usable Barcode Space

Note Do not allow the bottom edge of the label to go inside the puck.
The following illustration shows the maximum usable barcode space for 2
sample tube sizes used on ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems.
For a 100-mm tube, the maximum available space for barcode characters is
44 mm (1.75 inch). This includes two 5.1-mm (0.20-inch) quiet zones at
the top and bottom of the label. There should be 3 mm between the
bottom of the cap and the top of the label.
For a 75-mm tube, the maximum available space for barcode characters is
25.4 mm (1 inch). This includes two 5.1 mm (0.20 inch) quiet zones at the
top and bottom of the label.
Note Do not allow the bottom edge of the label to go inside the puck.

Specifications
Figure D-7: Maximum Usable Barcode Space with Tubes in Pucks
100-mm Sample Tube in Puck 75-mm Sample Tube in Puck
Barcode Terms
AIM
AIM (Automatic Identification Manufacturers, Inc.) is a trade organization
that has generated a series of uniform specifications for each of the major
barcode symbologies currently in use. AIM specifications are intended to
be substantially identical to the corresponding Commission for European
Normalization (CEN) specifications. All supported barcodes also have a
corresponding AIM specification, which is accepted as the industry
standard for that symbology.
ANSI
The ANSI (American National Standards Institute) specification Barcode
Print Quality Guideline is used to define the required quality of barcode
printing.
Barcode Density
Barcode density is the number of data characters that can be represented
in a linear unit of measure. Barcode density is generally expressed as the
number of characters per millimeter, or the number of characters per inch.

Specifications
Check Digit
A check digit is a character used to perform a mathematical check to
ensure the accuracy of the data decoded from the barcode symbol. Check
digits usually do not appear in the human-readable field of the label and
are automatically stripped from the decoded data string by the barcode
reader. If used, a check character is automatically computed and included
within the barcode symbol when it is printed. The automation system
barcode readers can be programmed either for use with labels that contain
check digits or programmed for labels that do not contain check digits. The
automation system, however, cannot support labels with and without
check digits at the same time.
Human-Readable Field
The human-readable field contains the alphanumeric translation of data
encoded in the barcode symbol. It is usually located above or below the
barcode symbol.
Print Contrast Signal

The print contrast signal is a measurement of the reflectivity between the
bars and spaces of a barcode symbol that is commonly expressed as a
percent value. The print contrast signal is calculated with the following
formula:
RL  RD
 100%
Print Contrast Signal = RL
RL = reflectivity of the light elements.
RD = reflectivity of the dark elements.
Typically, this is measured using a barcode-verifier instrument. It is 1 of
many barcode parameters used to define print quality of barcode symbols.
The minimum accepted value for this parameter is 75 percent.
Quiet Zones
Quiet zones are clear spaces that contain no dark marks or characters. They
precede the start character of a barcode symbol and follow the stop
character. Label quiet zones must be free of any printing and must be at
least 10 times the width of the bar adjacent to the quiet zone. The quiet
zone must be a minimum of 5.1 mm (0.20 inches).

Specifications
Short Read Error

This type of error most commonly occurs when using I2of5 barcode labels,
but is also possible with the Codabar symbology. A number of conditions
are necessary to produce a short read error, the most important of which is
a barcode label that is skewed when mounted on a sample tube.
When the label is skewed, the reader beam hits only part of the label that
can result in a partial decoding of the label under certain circumstances.
Short read errors are 1 reason you should use check digits with I2of5 and
Codabar labels.
Start/Stop Characters
Start/Stop characters are patterns at the beginning and end of a barcode
symbol that are unique to each barcode symbology.
X Element
The X element is the nominal width of the narrowest bars and spaces in a
barcode symbol. This dimension is generally expressed in mm or mils
(thousandths of an inch). A 0.25-mm X element has a printed width of
approximately 10 mils (0.010 inch).

Specifications

Symbols
Appendix E: Symbols
This section describes the symbols that can appear on the exterior of the
automation system or on the system packaging. The symbols on the
system provide you with the location of certain components and with
warnings for proper operation. The symbols on the system packaging
provide you with other important information. For information on the
symbols that can display on the automation reagent packaging and
labelling, see the related assay instruction for use.
Symbol Description
This symbol is used for both Warnings and Cautions.
• A Warning indicates the risk of personal injury or
loss of life if operating procedures and practices
are not correctly followed.
• A Caution indicates the possibility of loss of data
or damage to or destruction of equipment if
operating procedures and practices are not
strictly observed.
This symbol alerts you to a biohazard.
This symbol alerts you to the risk of exposure to lasers.
This symbol alerts you to a potential electrical hazard.
This symbol indicates a moving component that can

cause injury.
This symbol indicates a moving component that can

pinch and cause injury.
This symbol indicates that the input electricity is

alternating current.

Symbols
Symbol Description
This symbol identifies the location of a protective
earth (GND) conductor terminal.
This symbol identifies the location of a fuse.
This symbol identifies the location of a power

connector.
This symbol identifies the location of a computer

connection.
This symbol indicates that this equipment is classified

as Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment under
the European WEEE Directive. It must be recycled or
disposed of in accordance with applicable local
requirements.
This symbol indicates the main power switch.
This symbol indicates that the main power supply is

on.
This symbol indicates that the main power supply is

off.
This symbol indicates that the product has a

temperature limitation. In this example, you need to
store the product at 2° to 8 ° C.
This symbol indicates that you should consult
instructions for use.
This symbol indicates that the product is fragile and

you need to handle it with care.

Symbols
Symbol Description
This symbol indicates that you should keep the
product dry.
This symbol indicates the number used for ordering a

part or product.
This symbol indicates the serial number of a part or
product.
This symbol indicates the revision letter of a part or
product.
This symbol indicates the name and location of the
product manufacturer.
This symbol indicates the date of manufacture of the

product.
This symbol indicates the manufacturer’s authorized

representative within the European community.
This symbol indicates that the product or container

should be oriented in the direction of the arrows.
This symbol indicates not to use the product if the

package is damaged.
This symbol is intended to encourage recycling.
This symbol is intended to facilitate recycling of

corrugated materials. The number is licensed in
Germany and printed on corrugated shippers.
This symbol indicates that the package is printed with

soy ink.

Symbols
Symbol Description
This symbol indicates that the product complies with
the applicable directives of the European Union.
This symbol indicates that the product was IEC 61010-

01 safety tested by TUV for conformity to global
markets including Canada, US, and EU.
The following laser safety labels display on the exterior of the

ADVIA Automation system.
Label Description
This label indicates that the
product is a Class 2 laser
product, with potential
exposure to a laser beam.

system is a Class 1 laser
product.
product complies to the
appropriate regulations.
This label indicates the position

of the laser beam.

Glossary
Appendix F: Glossary
Contains a list of terms used for and on the system.
A
ADVIA Hematology A hematology system used in ADVIA LabCell systems.
ADVIA Chemistry A chemistry system used in ADVIA Automation Solutions.
ADVIA A product line of automated systems, including the
automation ADVIA LabCell and ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems. Each
system within this product line is comprised of modular
components that can be configured to create laboratory
automation solutions for sample tube management. The
term “ADVIA automation” applies to information and
technology related to both ADVIA LabCell and
ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems.
ADVIA Centaur An immunoassay system used in ADVIA Automation
Solutions.
ADVIA CentraLink A data management software that manages the results
and QC for each analyzer, and provides a connection to
the facility’s laboratory information system (LIS). The
ADVIA CentraLink system provides a single point of use
for the result data that is generated by all the analyzers
connected to ADVIA Automation Solutions.
ADVIA LabCell A system of modular components that can be variably
configured to create custom, open laboratory
automation solutions for sample tube management.
ADVIA LabCell systems can accommodate up to 16
interface stations.
ADVIA WorkCell CDX A system of modular components limited to 3 fixed
configurations supporting up to a total of 5 interface
stations – 4 for analyzers and 1 for the Sample Manager.
Connected analyzers will be limited to the
ADVIA Chemistry system and the ADVIA Centaur system
and their successors.
Air Prep Unit An input module for air coming in from a compressor or
house air. It provides regulation, filtration, and air
pressure monitor output signals to the computer.

Glossary
Analyze The act of testing a sample.

Analyzer A connected system, such as the ADVIA 120/2120,
ADVIA 1650, or ADVIA Centaur, that analyzes samples.
These analyzers can also be used as standalone systems.
Aspirate The act of drawing fluid from a sample tube.
Available Tray A tray that is defined in the Sample Manager software,
has a physical tray in the Sample Manager, and the tray
has empty positions.
B
Barcode A code consisting of lines of varying widths that can be
read optically with a scanning device.
Barcode Reader An optical character reader that can read data
represented by bar codes and translate the codes into
digital signals.
Buffer A holding area on the ADVIA Hematology system for
samples as they are moved from the analyzer or rack to
the interface gate.
Buffer Tray An unload tray or zone in a MultiZone Sort tray for
samples that were checked-in when the number of
samples routing to a specific instrument exceeds the
maximum number of samples allowed to be In-Route to
that instrument. Samples are auto retrieved from the
buffer tray when the In-Route count is below the
maximum threshold.
C
Centrifuge module A module used in ADVIA LabCell systems designed to
separate serum or plasma from blood cells.
Change Order An event that changes a test for a sample. A change
order includes tests that are rerun, added, deleted, or
cancelled.
Change Order Message A message recorded by the Router when a sample’s route
is changed. This message can only come from the host
LIS system, and may be used to add or remove scheduled
tests for a sample.
Check-in Message A message recorded by the Router when a sample is
introduced into the system.

Glossary
CLINITEK Atlas A urine chemistry analyzer used in ADVIA LabCell

systems.
Coalescing Filter A .1-micron air filter contained in the air prep unit.
Cold Storage A refrigerated area designated for storing completed
samples. Samples are assigned by the operator to pre-
defined cold storage locations within 1 or more
refrigerators on a particular door and shelf.
Control Screen A LineMaster screen that allows the operator to bring
systems online, take systems offline, and shut systems
down.
Conveyor The backbone of ADVIA Automation Solutions. The upper
section of the conveyor transports the sample tubes
through the system while the lower section distributes
Ethernet and Profibus communication to the connected
analyzers and modules. Additionally, the lower section
provides utilities to distribute compressed air, AC power,
DI water, city water, and provides a system waste drain.
ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems do not provide the
connections for AC power, DI water, city water, or a
system waste drain.
D
Decapper interface Removes caps from sample tubes
module
Demographics Data A message used by the Router to show the name, date of
Message birth, and patient ID related to a sample. This message is
used only by the order server on the Router as part of an
incoming sample order from the host LIS.
DI Water Deionized water, containing no ions or charged particles,
used in the testing processes.
Divert Gate A device on the main track of the conveyor that moves
sample tubes from the main track onto a side track. A
barcode reader scans the sample tube’s barcode label,
and based on information received from the host LIS, the
sample is either diverted onto the side track or continues
on to the next gate.
Divert Gate Puck Rotator A mechanism on the conveyor across from the divert
gate that rotates pucks with sample tubes so the barcode
can be read.

Glossary
Drawer A sliding compartment in the Sample Manager where the

sample trays are placed.
Drive End The end of the conveyor containing the drive unit.
Drive Unit The motor and gear box that provide motion for the
conveyor.
Duplicate Sample A sample introduced into the system that already has a
Sample ID in the routing tables. A duplicate sample
contains a barcode that has already been checked into
the system, and has a set route that is incomplete. A
sample with the same barcode is checked into the system
before the first sample has completed its route.
Duplicate Tray An unload tray or zone in a MultiZone Sort tray for
samples with the same Sample ID (barcode) as a sample
currently checked into the system.
E
E-stop Pull Cord An emergency stop pull-cord that runs along both sides
of the conveyor. If the emergency stop system is
activated, both the main track and side tracks of the
conveyor stop, but individual robots and analyzers
continue to operate.
E-stop Button An emergency stop button located on the robot modules
that immediately stops all motion by the robot on that
module. A second E-stop button is mounted to 1 of the
small cabinet doors of the Utilities Cabinet. Pressing the
Utilities Cabinet E-stop has the same effect as pulling the
E-stop pull cord.
End-of-Line An action or activity that serves as a destination route to
a tray or manual station. End of Line cannot be an
instrument.
Ethernet A high-speed local area network using 10 base-T RJ45
wire, broadcast transmission, and variable time delays in
the event of a collision.
Event Log A LineMaster screen that displays and archives system
event messages.

Glossary
Expired Tray ADVIA Automation Solutions automatically classify a tray

“expired” after 7 days. Trays designated as “not expired”
are not allowed in the Sample Manager input drawers.
Trays designated as “not expired” prompt an message on
the Sample Manager screen “set tray expired?”. The
operator may only use a tray that has been used in the
past 7 days if this prompt is accepted.
F
G
Gate Divert gates and interface gates perform sample
handling on the conveyor by reading the sample barcode
and directing samples to instruments and modules
where further testing and processing are performed by
those systems.
Gate Control Button An on/off button located on top of the divert gate that
turns the station power to the programmable logic
controller (PLC), divert gate, and interface gate on and
off. Press the gate control button to turn the station off;
lift the button to turn the station on.
Gate Pair Control A module that controls a pair of divert and PLC. The PLC
Module communicates with the Router to determine divert and
interface gate tasks. An on-board power supply provides
power to the PLC and the gates.
Gate Spinner A mechanism designed to position the sample tube to
the proper orientation in order for sample tube to be
scanned by the barcode reader.
Global Test List A list of all laboratory tests that may be performed on or
off the automation system. The global test list is used by
the LIS, the instrument test lists, and the Sort tray to
determine the routing of samples.
Gripper A mechanism on each robot that grasps the sample tube.
Gripper Fingers The part of the gripper assembly that makes contact with
a sample tube or rack. These metal “fingers” are designed
differently from module to module to perform different
tasks.

Glossary
H
Hematology The branch of medical science that deals with the
diagnosis and treatment of disorders of the blood and
blood-forming tissues.
I
ID In the global test list, a unique numeric identifier
assigned to a sample for a specific test. The ID is a
shortened form of the test name that the laboratory uses
to identify a specific test.
Idler End The end of the conveyor opposite the drive end.
Immunoassay A clinical diagnostic methodology that uses an antibody-
antigen reaction to determine the presence or quantity
of a specific analyte. The method measures either an
antibody or an antigen.
In Route A term used by the Router software to indicate that a test
is scheduled in the automation system and has not yet
been processed by a connected analyzer or module.
Instrument Refers to an analyzer or module – excluding the robot
and other interface components – capable of conducting
medical tests or procedures on samples. In customer
documentation, the word "instrument" is used to refer to
any analyzer or module connected to the automation
system.
Instrument Test List A subset of the global test list that defines which tests are
performed by a specific analyzer or module connected to
the automation system, or where samples may be sorted
for tests performed outside the system.
Interface Computer A computer that builds an interface between the
LineMaster software (user interface) and an analyzer. An
interface computer controls signals and communication
data to and from the analyzer, similar to a robot
computer, which also controls an analyzer’s robotics.
Interface Gate A device on a side track, located directly in front of an
analyzer or module, that reads the sample barcode, then
selects and positions the sample so it can be processed
by a connected analyzer or module and returned to the
main track.

Glossary
Interface Gate Indexer A mechanism that moves pucks into and out of the
interface gate in 90-degree increments. Pucks are rotated
at 30-degree and 60-degree increments when a puck
with a sample tube is placed in the interface gate.
J
L
Light Tower Vertically stacked colored lights that indicate system
status information. The color of an illuminated light
indicates the operating status of a robot or gate.
Red indicates a serious error occurring at a station or on
the automation system. The conveyor, robots, and
analyzers and modules are stopped. The operator must
take corrective action on the system.
Yellow indicates that the conveyor continues to run but
an analyzer or module and its robotics are offline. The
operator must take corrective action at the analyzer or
module.
White indicates that the conveyor continues to run and
all connected analyzers and modules are online. The
operator should take corrective action at the analyzer or
module.
Green indicates that the conveyor is running.
LineMaster A PC-based system that provides operator interface and
control and sample management for the entire
automation system. It is the primary point of interaction
between the operator and the automation system. The
LineMaster server communicates with and controls the
active status of all instruments and components
connected to the system via an Ethernet connection. The
LineMaster reports and displays analytical instrument
events, sample tube status, and automation system
status, as well as operation manuals and help material.
LAS Laboratory Automation System. This also refers to the
type of connection or port that communicates between
an analyzer or module and the LineMaster.

Glossary
LIS Laboratory Information System. This also refers to the

port through which all sample tests are requested from
the laboratory or hospital computer system. The LIS port
on the automation system is an Ethernet connection to
the Router order server.
Load Tray A tray that contains samples ready to be tested.
Load Mixed Tray A load tray that contains mixed samples or types of
samples that may be placed in a load tray. These include
capped hematology samples, uncapped or capped serum
samples, urine, and other fluids. These samples are
presented into the Sample Manager in a random fashion
to optimize the efficiency of the automation system,
since samples are routed to all the analyzers and modules
on the line.
M
Main Track The main conveyor around which all sample tubes route
to instruments and modules. ADVIA Automation
Solutions systems contain a main track, which allows
samples to route to the various instruments and
modules, and side tracks, 2 per each 2-meter conveyor
section, which provide access to the instrument or
module interfaces.
Maximum Sample in The maximum number of samples that the system allows
Route Count to be in route to a specific station.
Module A connected system, such as the Sample Manager or
Centrifuge module, that does not analyze samples, but
performs sample management functions or other sample
procedures.
Motor Starter Control module for stopping and starting the conveyor
drive motor. The motor starter allows for manual
operation as well as computer controlled operation. AC
contactors and relays provide the necessary switching.
MultiZone Sort Tray An unload tray that can be subdivided into zones. Each
zone is 20 consecutive positions within 2 rows of the
tray. A zone can be designated as an unload tray, partial
processed tray, sort tray, buffer tray, and SIQ tray.

Glossary
N
Name In the global test list, the name of a test. Although this
name can be any text string, it must be the same name
used by the LIS system. When the LIS systems downloads
the ID and name to the automation system, the ID and
name must be the same or the tests will not run.
Nest A holding area on the Universal Robot for samples as
they are moved from the analyzer or rack to the interface
gate when there is no empty puck waiting at the
interface gate place position.
Notes In the global test list, an free text field in which the
operator can enter information about the test.
O
Offline For non-robotic analyzers or modules, offline is the state
in which a station is paused and samples are not diverted
to the station’s analyzer or module.
For the Sample Manager or other robotic analyzers or
modules, offline is achieved after the analyzer or module
has checked all of its safety features and the robot has
homed. The Sample Manager must be offline before
samples can be loaded or unloaded, or before the robots
can be taught.
Omega Spur A looped section of conveyor used to connect the
CLINITEK Atlas interface module to the ADVIA LabCell
system.
Online The station is operational and samples are diverted to the
station’s interface gate, where they are either picked by
the robot and tested by the analyzer or directly aspirated
at the interface gate.
Order Server
Overview Screen The main screen of the LineMaster that displays the
configuration of the system.

Glossary
P
Partial Processed Tray A tray that contains samples that have been removed
from the conveyor, but still require additional testing by
analyzers or modules within the automation system.
Samples are placed in Partial Processed trays when an
analyzer or module required to complete 1 or more test
routes is in the offline or shutdown state, or when a Sort
tray is unavailable in the Sample Manager.
Pick The action of a robot to bring a sample from an interface
gate into a connected analyzer or module.
Pick List A list of samples that need to be manually returned to the
automation system by an operator for additional testing.
The pick list contains samples that were rerouted to other
stations while the sample was not on the system.
Pick Position The position on an interface gate, closest to the barcode
reader, at which a connected analyzer or module can lift
a sample or aspirate a portion of a sample. The interface
gate rotates to bring a sample to this position.
A sample is held at the pick position while the analyzer or
module directly aspirates from a sample tube. When the
analyzer or module has completed its aspiration, it gives
a command to the LAS that moves the sample out of the
pick position and moves the next sample into the pick
position.
PLC Programmable logic controller. An electronic component
used to store a sequence of actions and transmit these
actions to a gate pair control module. PLCs communicate
information between the Router and the gates.
Place The action of a robot to return a sample from a
connected analyzer or module to an interface gate.
Place Position The position at which a connected analyzer or module
can return a sample to an interface gate. After the
interface gate rotates an empty puck to this position, the
robot can place a sample tube into the puck.
Post_Test An action or activity assigned to a test that must route
and begin processing after the analytical test to which it
is assigned completes processing.

Glossary
Power Down Sequence The sequence of procedures required to shut down the
automation system, including all robots, gates, software,
and analyzers.
Power Up Sequence The sequence of procedures required to start up the
automation system, including all robots, gates, software,
and analyzers.
Pre-Test An action or activity assigned to a test that must route
and process to completion before the analytical test to
which it is assigned can begin processing.
Priority In the global test list, an integer field that allows the
operator to prioritize the importance of each test and
procedure. The operator manually enters this number
into the global test list.
The higher the priority number for a given test in relation
to other tests determines the routing sequence. If no
priority number for a particular test is given above
another test for any route, the first analyzer or module
encountered after check-in receives priority.
Profibus A high band width network that is used to exchange
information between the PLCs and gates and the Router
computer. Profibus is used for high-speed, time critical
data transmission. Barcode information and gate
communication and commands are transferred on this
bus.
Puck A carrier that holds a single sample tube as it moves on
the main track and side track of the conveyor.
Puck Rotator A mechanism in the divert gate that turns a puck and
sample to ensure that a barcode is in a position to be
read.
Q
Queue Samples in line on the side track for processing by an
analyzer or module. The queue typically holds up to
twenty samples. Fifteen extra positions in the queue are
reserved for STAT samples.
A queue is a sequence of samples in the interface
computer software routed to a particular analyzer or
module. This sequence should match the physical
sequence of sample tubes on the side track.

Glossary
R
RCC Robot Control Cabinet. This device is only found in the
Sample Manager and other analyzers and modules that
contain robots. It houses all the electronics control for
the robot, plus a PC that communicates to the
LineMaster.
Reschedule A sample that is currently checked-in and has a route
assigned. The sample is then marked for another check-
in request the next time that the sample passes the SIQ
divert gate.
Robot A mechanism that picks sample tubes or racks from 1
position and places them at another on the automation
system. Robots are flexible and move in 3 axis: x, theta,
and z. Each axis is controlled by an individual servo
motor.
There are 2 types of robots:
Interface robots that pick sample tubes from the
interface gate and transport them to the connected
analyzer or module.
Internal robots that move samples within a connected
analyzer or module.
Robot arm The mechanism that extends from the z post of a robot
assembly and contains a set of grippers at the end of the
arm. The robot arm contains a sample tube (or rack)
release button that allows the operator to open the
grippers.
Robot head The upper part of the robot assembly that connects data
and power cables to the motors, and connects an air line
to the grippers. Attached to the robot head is a z post
that supports the robot arm.
Roughing Filter A 5-micron air filter contained within the air prep unit.
Route Complete A message used by the Router to indicate that a sample
Message test has been diverted to an analyzer, module, or Sort
tray and has reached the pick position of the interface
gate. Both the LineMaster and Router reflect the routing
status for each test as it is processed by 1 or more
analyzers or modules.

Glossary
Router Software that routes samples to the appropriate

analyzers or modules by controlling the divert and
interface gates. The Router communicates with the LIS
and receives workorders with test selectivity and ID
information. The Router also determines, based on
system configuration inputs, the sequence of
instruments to which a sample is delivered, and balances
the workload between multiple analyzers that can
perform the same tests or procedures.
Router Stack Lights The vertically stacked colored lights on the Router’s main
screen. The color of a light indicates the operating status
of a gate or robot. On the screen, from top to bottom:
Red indicates that the PLC and gate are off, and no power
is being supplied to them. When this light is off (gray),
the gates have been homed and are ready to run.
Yellow indicates that the gate or robot has been offline
for more than the offline time stored in the database.
Any sample in route to this station will be redirected to
another station or to the Sample Manager’s Partial
Processed tray.
Green indicates that the station is online.
Blue indicates that the CLINITEK Atlas station is in manual
calibration mode.
S
Sample Transport The physical components that transport samples from
System (STS) the Sample Manager to the analyzers and modules, and
the accompanying software that manages the
automation system communications, and route, track,
and deliver each sample to the appropriate analyzer or
module.
Sample A sample tube filled with some media that needs to be or
has been sampled. Samples may include serum, whole
blood, plasma, cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), urine, and QC
materials. All sample tubes must include a uniquely
identified barcode label by which the automation system
can differentiate between patients and also between
different sample types from the same patients.

Glossary
Sample Manager A connected module that moves the sample tubes from
the trays to the conveyor for analysis, and then moves
the sample tubes from the conveyor to the trays when
analysis is complete.
All samples are processed into and out of the automation
system via the Sample Manager module. The Sample
Manager has 5 drawers. Each drawer has 2 bar-coded
trays that can each hold up to 100 samples, giving the
module a total capacity of 1,000 sample tubes. Each tray
may contain sample tube heights of 75–100 mm and
widths of 11.5–16.2 mm.
When new trays are placed in a Sample Manager drawer,
each tray is automatically scanned for the presence of
sample tubes by a sensor, and the tray barcode is read
and displayed on the LineMaster control screen. After the
drawer is closed, the Sample Manager can be
transitioned online.
Sample Tube A thin glass or plastic container that is closed at 1 end
and is used to contain a sample. Single sample tubes are
transported by the conveyor in a puck on the surface of
the track. Each sample tube must be labeled with a
unique barcode.
Sample Query and Pick A System screen function on LineMaster that provides
List tracking information for samples that are being
processed. It provides the operator with a method of
searching the system for specific samples and a report
that indicates the sample storage location.
The pick list can be printed, allowing the operator to
identify and retrieve samples physically at the cold
storage area.
Secondary ID A second identifier used by some laboratory information
systems to identify a patient. This free-text field allows a
maximum ASCII string of twenty characters. It can
contain a daily sample tube sequence number, or any
other identifier designed to make searching for a sample
more efficient.

Glossary
Shutdown The state in which a robot or analyzer stops placing and

picking samples to and from the conveyor. When an
analyzer samples directly from its interface gate, the
station waits for an aspiration to complete before
shutting down. While in the shutdown state, no
communication with the LineMaster is possible.
Independent of the automation system, the analyzers
may continue operation.
Side Track The 2-meter section of track that runs parallel to the
main track and brings samples to the interface gate of a
connected analyzer or module. Samples enter the side
track through a divert gate.
Singulator A metal finger on a divert gate that extends and retracts.
Its function is to block pucks traveling on the conveyor
from passing the divert gate to allow the current puck in
the divert gate to be processed.
SIQ Sample-in-question.
SIQ Station A manual station on the automation system that has
extra functions for handling samples that need manual
operator intervention. The SIQ station may be either a
manual gate or a tray in the Sample Manager. Most SIQ
stations contain a worktable and terminal connected to
the LIS located near the gate.
The SIQ station is used as a place where the system sends
samples that cannot be directed to an analyzer gate
because the sample’s barcode could not be read, the
sample has no LIS workorder instructions, the sample has
been detected as a duplicate, or sampling problems
associated with this sample have occurred at an analyzer
(e.g., clotting, short sample, etc.). After the problem has
been corrected, the sample must be checked back into
the system.
Snap I/O Configurable standard component through which a
computer may receive input signals from analyzers,
modules, and sensors, as well as provide output drive
signals for analyzers and modules.
Solenoid Valve A valve actuated by the magnetic field produced in a
solenoid to control the flow of gas or fluid in a pipe.

Glossary
Sort Group A group of tests or procedures that cannot be performed

by the analyzers on the automation system, but may be
performed on non-automation analyzers or by manual
procedures. For convenience, sort groups are created for
groups of tests that will be performed on analyzers that
are not connected to the automation system.
In addition, sort groups are used for storing similar
sample types, such as hematology or urine samples, that
have a short storage life or that must not be refrigerated.
Sort groups are also used for the collection of particular
test types for permanent storage or study.
Sort List A printout of samples and their required tests, placed by
the Sample Manager in a load tray.
Sort Tray A tray in the Sample Manager designated as a particular
sort group. If the sort group samples need to be returned
to the automation system after offline processing, the
tray may be re-introduced to the Sample Manager as a
Load Mixed tray. All sort group tests are considered as
“route complete” once the tray has been removed from
the Sample Manager.
Sample ID The barcode number that identifies the sample to the
routing system. It is this part of the demographic field
that links the sample tube with the workorder from the
LIS.
Stack Lights See Router Stack Lights
Station A term used to describe a section of side track on a
conveyor at which a divert gate, an interface gate, an
analyzer or module, and its robotic hardware may be
connected.
System Screen A LineMaster screen that provides access to system
functions that allow the operator to view event logs,
search for samples, and define storage locations.
T
Test The act of analyzing a sample.
Track The central belt mechanism comprised of interlocking
nylon belt pieces called “Flex Link” that runs the length of
the conveyor. Sample tubes are transported from 1
connected analyzer or module to another on the track.

Glossary
Tray A device that holds up to one hundred sample tubes.

Each tray is uniquely barcoded on the top and all 4 sides
for easy identification in cold storage. A tray may be
placed into the Sample Manager and be given any 1 of
the following designations prior to closing the drawer
and reading the barcode:
Load Mixed tray, which contains samples ready to be
tested
Unload tray, which contains samples that have been
tested, and are ready to be removed from the
automation system
Partial Processed tray, which contains samples that have
not been able to complete routes to a particular analyzer
or Sort tray
SIQ tray, which contains samples that are samples-in-
question (SIQ) or unknown samples and performs the
same function as an SIQ station
Unknown tray, which is a spare tray not acted upon by
the Sample Manager
Sort tray, which contains samples that are sorted by tests
assigned in the named and designated sort group
U
Unknown Tray A spare tray not acted upon by the Sample Manager.
Unload Tray A tray that contains samples that have been tested, and
are ready to be removed from the automation system.
This type of tray must be empty when it is first
introduced to the Sample Manager. Unload trays are also
used for cold storage.
Unrouted A term used by the Router software to indicate that a test
or procedure has not been completed at an analyzer or
module, or a sample that has never been checked into
the system and had its barcode read.
URI Universal Robot Interface.
User Name The name of the operator logging on to the automation
system.
Users A function in the System screen of LineMaster that
contains system user information.

Glossary
Utilities Cabinet A component, used only for ADVIA LabCell systems, that
connects with the laboratory AC power, DI water, and
city water, and distributes these utilities to the
instruments via the utility section of the conveyor. The
Utilities Cabinet also provides compressed air, DC
voltages, Ethernet hub, conveyor drive motor,
emergency stop control, and Utility Control for the
system.
Utilities Enclosure A component, used only for ADVIA WorkCell CDX
systems, that that contains power distribution,
communication signals, and a power supply filter for the
system.
Utilities Screen A screen in LineMaster that allows the operator to view
details, access diagnostic functions, and change settings
to the Utilities Cabinet.
V
Visual Logic Controller Software that contains a development and runtime
(VLC) environment that is used by the automation system for
routing and gate control operations. VLC software is used
for the normal operation as well as the testing of gates
and barcode readers.
W
Wonderware Logger Software used by the Router to generate and maintain a
log file of Router activity. The Router uses the
Wonderware Logger as an event log and event viewer.
The Wonderware Logger may be used to trace a sample's
progress through the automation system for the purpose
of troubleshooting.
Workorder A description of the tests to be conducted on a specified
sample. Generated by the LIS, a workorder is
downloaded to all respective analyzers and to the Router
software by the LIS or ADVIA CentraLink system.
Workspace The user interface for the LineMaster software, which is
the primary point of interaction between the operator
and the automation system. The workspace is used to
manage the sample trays, monitor the status of stations,
and determine the location of samples. At the
workspace, the system buttons and station buttons are
always accessible.

Glossary
Workstation See Station.

X
X-axis The horizontal movement of a robot’s arm.
X-rail The mechanism the robot head travels along in the x-axis
to deliver sample tubes to the analyzer sample handler.
Y
Z
Z-axis The vertical movement of a robot’s arm.

Glossary

A check-in event 294
change to instrument state 295
Advanced Rerun 311
rerun 295
ADVIA 1650 system 49 Reset All 297
ADVIA 1800 system 49 Reset Sample 296
Set Routed, Set Routed All 298
ADVIA 2400 system 49
Set Unrouted, Set Unrouted All 299
ADVIA Centaur Station 51
Clinitek Atlas Station 55
ADVIA CentraLink System 74
Cold Storage (F4) 130
enable test status 287
location 131
ADVIA CentraLink system printing tray info 133
Advanced Rerun 311 purging tray info 133
ADVIA Chemistry Station communication pathways 77
overview 49 communications software 26
ADVIA Hematology Station configuring the system 247
overview 46 consult instructions for use symbol 350
alternating current (electricity) symbol 349 container orientation symbol 351
Automated retrieval feature 281 conveyor 27, 30
Automation systems
D
with a Decapper 99
without a Decapper 87 data management 293
date of manufacture symbol 351
B
Decapper Station 54
Backups
Dimension RxL System 60
automatic LineMaster database backup 279
Dimension Vista Systems 61
automatic system data backup 275
Direct Sample Return 288
Barcode Guidelines 333
do not to use if the package is damaged
biohazard symbol 349
symbol 351
C Duplicate Sample ID 194, 297
Cap status Duplicate SID Management 288
manually change 128 E
Cap Status Confirmation
electrical hazard symbol 349
Enabling 284
encourage recycling symbol 351
cautions symbol 349
errors
Centrifuge Module Station 53
server busy 209
Centrifuge Override SIQ errors
by Sample ID 283 Duplicate Sample ID 194
global 280
E-stop 39
Centrifuge Override tray 95

recover from conveyor E-stop 201 pre-test 251
E-stop button 204 Global Test List (F3) 253
E-stop cord 202 glossary 371
recover from station E-stop 206
Sample Manager 207 J
E-stop cord 30 IMMULITE Systems 62
event Inlabbing 75
acknowledge 188 LAS 75
archive 188 transmission errors 226
color indicators 185
instrument test list 257
event logs 186
adding a test 257
events
deleting a test 259
SIQ events 189, 191
Interface computer 26, 209
European Union compliance symbol 352
reboot and reestablish communication 209
F pcAnywhere 209
fragile symbol 350 K

Function keep the product dry symbol 351
Reset All 87, 297
Reset Sample 296 L
Set All Routed 298 LAS status update messages 74
Set All Unrouted 299
Set Routed 298 light tower 32
Set Unrouted 299 LineMaster software 64
G LineMaster windows 68
Load Mixed tray 91
gate
Load Zones
divert gate 41
interface gate 41 adding 271
editing 273
gates 25
Locating a sample 118
overview 40
location
Global Router Settings (Cntrl F6) 223
of a computer connection symbol 350
empty puck percentage threshold 223 of a fuse symbol 350
Overrides tab 281 of a power connector symbol 350
Global Router Settings (Ctrl F6)
Automated Retrieval tab 282
M
global test list 249 main power switch symbol 350
test type main power supply
end of line 253 is off symbol 350
LIS code 251 is on symbol 350
post test 252 main track 28

maintaining the system 137 N
maintenance
name and location of manufacturer
as-needed maintenance 173 symbol 351
add oil to compressor 176
clean main track 177 O
clean side track 178 oil compressor waste bottle 175
empty air prep unit waste container 176 oil-less air compressor waste bottle 173
empty waste bottle for oil compressor 175
operating
empty waste bottle for oil-less air
compressor 173 system 85
replace robot gripper fingers 179 operator’s guide
software 180 introduction 13
restore system data 180 orderable supplies 327
daily maintenance 137 ordering a part symbol 351
air prep unit 141 Override a Test Activy 264
clean sample trays 148
DI water supply 142 P
inspect main track 147 Partial Processed tray 92
inspect robot gripper fingers 145
activating automated retrieval 281
inspect side track 148 automated retrieval 304
inspect the gates 142 pcAnywhere 209
oil compressor 140
pick list area 117
oil-less air compressor 137
printing pick list 119
monthly maintenance 160
clean pucks 161 Post test by LIS code 302
software 170 Post test by sample type 303
manual system data backup 171 Pre and Post Tests (Shift F5) 260
puck count 170 by Location 262
weekly maintenance 149 by Sample Type 261
clean gates 150 Location Override 264
software 156 Pre-test
archive event log 156 by sample type 302
reboot system 157 Pre-test by LIS code 302
manufacturer’s representative for Europe printed with soy ink symbol 351
symbol 351
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 25
message line 65
protective earth (GND) conductor terminal
moving component symbol 349 symbol 350
Multizone tray 95, 219 puck 15, 161, 164
puck maintenance tool 161

R manual check-in on an automation system
with Decapper 113
recycling of corrugated materials symbol 351 Sample tube 37
Reset All 297 Samples in Route
Reset Sample 296 viewing 130
result upload 75 Scheduled tasks 274
revision letter of a part symbol 351 Screen
risk of exposure to lasers symbol 349 Sample Query and Pick List (F3) 116
robot 26 SIQ (F5) 122
robot grippers 220 serial number symbol 351
Route to SIQ 127 service
Router software 72 under warranty 323
routing priority 301 Set All Routed 129, 298
rerun and rerun with dilution 306 Set All Unrouted 130, 299
rules 301 Set Routed 129, 298
with post tests 302
Set Unrouted 130, 299
with pre-tests 301
setup
S system 247
safety information 313 shift
sample archive and location information 75 beginning of shift activities 86
Sample in Question (SIQ) end of shift activities 134
overview 52 Side track 26
Sample Manager 108 SIQ
Details window 89 Cap Status Confirmation 124
drawers 38 SIQ (F5) 122
managing trays 89 Errors tab 126
manual restart 213 Reset Sample 127
overview 36 Route to SIQ 127
reintroduce sample tubes after white Set All Routed 129, 200
shutdown 214 Set All Unrouted 130, 201
restart using pcAnywhere 210 Set Routed 129, 199
starting 107 Set Unrouted 130, 200
Sample Query and Pick List (F3) 116 Workorders tab 127
sample query area 117 SIQ Station 52
Sample tray 37 SIQ station 109
cover 131 SIQ tray 93
Sample Trays 89 activating automated retrieval 281
Sample Tube Sort Group
introducing samples to track 108, 111 deleting 269

sort groups 265, 303 ordering a part 351
add test to sort group 266 printed with soy ink 351
assign sort group to tray 268 protective earth (GND) conductor 350
create sort group 266 recycling of corrugated materials 351
revision letter of a part 351
Sort tray 93, 219
risk of exposure to lasers 349
specifications 329 serial number 351
Stage STA-R System 57 temperature limitation 350
warnings 349
Starting the track 106
WEEE European Directive 350
STAT
system
enabling STAT instrument 286
configuration 247
STAT sample 111 data management 293
STAT tray 94 maintenance 137
station button 65 operation 85
orderable supplies 327
Stations safety 313
bringing stations online 105 specifications 329
overview 45 symbols 349
status bar 65 troubleshooting 185
warranty 323
supplies
warranty and support 323
orderable 327 system buttons 65
symbols 349
system setup 247
alternating current (electricity) 349
system state
biohazard 349
cautions 349 offline 67
consult instructions for use 350 online 67
container orientation 351 shutdown 67
date of manufacture 351 system support 323
do not to use if the package is damaged 351
electrical hazard 349 T
encourage recycling 351 temperature limitation symbol 350
European Union compliance 352
fragile 350 Test Status
keep the product dry 351 ADVIA CentraLink System 287
location of a computer connection 350 Track
location of a fuse 350
starting 106
location of a power connector 350
main power switch 350 Transmission errors 224, 226
main power supply is off 350 Tray type
main power supply is on 350 autoswitch 96
manufacturer’s representative for Centrifuge override 95
Europe 351
defining tray types 103
moving component 349
load mixed 91
name and location of manufacturer 351

partial processed 93
automated retrieval 304
SIQ 93
sort 93
STAT 94
Unload 116
unload 91
Trays
expire 116
loading trays 103, 104
tray covers 131
unloading trays 113
troubleshooting the system 185
W
warning symbol 349
warranty 323
warranty and support 323
WEEE European Directive symbol 350
VersaCell 62
Window
Cold Storage (F4) 130
Event Log 187
Event Log (F2) 187
Global Router Settings (Cntrl F6) 87, 223,
281, 282
Global Test List (F3) 253
Override by SID (Ctrl F7) 283
Pre and Post Tests (Shift F5) 260
Sample Query and Pick List (F3) 116
Scheduled Tasks (Ctrl F2) 275
SIQ (F5) 190
Sort Groups (Shift F4) 266
Unload tray 91
Workorders
transmission errors 224
users 85
operator 85, 247
system administrator 85, 247
utilities cabinet 33

040D0031-03 ADVIA AUTOMATION SOLUTIONS OPERATORS GUIDE ENGLISH, Rev. A, 2011-09 DXDCM 09008b8380601b61-1363356238429 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

040D0031-03 ADVIA AUTOMATION SOLUTIONS OPERATORS GUIDE ENGLISH, Rev. A, 2011-09 DXDCM 09008b8380601b61-1363356238429 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ADVIA® LabCell®

ADVIA® Automation Solutions

040D0031-03 Rev. A, 2011-09

Appendix A: Safety Information

Appendix B: Warranty and Support Information

Appendix C: Orderable Supplies

This Operator’s Guide applies to System Software 4.9 and higher.

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 13

Figure 1-1: Automation Track

14 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

Figure 1-2: Automation Track (Top View)

For ADVIA WorkCell ™ CDX systems, utilities are accommodated as per

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 15

16 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

User configurable The system does not require software

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 17

How the System Works

Figure 1-3: Sample Manager

18 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

Figure 1-4: Sample Manager Robot

1. Sample Manager robot

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 19

The Router software is a component of the LineMaster software that

Figure 1-5: Gates

20 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

Figure 1-6: Robot Arm and Sample Tube

When aspiration of the sample is complete, the robotic arm at the

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 21

22 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

A robot station interfaces an instrument or module that cannot aspirate

Figure 1-7: Robot Arm and ADVIA Hematology Tube Rack

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 23

A non-robot station interfaces an automation-ready instrument or module

Figure 1-8: Aspiration Probe

1. Aspiration probe of the ADVIA Chemistry system

24 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

• A module, such as the Sample Manager, has an integrated robot that

Figure 1-9: Sample Manager Robot

1. Sample Manager robot

ADVIA Automation Solutions stations have the following components:

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 25

An ADVIA LabCell system supports up to 16 stations: at least 1 station for

26 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

Figure 1-10: Conveyor

1. Upper portion of conveyor

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 27

Tracks and Pucks

Figure 1-11: Automation Track

28 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

Figure 1-12: Sample Tube in Puck

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 29

Track Emergency Stop

Figure 1-13: Track Emergency Stop

30 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

• ADVIA WorkCell CDX systems have an E-stop button on both sides of

Figure 1-14: ADVIA WorkCell CDX E-stop Button

• ADVIA LabCell systems only have 1 E-stop button on the Utilities

Figure 1-15: ADVIA LabCell E-stop Button

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 31

Figure 1-16: Light Tower

32 ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide

Figure 1-17: Utilities Cabinet

ADVIA Automation Solutions Operator’s Guide 33